Samsung Medical Alarms 7100 Users Manual UK_OfficeServ Call Server Programming Guide

7100 to the manual df2b25fe-4fcf-42ee-8246-a7a744abd573

2015-01-23

: Samsung Samsung-Samsung-Medical-Alarms-7100-Users-Manual-280843 samsung-samsung-medical-alarms-7100-users-manual-280843 samsung pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 407

DownloadSamsung Samsung-Samsung-Medical-Alarms-7100-Users-Manual UK_OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
Ed.

00

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server

Programming Guide

COPYRIGHT
This guide is proprietary to SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. and is protected by copyright.
No information contained herein may be copied, translated, transcribed or duplicated for any commercial purposes or disclosed to the third party in any form without the prior written consent of SAMSUNG Electronics Co.,
Ltd.

TRADEMARKS
is the trademark of SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Product names mentioned in this guide may be trademarks and/or registered trademarks of their respective
companies.

This guide should be read and used as a guideline for properly installing and operating the product.
This guide may be changed for the system improvement, standardization and other technical reasons without prior
notice.
If you need updated guides or have any questions concerning the contents of the guides, contact our Document Center
at the following address or Web site:
Address: Document Center 18th Floor IT Center. Dong-Suwon P.O. Box 105, 416, Maetan-3dong Yeongtonggu, Suwon-si, Gyeonggi-do, Korea 442-600
Homepage: http://www.samsungdocs.com

©2007 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

All rights reserved.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

INTRODUCTION

Purpose
This guide describes a programming method for the OfficeServ 7100 system users.
OfficeServ 7100 allows you to utilize a digital phone to simply change the system setup.
Likewise, using a phone to change the system setup is called MMC(Man Machine Communication) program. This guide describes how to program a digital phone.

Audience
This guide is intended for users who program the MMC of the OfficeServ 7100 system.

Guide Contents
This guide is composed of two Chapters and Abbreviation. Each chapter is introduced as
follows:
CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming
This chapter describes things to know before starting MMC programming and about the
buttons of digital phone and cautions.
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
This chapter describes in detail how to use each MMC program. MMCs are listed in numerical order.
ABBREVIATION
Acronyms frequently used in this document are described.

Samsung Business Communications

I

Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

Conventions
The following types of paragraphs contain special information that must be carefully read
and thoroughly understood. Such information may or may not be enclosed in a rectangular
box, separating it from the main text, but is always preceded by an icon and/or a bold title.

WARNING
Provides information or instructions that the reader should follow in order to avoid
personal injury or fatality.

CAUTION
Provides information or instructions that the reader should follow in order to avoid
a service failure or damage to the system.

CHECKPOINT
Provides the operator with checkpoints for stable system operation.

NOTE
Indicates additional information as a reference.

Console Screen Output

II

y

The lined box with ‘Courier New’ font will be used to distinguish between the main
content and console output screen text.

y

‘Bold Courier New’ font will indicate the value entered by the operator on the
console screen.

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Reference Guides
The following guides are also provided with your OfficeServ 7100 system.
OfficeServ 7100 Installation Guide
Describes the installation procedures and specifications for the OfficeServ 7100 system.
OfficeServ 7100 General Description
Describes the business features available with the OfficeServ 7100 system.
WIP-5000M User Guide
This is a user’s guide for the WIP-5000M mobile telephone that is designed to use the
wireless LAN provided by the OfficeServ 7100 system.

Revision History
EDITION

DATE OF ISSUE

REMARKS

00

02. 2007.

First Edition

Samsung Business Communications

III

Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

This page is intentionally left blank.

IV

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

SAFETY CONCERNS

For product safety and correct operation, the following information must be given to the
operator/user and shall be read before the installation and operation.

Symbols
Caution
Indication of a general caution

Restriction
Indication for prohibiting an action for a product

Instruction
Indication for commanding a specifically required action

Samsung Business Communications

V

Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

Warning

WARNING
CautionBefore using the Auto Record feature
Before using the Auto Record feature, make sure that you are not violating any
laws. Samsung is not responsible for any illegal use of this feature.

Caution

CAUTION
CALL COST(MMC 508)
Changing this value when there is a call in progress may result in an inaccurate
call cost. This MPD facility requires the Meter Pulse Detection version of the trunk
card.

When changing the MMC [506], [807] and [812]
MMC [506], [510], [807] and [812] should not be changed from the default levels
without the assistance of the local SAMSUNG distributor.

Compliance with the National Version Standards
For the national version, OfficeServ 7100 is designed to comply with the standards of the corresponding country. Therefore, if you need to use MMC 812 (Set
Country Code), please consult your dealer for advice.

VI

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

TABLE OF CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION

I

Purpose ...........................................................................................................................................I
Audience ..........................................................................................................................................I
Guide Contents ................................................................................................................................I
Conventions ....................................................................................................................................II
Console Screen Output...................................................................................................................II
Reference Guides ..........................................................................................................................III
Revision History .............................................................................................................................III

SAFETY CONCERNS

V

Symbols ......................................................................................................................................... V
Warning......................................................................................................................................... VI
Caution ......................................................................................................................................... VI

CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming

1-1

1.1

Introduction to Programming................................................................................................... 1-1

1.2

Digital Phones ........................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2.1

DCS Euro Phones.......................................................................................................... 1-2

1.2.2

DS/ITP-5000 Series Phones .......................................................................................... 1-3

1.3

Cautions in Programming ........................................................................................................ 1-6

1.4

Program List by User’s Level................................................................................................... 1-7
1.4.1

Station Level Programming ............................................................................................ 1-7

1.4.2

Operator Level Programming ......................................................................................... 1-8

1.5

Programming List by Name.....................................................................................................1-16

1.6

Program List by Function........................................................................................................1-23
1.6.1

Phone Function .............................................................................................................1-23

1.6.2

Networking Function .....................................................................................................1-24

1.6.3

VoIP Function................................................................................................................1-24

1.6.4

WLAN Function .............................................................................................................1-25

1.6.5

LCR Function ................................................................................................................1-25

1.6.6

Auto Attendant/Voice Mail Function...............................................................................1-26

Samsung Business Communications

VII

Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

1.6.7

Diagnosis Function........................................................................................................1-27

1.6.8

Hotel Function ...............................................................................................................1-27

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

2-1

2.1

Overview of Programming Procedure ..................................................................................... 2-1

2.2

Programming Procedure .......................................................................................................... 2-2
[100] STATION LOCK ................................................................................................................. 2-2
[101] CHANGE USER PASSCODE ............................................................................................ 2-4
[102] CALL FORWARD............................................................................................................... 2-5
[103] SET ANSWER MODE........................................................................................................ 2-7
[104] STATION NAME................................................................................................................. 2-9
[105] STATION SPEED DIAL.....................................................................................................2-11
[106] STATION SPEED DIAL NAME..........................................................................................2-13
[107] KEY EXTENDER ..............................................................................................................2-14
[108] STATION STATUS ............................................................................................................2-16
[109] DATE DISPLAY.................................................................................................................2-18
[110] STATION ON/OFF.............................................................................................................2-20
[111] PHONE RING TONE .........................................................................................................2-23
[112] ALARM REMINDER CLOCK.............................................................................................2-24
[113] VIEW MEMO NUMBER ....................................................................................................2-26
[114] PHONE VOLUME .............................................................................................................2-27
[115] SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE .....................................................................................2-29
[116] ALARM AND MESSAGE ...................................................................................................2-30
[117] EDIT TEXT MESSAGE .....................................................................................................2-32
[118] CONFERENCE GROUP ...................................................................................................2-33
[119] CALLER ID DISPLAY........................................................................................................2-35
[120] LARGE LCD OPTIONS.....................................................................................................2-36
[121] PHONE LANGUAGE ........................................................................................................2-38
[122] NEWS DISPLAY SPEED ..................................................................................................2-40
[125] EXECUTIVE STATE..........................................................................................................2-41
[199] SHOW LICENSE STATUS................................................................................................2-43
[200] OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING..............................................................................2-44
[201] CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE.................................................................................2-45
[202] CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE.....................................................................................2-46
[203] ASSIGN UA DEVICE ........................................................................................................2-48
[204] COMMON BELL CONTROL .............................................................................................2-49
[205] ASSIGN LOUD BELL ........................................................................................................2-50
[206] BARGE-IN TYPE ..............................................................................................................2-51
[207] ASSIGN VM/AA PORT......................................................................................................2-52

VIII

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[209] ASSIGN ADD-ON MODULE .............................................................................................2-54
[210] CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TENANT ...............................................................................2-55
[211] DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT .............................................................................................2-60
[214] DISA ALARM RINGING STATION ....................................................................................2-61
[217] TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION ............................................................................................2-62
[219] RELAY TYPE ....................................................................................................................2-64
[220] ISDN SERVICE TYPE ......................................................................................................2-65
[221] EXTENSION TYPE ...........................................................................................................2-66
[222] FAX PAIR ..........................................................................................................................2-68
[224] WAKE-UP ANNOUNCEMENT ..........................................................................................2-69
[300] CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION...............................................................................2-71
[301] ASSIGN STATION COS....................................................................................................2-73
[302] PICKUP GROUPS ............................................................................................................2-75
[303] ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY ...........................................................................................2-76
[304] ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE .................................................................................2-77
[305] ASSIGN FORCED CODE .................................................................................................2-79
[306] HOT LINE/OFF HOOK SELECTION.................................................................................2-80
[308] ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE .....................................................................2-81
[309] ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE ...................................................................................2-82
[310] LCR CLASS OF SERVICE ...............................................................................................2-83
[312] ALLOW CALLER ID ..........................................................................................................2-84
[314] CONFIRM OUTGOING CALL...........................................................................................2-85
[315] CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION......................................................................................2-86
[316] COPY STATION USABLE.................................................................................................2-89
[317] ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE ....................................................................................2-90
[318] DISTINCTIVE RINGING ...................................................................................................2-91
[319] BRANCH GROUP.............................................................................................................2-93
[320] PRESET FORWARD NO ANSWER..................................................................................2-94
[323] CALLING PARTY NUMBER..............................................................................................2-96
[326] RINGBACK TONE MESSAGE..........................................................................................2-97
[401] TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE..................................................................................................2-100
[402] TRUNK DIAL TYPE.........................................................................................................2-101
[403] TRUNK TOLL CLASS .....................................................................................................2-102
[404] TRUNK NAME ................................................................................................................2-104
[405] TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER .............................................................................................2-105
[406] TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT .........................................................................................2-106
[407] FORCED TRUNK RELEASE ..........................................................................................2-107
[408] ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE....................................................................................2-108
[409] TRUNK STATUS READ ..................................................................................................2-109
[410] ASSIGN DISA TRUNK .................................................................................................... 2-111

Samsung Business Communications

IX

Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[412] ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL ...............................................................................................2-112
[414] MPD/PRS SIGNAL .........................................................................................................2-113
[415] REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA ...............................................................................2-115
[417] E1/PRI CRC4 OPTION ...................................................................................................2-116
[418] BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART ......................................................................................2-117
[419] BRI OPTIONS.................................................................................................................2-118
[420] PRI OPTIONS.................................................................................................................2-122
[421] MSN DIGIT .....................................................................................................................2-124
[422] TRUNK COS...................................................................................................................2-125
[423] S/T MODE.......................................................................................................................2-127
[424] BRI S0 MAPPING ...........................................................................................................2-128
[425] CID TRUNKS ..................................................................................................................2-129
[426] TRUNK GAIN CONTROL ...............................................................................................2-130
[428] ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE........................................................................................2-131
[432] SET H-TRK .....................................................................................................................2-132
[433] COST RATE....................................................................................................................2-133
[434] CONNECTION STATUS .................................................................................................2-134
[436] TRUNK TMC GAIN .........................................................................................................2-137
[437] 16TRK GAIN CONTROL.................................................................................................2-138
[500] SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS..........................................................................................2-139
[501] SYSTEM TIMERS...........................................................................................................2-141
[502] STATION-WIDE TIMERS ................................................................................................2-147
[503] TRUNK-WIDE TIMERS...................................................................................................2-149
[504] PULSE MAKE/BREAK RATIO ........................................................................................2-152
[505] ASSIGN DATE AND TIME ..............................................................................................2-153
[506] TONE CADENCE............................................................................................................2-154
[507] ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME.............................................................................................2-156
[508] CALL COST ....................................................................................................................2-158
[510] SLI RING CADENCE ......................................................................................................2-159
[511] MSG WAITING LAMP CADENCE...................................................................................2-161
[512] HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT ................................................................................................2-162
[513] HOTEL TIMER ................................................................................................................2-163
[514] TONE SOURCE..............................................................................................................2-164
[515] DAYLIGHT ASSIGNMENT ..............................................................................................2-165
[600] ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP........................................................................................2-166
[601] ASSIGN STATION GROUP ............................................................................................2-167
[602] STATION GROUP NAME................................................................................................2-172
[603] ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP ...............................................................................................2-173
[604] ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE ...............................................................................2-175
[605] ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE .................................................................................2-176

X

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[606] ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK ................................................................................................2-177
[607] UCD OPTIONS ...............................................................................................................2-179
[608] ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK ..............................................................................................2-183
[609] CALL LOG BLOCK .........................................................................................................2-184
[611] ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING ...........................................................................................2-185
[612] ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE ...................................................................................2-186
[614] STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP .....................................................................................2-187
[615] MGI GROUP ...................................................................................................................2-188
[616] MGI USER ......................................................................................................................2-190
[700] COPY COS CONTENTS ................................................................................................2-191
[701] ASSIGN COS CONTENTS .............................................................................................2-192
[702] TOLL DENY TABLE ........................................................................................................2-196
[703] TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE ............................................................................................2-197
[704] ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER .........................................................................................2-199
[705] ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL.....................................................................................2-200
[706] SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME ..................................................................................2-201
[707] AUTHORIZATION CODE................................................................................................2-203
[708] ACCOUNT CODE ...........................................................................................................2-204
[709] TOLL PASS CODE/SPECIAL CODE TABLE ..................................................................2-205
[710] LCR DIGIT TABLE ..........................................................................................................2-207
[711] LCR TIME TABLE............................................................................................................2-208
[712] LCR ROUTE TABLE .......................................................................................................2-209
[713] LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE ...........................................................................................2-211
[714] DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION....................................................................2-213
[715] PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE...........................................................................2-216
[716] UK LCR OPTION ............................................................................................................2-217
[717] UCD AGENT ID ..............................................................................................................2-219
[718] MY AREA CODE .............................................................................................................2-220
[719] IDLE DISPLAY ................................................................................................................2-221
[720] COPY KEY PROGRAMMING .........................................................................................2-222
[721] SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING..........................................................................2-223
[722] STATION KEY PROGRAMMING ....................................................................................2-224
[723] SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING ....................................................................................2-228
[724] DIAL NUMBERING PLAN ...............................................................................................2-230
[725] SMDR OPTIONS ............................................................................................................2-236
[727] SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY ........................................................................................2-239
[728] CID TRANSLATION TABLE ............................................................................................2-240
[740] STATION PAIR................................................................................................................2-241
[746] COSTING DIAL PLAN ....................................................................................................2-242
[747] RATE CALCULATION TABLE.........................................................................................2-244

Samsung Business Communications

XI

Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[750] VM CARD RESTART ......................................................................................................2-246
[751] ASSIGN MAILBOX..........................................................................................................2-248
[752] AUTO RECORD..............................................................................................................2-249
[753] WARNING DESTINATION ..............................................................................................2-251
[754] VM HALT.........................................................................................................................2-252
[755] VM ALARM .....................................................................................................................2-253
[756] ASSIGN VMMOH............................................................................................................2-254
[757] VM IN/OUT .....................................................................................................................2-255
[758] VM DAY/NIGHT ..............................................................................................................2-256
[759] CLI RINGING ..................................................................................................................2-257
[760] ITEM COST TABLE ........................................................................................................2-259
[761] TAX RATE SETUP ..........................................................................................................2-261
[762] ROOM COST RATE........................................................................................................2-263
[763] SECOND LCR ................................................................................................................2-264
[800] ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM................................................................................2-266
[801] CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE .............................................................................2-267
[802] CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER ..........................................................................2-268
[805] TX LEVEL AND GAIN .....................................................................................................2-269
[806] CARD PRE-INSTALL ......................................................................................................2-271
[807] PHONE VOLUME CONTROL.........................................................................................2-273
[810] HALT PROCESSING ......................................................................................................2-275
[811] RESET SYSTEM.............................................................................................................2-276
[812] SET COUNTRY CODE ...................................................................................................2-277
[813] HOTEL OPERATION ......................................................................................................2-278
[815] CUSTOMER DATABASE COPY.....................................................................................2-279
[818] PROGRAM DOWNLOAD ...............................................................................................2-281
[819] MC FILE CONTROL .......................................................................................................2-282
[820] ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID .............................................................................................2-284
[821] ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK ..........................................................................................2-285
[822] VIRTUAL EXTENSION TYPE .........................................................................................2-286
[823] ASSIGN NETWORK COS...............................................................................................2-288
[824] NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION ...................................................................................2-290
[825] ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTIONS................................................................................2-292
[826] ASSIGN SYSTEM REFERENCE CLOCK.......................................................................2-294
[829] LAN PRINTER PARAMETERS.......................................................................................2-295
[830] ETHERNET PARAMETERS ...........................................................................................2-297
[831] MGI PARAMETERS........................................................................................................2-300
[832] VoIP ACCESS CODE......................................................................................................2-302
[833] VoIP IP TABLE ................................................................................................................2-304
[834] H.323 OPTIONS .............................................................................................................2-305

XII

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[835] MGI DSP OPTIONS........................................................................................................2-307
[836] H.323 GK OPTIONS .......................................................................................................2-310
[837] SIP OPTIONS .................................................................................................................2-312
[839] SIP USER .......................................................................................................................2-316
[838] PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES ..............................................................................................2-317
[840] IP PHONE INFORMATION .............................................................................................2-318
[841] SYSTEM IP OPTIONS....................................................................................................2-321
[845] WLAN PARAMETERS ....................................................................................................2-325
[846] WIP INFORMATION .......................................................................................................2-330
[848] WLAN IP/MAC LIST........................................................................................................2-332
[849] WLAN CONFIGURATION...............................................................................................2-333
[850] SYSTEM RESOURCE DISPLAY ....................................................................................2-335
[851] ALARM REPORTING......................................................................................................2-336
[852] SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS .................................................................................2-338
[853] MAINTENANCE BUSY ...................................................................................................2-345
[854] DIAGNOSTIC TIME ........................................................................................................2-347
[856] TECH PROGRAMMING LOGS ......................................................................................2-348
[857] VIRTUAL CABINET SET.................................................................................................2-349
[859] HARDWARE VERSION DISPLAY ..................................................................................2-351
[861] SYSTEM OPTIONS ........................................................................................................2-352
[863] NODE INFO ....................................................................................................................2-355
[890] INITIALIZE PORT ...........................................................................................................2-356

ABBREVIATION

I

A ~ C................................................................................................................................................I
D ~ I ................................................................................................................................................II
K ~ N..............................................................................................................................................III
O ~ S............................................................................................................................................. IV
T ~ V .............................................................................................................................................. V
W ~ X ............................................................................................................................................ VI

Samsung Business Communications

XIII

Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1.1

24B LCD DCS Euro Phone ..................................................................................... 1-2

Figure 1.2

DS-5038S Phone .................................................................................................... 1-3

Figure 1.3

DS/ITP-5014D/5021D Phone .................................................................................. 1-4

Figure 1.4

DS-5014S/5007S Phone ......................................................................................... 1-5

LIST OF TABLES
Table 1.1 Station Level Programming list ................................................................................. 1-7
Table 1.2

System Related MMC list.......................................................................................... 1-8

Table 1.3 Station Related MMC list........................................................................................... 1-9
Table 1.4 Trunk Related MMC list........................................................................................... 1-10
Table 1.5 Timer and Tone Related MMC list ............................................................................1-11
Table 1.6 Group Related MMC list...........................................................................................1-11
Table 1.7 Tables, Codes, AA, DECT and VM MMC list........................................................... 1-12
Table 1.8 Technician Level Programming list.......................................................................... 1-14
Table 1.9

Alphabetically arranged Programming list............................................................... 1-16

Table 1.10 Phone Function Programming list ......................................................................... 1-23
Table 1.11 Networking Function Programming list.................................................................. 1-24
Table 1.12 VoIP Function Programming list............................................................................ 1-24
Table 1.13 WLAN Function Programming list ......................................................................... 1-25
Table 1.14 LCR Function Programming list ............................................................................ 1-25
Table 1.15

Auto Attendant/Voice Mail Function Programming list........................................... 1-26

Table 1.16 Diagnosis Function Programming list.................................................................... 1-27
Table 1.17 Hotel Function Programming list ........................................................................... 1-27

XIV

© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

CHAPTER 1. Overview of MMC Programming

In this chapter, the things to know before you start MMC programming, and the phone buttons and cautions will be discussed.

1.1 Introduction to Programming
The MMC means the changes on the data that is used for the system operation program.
The MMC can be divided into programmable one and non-programmable one.
The programmable MMC is classified into 3 levels, such as technician, operator, and station level. The technician level programming and the operator level programming require a
passcode for each level and the station level programming does not require a passcode.

Program List by User’s Level
For more information about the programming level, refer to ‘1.4 Program List by
User’s Level’ of this chapter.

Samsung Business Communications

1-1

CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

1.2 Digital Phones
You need a digital display(LCD) phone in order to carry out programming. These include
DCS Euro keysets and DS/ITP 5000 Series keysets, and some examples are described in
the following sections. All use special programming buttons to select options on the display
screen.

1.2.1 DCS Euro Phones
Volume Control Buttons
Volume control for handset,
ring, speaker, etc

Soft Buttons(3)

Used to activate
features via the display

LCD

Scroll Button

Used to select start menu and
scroll through display options

Programmable Buttons
With tri-coloured LEDs:
24B = 16
12B = 8

Memory Button
Redial Button
DND Button
Speaker Button
Programmable Buttons
With red LEDs:
24B = 8, 12B = 4, 6B = 6

Microphone

Dial Button
Speaker

For hands-free operation.
Used in place of handset

Hold Button

Recall Button

Pullout Directory
Tray

Transfer Button ANS/RLS Button

Figure 1.1 24B LCD DCS Euro Phone

24B LCD phone has 24 programmable buttons: left column is numbered 1-12 from the top;
right column is numbered 13-24 from the top. Buttons 19 to 24 are special buttons ‘A–F’
used for programming.
12B LCD phone has 12 programmable buttons numbered 1-12 from top to bottom. Buttons 7 to 12 are special buttons ‘A–F’ used for programming.
6B LCD phone has 6 programmable buttons: left column is numbered 1-3 from the top;
right column is numbered 4-6 from the top. Buttons 1 to 3 are special buttons ‘A–C’ and
buttons 4 to 6 are special buttons ‘D–F’ used for programming.

1-2

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

The special buttons are referred to within the relevant MMCs. For example, button ‘A’ is
used to toggle between uppercase and lowercase characters when entering text on the display.
All programmable buttons can be programmed with functions as required.
The left soft button is used to save data or to move the cursor in the LCD display to the left.
The right soft button is used to save data or to move the cursor in the display to the right.
Other buttons also have special functions when in programming mode:
y ANS/RLS Button: Select ‘ALL’ option for making changes to all—rather than
individual—stations/trunks/etc.
y Hold Button: Clear an entry in the display.
y Volume Buttons: Scroll through display options.
y Transfer Button: Enter MMC programming mode or store data and exit programming
mode.
y Speaker Button: Store data and advance to next MMC.

1.2.2 DS/ITP-5000 Series Phones
These include the DS-5038S, DS/ITP-5021L, DS/ITP-5021D, DS/ITP-5014D, DS-5014S,
and DS-5007S. Examples are shown in the figures below.

Programmable Buttons(21)
Soft Buttons
Scroll Button
Speaker

Telephone Status Indicator
LCD Display

A Button

Volume Buttons
Redial Button
Conference Button
Transfer Button
Dial Buttons
Speaker Button

Programmable Buttons(17)

Hold Button
Microphone

Figure 1.2 DS-5038S Phone

Samsung Business Communications

1-3

CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

DS-/ITP5021D
(Programmable Buttons: 21)

DS/ITP-5014D
(Programmable Buttons: 14)

A Button

A Button

Programmable Buttons
Soft Buttons
Scroll Button
Telephone
Status Indicator
LCD Display

Speaker

Volume Button
Redial Button
Conference Button
Transfer Button
Navigation Button

Speaker Button
Dial Buttons
Hold Button
Microphone

Figure 1.3 DS/ITP-5014D/5021D Phone

1-4

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

DS-5014S
(Programmable Buttons: 14)

DS-5007S
(Programmable Buttons: 7)

A Button

A Button

Programmable Buttons
Soft Buttons
Scroll Button
Speaker

Status Indicator
LCD screen
Volume Button
Redial Button
Conference Button
Transfer Button

Dial Buttons
Speaker Button
Hold Button
Microphone

Figure 1.4 DS-5014S/5007S Phone

The DS/ITP-5000 series phones have 38, 21, 14 or 7 programmable buttons that can be
programmed with functions. Also, there are several other function buttons: the dial buttons,
the volume control buttons, the redial button that allows you to redial the last phone number dialled, the conference button for setting up conference calls, the transfer button used to
transfer a call to another station, the hold button to hold a call, the speaker button, and the
navigation buttons for easy selection of phone options and menus.
The LCD displays the station status and various other kinds of information. Using three
colors(red, green, and yellow) the station status indicator displays the current status of station.
When programming, other functions programmed on buttons are as follows:
y Volume Buttons: Scroll through items in the display.
y Redial Button: Select ‘ALL’ option for making changes to all, rather than individual,
stations/trunks/etc.
y Soft Buttons: Save data or move the cursor left and right.
y Speaker Button: Save data and proceed to the next program.
y Hold Button: Erase the previously entered item.
y A Button: Select uppercase or lowercase text.
y Transfer Button: Enter the programming mode.

Samsung Business Communications

1-5

CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

Using large LCD Phones

Large LCD phones(DS/ITP-5012L) do not have programmable buttons.
Instead, they display programming functions on the LCD to be selected
via the selection buttons. Refer to your keyset user guide for more information.

1.3 Cautions in Programming
y
y
y

Programming can be done only while the handset is placed on the phone in idle state.
Full programming can be done on any digital LCD phone.
Only station level programming is allowed on a phone that does not have an
LCD display.
y If the LCD displays an ‘INVALID DATA’ message while programming, reenter the
correct data.
y If no button is pressed for a certain period of time during programming
(default is 60 seconds), the phone returns to the idle state from programming mode.
y Programming mode halts if the handset is picked up or the Transfer button is
pressed or the phone is unplugged. Any data previously entered in the display is
saved.

1-6

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

1.4 Program List by User’s Level
The MMC program can be divided into programmable one and non-programmable one.
The programmable MMC is classified into 3 levels, such as technician, operator, and station level. In this section, the programmable MMC for each level will be introduced.

1.4.1 Station Level Programming
Programming can be done for only station level programs.
Table 1.1 Station Level Programming list
MMC No.

MMC Name

MMC: 100

STATION LOCK

MMC: 101

CHANGE USER PASSCODE

MMC: 102

CALL FORWARD

MMC: 103

SET ANSWER MODE

MMC: 104

STATION NAME

MMC: 105

STATION SPEED DIAL

MMC: 106

STATION SPEED DIAL NAME

MMC: 107

KEY EXTENDER

MMC: 108

STATION STATUS

MMC: 109

DATE DISPLAY

MMC: 110

STATION ON/OFF

MMC: 111

PHONE RING TONE

MMC: 112

ALARM REMINDER CLOCK

MMC: 113

VIEW MEMO NUMBER

MMC: 114

PHONE VOLUME

MMC: 115

SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE

MMC: 116

ALARM AND MESSAGE

MMC: 117

EDIT TEXT MESSAGE

MMC: 118

CONFERENCE GROUP

MMC: 119

CALLER ID DISPLAY

MMC: 120

LARGE LCD OPTIONS

MMC: 121

PHONE LANGUAGE

MMC: 122

NEWS DISPLAY SPEED

MMC: 125

EXECUTIVE STATE

MMC: 199

SHOW LICENSE

Samsung Business Communications

1-7

CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

1.4.2 Operator Level Programming
A technician can do programming within the range set by the MMC [802] CUSTOMER
ACCESS MMC NUMBER.
Programming is allowed for any phone within the tenant group, but it can be done for only
one phone at a time.

1.4.2.1 System Related MMC
The MMC programs related to the function of the system are as follows:
Table 1.2 System Related MMC list
MMC No.

1-8

MMC Name

MMC: 200

OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING

MMC: 201

CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE

MMC: 202

CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE

MMC: 203

ASSIGN UA DEVICE

MMC: 204

COMMON BELL CONTROL

MMC: 205

ASSIGN LOUD BELL

MMC: 206

BARGE-IN TYPE

MMC: 207

ASSIGN VM/AA PORT

MMC: 208

ASSIGN RING TYPE

MMC: 209

ASSIGN ADD-ON MODULE

MMC: 210

CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TENANT

MMC: 211

DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT

MMC: 214

DISA ALARM RINGING STATION

MMC: 217

TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION

MMC: 219

RELAY TYPE

MMC: 220

ISDN SERVICE TYPE

MMC: 221

EXTENSION TYPE

MMC: 222

FAX PAIR

MMC: 224

WAKE-UP ANNOUNCEMENT

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

1.4.2.2 Station Related MMC
The MMC programs related to the function of the station are as follows:
Table 1.3 Station Related MMC list
MMC No.

MMC Name

MMC: 300

CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION

MMC: 301

ASSIGN STATION COS

MMC: 302

PICKUP GROUPS

MMC: 303

ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY

MMC: 304

ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE

MMC: 305

ASSIGN FORCED CODE

MMC: 306

HOT LINE/OFF HOOK SELECTION

MMC: 308

ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE

MMC: 309

ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE

MMC: 310

LCR CLASS OF SERVICE

MMC: 312

ALLOW CALLER ID

MMC: 314

CONFIRM OUTGOING CALL

MMC: 315

CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION

MMC: 316

COPY STATION USABLE

MMC: 317

ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE

MMC: 318

DISTINCTIVE RINGING

MMC: 319

BRANCH GROUP

MMC: 320

PRESET FORWARD NO ANSWER

MMC: 323

CALLING PARTY NUMBER

MMC: 326

RBT MESSAGE

Samsung Business Communications

1-9

CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

1.4.2.3 Trunk Related MMC
The MMC programs related to the function of the trunk are as follows:
Table 1.4 Trunk Related MMC list

1-10

MMC No.

MMC Name

MMC: 400

CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK

MMC: 401

TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE

MMC: 402

TRUNK DIAL TYPE

MMC: 403

TRUNK TOLL CLASS

MMC: 404

TRUNK NAME

MMC: 405

TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER

MMC: 406

TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT

MMC: 407

FORCED TRUNK RELEASE

MMC: 408

ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE

MMC: 409

TRUNK STATUS READ

MMC: 410

ASSIGN DISA TRUNK

MMC: 412

ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL

MMC: 414

MPD/PRS SIGNAL

MMC: 415

REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA

MMC: 417

E1/PRI CRC4

MMC: 418

BRI & PRI CARD RESTART

MMC: 419

BRI OPTIONS

MMC: 420

PRI OPTIONS

MMC: 421

MSN DIGIT

MMC: 422

TRUNK COS

MMC: 423

S/T MODE

MMC: 424

BRI S0 MAPPING

MMC: 425

CID TRUNKS

MMC: 426

TRUNK GAIN CONTROL

MMC: 428

ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE

MMC: 432

SET H-TRK

MMC: 433

COST RATE

MMC: 434

CONNECTION STATUS

MMC: 436

TRUNK TMC GAIN

MMCL 437

16TRK GAIN

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

1.4.2.4 Timer and Tone Related MMC
The MMC programs related to the function of the timer and tone are as follows:
Table 1.5 Timer and Tone Related MMC list
MMC No.

MMC Name

MMC: 500

SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS

MMC: 501

SYSTEM TIMERS

MMC: 502

STATION-WIDE TIMERS

MMC: 503

TRUNK-WIDE TIMERS

MMC: 504

PULSE MAKE/BREAK RATIO

MMC: 505

ASSIGN DATE AND TIME

MMC: 506

TONE CADENCE

MMC: 507

ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME

MMC: 508

CALL COST

MMC: 510

SLI RING CADENCE

MMC: 511

MSG WAITING LAMP CADENCE

MMC: 512

HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT

MMC: 513

HOTEL TIMER

MMC: 514

TONE SOURCE

MMC: 515

DAYLIGHT ASSIGNMENT

1.4.2.5 Group Related MMC
The MMC programs related to the function of a group are as follows:
Table 1.6 Group Related MMC list
MMC No.

MMC Name

MMC: 600

ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP

MMC: 601

ASSIGN STATION GROUP

MMC: 602

STATION GROUP NAME

MMC: 603

ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP

MMC: 604

ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE

MMC: 605

ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE

MMC: 606

ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK

MMC: 607

UCD OPTIONS

MMC: 608

ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK

MMC: 609

CALL LOG BLOCK

MMC: 611

ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING

MMC: 612

ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE

Samsung Business Communications

1-11

CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

Table 1.6 Group Related MMC list(continued)
MMC No.

MMC Name

MMC: 614

STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP

MMC: 615

MGI GROUP

MMC: 616

MGI USER

1.4.2.6 Tables, Codes, AA, DECT and VM MMC
The MMC programs related to the function of the tables, codes, AA, DECT and VM are as
follows:
Table 1.7 Tables, Codes, AA, DECT and VM MMC list
MMC No.

1-12

MMC Name

MMC: 700

COPY COS CONTENTS

MMC: 701

ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

MMC: 702

TOLL DENY TABLE

MMC: 703

TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE

MMC: 704

ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER

MMC: 705

ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL

MMC: 706

SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME

MMC: 707

AUTHORIZATION CODE

MMC: 708

ACCOUNT CODE

MMC: 709

TOLL PASS CODE/SPECIAL CODE TABLE

MMC: 710

LCR DIGIT TABLE

MMC: 711

LCR TIME TABLE

MMC: 712

LCR ROUTE TABLE

MMC: 713

LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE

MMC: 714

DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION

MMC: 715

PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE

MMC: 716

UK LCR OPTION

MMC: 717

UCD AGENT ID

MMC: 718

MY AREA CODE

MMC: 719

IDLE DISPLAY

MMC: 720

COPY KEY PROGRAMMING

MMC: 721

SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

MMC: 722

STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

MMC: 723

SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING

MMC: 724

DIAL NUMBERING PLAN

MMC: 725

SMDR OPTIONS

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Table 1.7 Tables, Codes, AA, DECT and VM MMC list(continued)
MMC No.

MMC Name

MMC: 727

SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY

MMC: 728

CID TRANSLATION TABLE

MMC: 740

STATION PAIR

MMC: 746

COSTING DIAL PLAN

MMC: 747

RATE CALCULATION TABLE

MMC: 750

VM CARD RESTART

MMC: 751

ASSIGN MAILBOX

MMC: 752

AUTO RECORD

MMC: 753

WARNING DESTINATION

MMC: 754

VM HALT

MMC: 755

VM ALARM

MMC: 756

ASSIGN VMMOH

MMC: 757

VM IN/OUT

MMC: 758

VM DAY/NIGHT

MMC: 759

CLI RINGING

MMC: 760

ITEM COST TABLE

MMC: 761

TAX RATE SETUP

MMC: 762

ROOM COST RATE

MMC: 763

SECOND LCR

Samsung Business Communications

1-13

CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

1.4.3

Technician Level Programming
This level is allowed to program every level of program.
This level of programming can be done on every phone within the system, but it can be
done for only one phone at a time.
Table 1.8 Technician Level Programming list

1-14

MMC No.

MMC Name

MMC: 800

ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM

MMC: 801

CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE

MMC: 802

CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER

MMC: 804

SYS. I/O MODE

MMC: 805

TX LEVEL AND GAIN

MMC: 806

CARD PRE-INSTALL

MMC: 807

PHONE VOLUME CONTROL

MMC: 810

HALT PROCESSING

MMC: 811

RESET SYSTEM

MMC: 812

SET COUNTRY CODE

MMC: 813

HOTEL OPERATION

MMC: 815

CUSTOMER DATABASE COPY

MMC: 818

PROGRAM DOWNLOAD

MMC: 819

MC FILE CONTROL

MMC: 820

ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID

MMC: 821

ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK

MMC: 822

VIRTUAL EXTENSION TYPE

MMC: 823

ASSIGN NETWORK COS

MMC: 824

NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION

MMC: 825

ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTIONS

MMC: 826

ASSIGN SYSTEM REFERENCE CLOCK

MMC: 829

LAN PRINTER PARAMETERS

MMC: 830

ETHERNET PARAMETERS

MMC: 831

MGI PARAMETERS

MMC: 832

VoIP ACCESS CODE

MMC: 833

VoIP IP TABLE

MMC: 834

H.323 OPTIONS

MMC: 835

MGI DSP OPTIONS

MMC: 836

H.323 GK OPTIONS

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Table 1.8 Technician Level Programming list(continued)
MMC No.

MMC Name

MMC: 837

SIP OPTIONS

MMC: 838

PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES

MMC: 839

SIP USER

MMC: 840

IP PHONE INFORMATION

MMC: 841

SYSTEM IP OPTIONS

MMC: 845

WLAN PARAMETERS

MMC: 846

WIP INFORMATION

MMC: 848

WLAN IP/MAC LIST

MMC: 849

WLAN CONFIGURATION

MMC: 850

SYSTEM RESOURCE DISPLAY

MMC: 851

ALARM REPORTING

MMC: 852

SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS

MMC: 853

MAINTENANCE BUSY

MMC: 854

DIAGNOSTIC TIME

MMC: 856

TECH PROGRAMMING LOGS

MMC: 857

VIRTUAL CABINET

MMC: 859

HARDWARE VERSION DISPLAY

MMC: 861

SYSTEM OPTIONS

MMC: 863

NODE INFO

MMC: 890

INITIALIZE PORT

Samsung Business Communications

1-15

CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

1.5 Programming List by Name
This programming list is arranged alphabetically
Table 1.9

Alphabetically arranged Programming list

MMC Name

1-16

MMC No.

ACCOUNT CODE

MMC: 708

ALARM AND MESSAGE

MMC: 116

ALARM REMINDER CLOCK

MMC: 112

ALARM REPORTING

MMC: 851

ALLOW CALLER ID

MMC: 312

ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE

MMC: 612

ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING

MMC: 611

ASSIGN ADD ON MODULE

MMC: 209

ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE

MMC: 308

ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY

MMC: 303

ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

MMC: 701

ASSIGN DATE AND TIME

MMC: 505

ASSIGN DISA TRUNK

MMC: 410

ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE

MMC: 304

ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE

MMC: 605

ASSIGN FORCED CODE

MMC: 305

ASSIGN LOUD BELL

MMC: 205

ASSIGN MAILBOX

MMC: 751

ASSIGN NETWORK COS

MMC: 823

ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK

MMC: 821

ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTIONS

MMC: 825

ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP

MMC: 600

ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK

MMC: 608

ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME

MMC: 507

ASSIGN RING TYPE

MMC: 208

ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK

MMC: 606

ASSIGN STATION COS

MMC: 301

ASSIGN STATION GROUP

MMC: 601

ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE

MMC: 309

ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE

MMC: 604

ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE

MMC: 317

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Table 1.9

Alphabetically arranged Programming list(continued)
MMC Name

MMC No.

ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID

MMC: 820

ASSIGN SYSTEM REFERENCE CLOCK

MMC: 826

ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL

MMC: 705

ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP

MMC: 603

ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE

MMC: 408

ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL

MMC: 412

ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE

MMC: 428

ASSIGN UA DEVICE

MMC: 203

ASSIGN VMMOH

MMC: 756

ASSIGN VM/AA PORT

MMC: 207

ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER

MMC: 704

AUTHORIZATION CODE

MMC: 707

AUTO RECORD

MMC: 752

BARGE-IN TYPE

MMC: 206

BRANCH GROUP

MMC: 319

BRI & PRI CARD RESTART

MMC: 418

BRI OPTIONS

MMC: 419

BSI RF CARRIER

MMC: 747

BRI S0 MAPPING

MMC: 424

CALL COST

MMC: 508

CALL FORWARD

MMC: 102

CALL LOG BLOCK

MMC: 609

CALLER ID DISPLAY

MMC: 119

CALLING PARTY NUMBER

MMC: 323

CARD PRE-INSTALL

MMC: 806

CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE

MMC: 201

CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE

MMC: 202

CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE

MMC: 801

CHANGE USER PASSCODE

MMC: 101

CID TRANSLATION TABLE

MMC: 728

CID TRUNKS

MMC: 425

CLI RINGING

MMC: 759

COMMON BELL CONTROL

MMC: 204

CONFERENCE GROUP

MMC: 118

Samsung Business Communications

1-17

CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

Table 1.9

Alphabetically arranged Programming list(continued)
MMC Name

1-18

MMC No.

CONFIRM OUTGOING CALL

MMC: 314

CONNECTION STATUS

MMC: 434

COPY COS CONTENTS

MMC: 700

COPY KEY PROGRAMMING

MMC: 720

COPY STATION USABLE

MMC: 316

COST RATE

MMC: 433

COSTING DIAL PLAN

MMC: 746

CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER

MMC: 802

CUSTOMER DATABASE COPY

MMC: 815

CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION

MMC: 300

CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TENANT

MMC: 210

CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK

MMC: 400

CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION

MMC: 315

DATE DISPLAY

MMC: 109

DAYLIGHT ASSIGNMENT

MMC: 515

DIAGNOSTIC TIME

MMC: 854

DIAL NUMBERING PLAN

MMC: 724

DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION

MMC: 714

DISA ALARM RINGING STATION

MMC: 214

DISTINCTIVE RINGING

MMC: 318

DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT

MMC: 211

E1/PRI CRC4 OPTION

MMC: 417

EDIT TEXT MESSAGE

MMC: 117

ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM

MMC: 800

ETHERNET PARAMETERS

MMC: 830

EXECUTIVE STATE

MMC: 125

EXTENSION TYPE

MMC: 221

FAX PAIR

MMC: 222

FORCED TRUNK RELEASE

MMC: 407

H.323 GK OPTIONS

MMC: 836

H.323 OPTIONS

MMC: 834

HALT PROCESSING

MMC: 810

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Table 1.9

Alphabetically arranged Programming list(continued)
MMC Name

MMC No.

HARDWARE VERSION DISPLAY

MMC: 859

HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT

MMC: 512

HOT LINE/OFF HOOK SELECTION

MMC: 306

HOTEL OPERATION

MMC: 813

HOTEL TIMER

MMC: 513

IDLE DISPLAY

MMC: 719

INITIALIZE PORT

MMC: 890

IP PHONE INFORMATION

MMC: 840

ISDN SERVICE TYPE

MMC: 220

ITEM COST TABLE

MMC: 760

KEY EXTENDER

MMC: 107

LAN PRINTER PARAMETERS

MMC: 829

LARGE LCD OPTIONS

MMC: 120

LCR CLASS OF SERVICE

MMC: 310

LCR DIGIT TABLE

MMC: 710

LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE

MMC: 713

LCR ROUTE TABLE

MMC: 712

LCR TIME TABLE

MMC: 711

MAINTENANCE BUSY

MMC: 853

MGI DSP OPTIONS

MMC: 835

MGI GROUP

MMC: 615

MGI PARAMETERS

MMC: 831

MGI USER

MMC: 616

MPD/PRS SIGNAL

MMC: 414

MSG WAITING LAMP CADENCE

MMC: 511

MSN DIGIT

MMC: 421

MY AREA CODE

MMC: 718

NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION

MMC: 824

NEWS DISPLAY SPEED

MMC: 122

NODE INFO

MMC: 863

OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING

MMC: 200

PHONE LANGUAGE

MMC: 121

PHONE RING TONE

MMC: 111

PHONE VOLUME

MMC: 114

PHONE VOLUME CONTROL

MMC: 807

Samsung Business Communications

1-19

CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

Table 1.9

Alphabetically arranged Programming list(continued)
MMC Name

1-20

MMC No.

PICKUP GROUPS

MMC: 302

PRESET FORWARD NO ANSWER

MMC: 320

PRI OPTIONS

MMC: 420

PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES

MMC: 838

PROGRAM DOWNLOAD

MMC: 818

PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE

MMC: 715

PULSE MAKE/BREAK RATIO

MMC: 504

RATE CALCULATION TABLE

MMC: 747

RBT MESSAGE

MMC: 326

RELAY TYPE

MMC: 219

REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA

MMC: 415

RESET SYSTEM

MMC: 811

ROOM COST RATE

MMC: 762

S/T MODE

MMC: 423

SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

MMC: 721

SECOND LCR

MMC: 763

SET ANSWER MODE

MMC: 103

SET COUNTRY CODE

MMC: 812

SET H-TRK

MMC: 432

SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE

MMC: 115

SHOW LICENSE

MMC: 199

SIP OPTIONS

MMC: 837

SIP USER

MMC: 839

SLI RING CADENCE

MMC: 510

MC FILE CONTROL

MMC: 819

SMDR OPTIONS

MMC: 725

STATION GROUP NAME

MMC: 602

STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

MMC: 722

STATION LOCK

MMC: 100

STATION NAME

MMC: 104

STATION ON/OFF

MMC: 110

STATION PAIR

MMC: 740

STATION SPEED DIAL

MMC: 105

STATION SPEED DIAL NAME

MMC: 106

STATION STATUS

MMC: 108

STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP

MMC: 614

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Table 1.9

Alphabetically arranged Programming list(continued)
MMC Name

MMC No.

STATION-WIDE TIMERS

MMC: 502

SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS

MMC: 852

SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING

MMC: 723

SYSTEM SIO MODE

MMC: 804

SYSTEM IP OPTIONS

MMC: 841

SYSTEM OPTIONS

MMC: 861

SYSTEM RESOURCE DISPLAY

MMC: 850

SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME

MMC: 706

SYSTEM TIMERS

MMC: 501

SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY

MMC: 727

SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS

MMC: 500

TAX RATE SETUP

MMC: 761

TECH PROGRAMMING LOGS

MMC: 856

TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE

MMC: 703

TOLL DENY TABLE

MMC: 702

TOLL PASS CODE/SPECIAL CODE TABLE

MMC: 709

TONE CADENCE

MMC: 506

TONE SOURCE

MMC: 514

TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION

MMC: 217

TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER

MMC: 405

TRUNK COS

MMC: 422

TRUNK DIAL TYPE

MMC: 402

TRUNK GAIN CONTROL

MMC: 426

TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE

MMC: 401

TRUNK NAME

MMC: 404

TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT

MMC: 406

TRUNK STATUS READ

MMC: 409

TRUNK TMC GAIN

MMC: 436

TRUNK TOLL CLASS

MMC: 403

TRUNK-WIDE TIMERS

MMC: 503

TX LEVEL AND GAIN

MMC: 805

UCD AGENT ID

MMC: 717

UCD OPTIONS

MMC: 607

UK LCR OPTION

MMC: 716

VIEW MEMO NUMBER

MMC: 113

Samsung Business Communications

1-21

CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

Table 1.9

Alphabetically arranged Programming list(continued)
MMC Name

1-22

MMC No.

VIRTUAL EXTENSION TYPE

MMC: 822

VM ALARM

MMC: 755

VM CARD RESTART

MMC: 750

VM DAY/NIGHT

MMC: 758

VM HALT

MMC: 754

VM IN/OUT

MMC: 757

VoIP ACCESS CODE

MMC: 832

VoIP IP TABLE

MMC: 833

WAKE-UP ANNOUNCEMENT

MMC: 224

WARNING DESTINATION

MMC: 753

WIP INFORMATION

MMC: 846

WLAN CONFIGURATION

MMC: 849

WLAN IP/MAC LIST

MMC: 848

WLAN PARAMETERS

MMC: 845

16TRK GAIN

MMC: 437

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

1.6 Program List by Function
This section describes MMC programs are classified by the function of the OfficeServ
7100.

1.6.1 Phone Function
The MMC programs related to the function of a phone that is connected with the OfficeServ 7100 are as follows:
Table 1.10 Phone Function Programming list
MMC Program No.

Program Description

MMC: 100

STATION LOCK

MMC: 101

CHANGE USER PASSCODE

MMC: 102

CALL FORWARD

MMC: 103

SET ANSWER MODE

MMC: 104

STATION NAME

MMC: 105

STATION SPEED DIAL

MMC: 106

STATION SPEED DIAL NAME

MMC: 107

KEY EXTENDER

MMC: 108

STATION STATUS

MMC: 109

DATE DISPLAY

MMC: 110

STATION ON/OFF

MMC: 111

PHONE RING TONE

MMC: 112

ALARM REMINDER CLOCK

MMC: 114

PHONE VOLUME

MMC: 115

SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE

MMC: 116

ALARM AND MESSAGE

MMC: 119

CALLER ID DISPLAY

Samsung Business Communications

1-23

CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

1.6.2 Networking Function
The MMC programs related to the function of networking are as follows:
Table 1.11 Networking Function Programming list
MMC Program No.

Program Description

MMC: 820

ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID

MMC: 821

ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK

MMC: 822

SET VIRTUAL EXTENSION TYPE

MMC: 823

ASSIGN NETWORK COS

MMC: 824

NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION

MMC: 825

ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTION

MMC: 829

LAN PRINTER PARAMETER

MMC: 830

ETHERNET PARAMETERS

MMC: 837

SIP OPTIONS

MMC: 840

IP PHONE INFORMATIONES

MMC: 841

SYSTEM IP OPTIONS

1.6.3 VoIP Function
The MMC programs related to the function of VoIP(Voice over Internet Protocol) are as
follows:
Table 1.12 VoIP Function Programming list
MMC Program No.

1-24

Program Description

MMC: 831

MGI PARAMETERS

MMC: 832

VOIP ACCESS CODE

MMC: 833

VoIP IP TABLE

MMC: 834

H.323 OPTIONS

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Table 1.12 VoIP Function Programming list(continued)
MMC Program No.

Program Description

MMC: 835

MGI DSP OPTIONS

MMC: 836

H.323 GK OPTIONS

1.6.4 WLAN Function
The MMC programs related to the function of WLAN(Wireless Local Area Network) are
as follows:
Table 1.13 WLAN Function Programming list
MMC Program No.

Program Description

MMC: 845

WLAN PARAMETER

MMC: 846

WIP INFORMATION

MMC: 848

WLAN IP/MAC LIST

MMC: 849

WLAN CONFIGURATION

1.6.5 LCR Function
The MMC programs related to the function of LCR(Least Cost Routing) are as follows:
Table 1.14 LCR Function Programming list
MMC Program No.

Program Description

MMC: 710

LCR DIGIT TABLE

MMC: 711

LCR TIME TABLE

MMC: 712

LCR ROUTE TABLE

MMC: 713

LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE

MMC: 763

SECOND LCR

Samsung Business Communications

1-25

CHAPTER 1. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

1.6.6 Auto Attendant/Voice Mail Function
The MMC programs related to the function of AA(Auto Attendant) or VM(Voice Mail) are
as follows:
Table 1.15

Auto Attendant/Voice Mail Function Programming list

MMC Program No.

1-26

Program Description

MMC: 207

ASSIGN VM/AA PORT

MMC: 215

VOICE DIALLER OPTIONS

MMC: 216

VOICE DIALLER ASSIGNMENTS

MMC: 730

AA RECORD GAIN

MMC: 731

AA RAM CLEAR

MMC: 732

AA TRANSLATION TABLE

MMC: 733

AA PLAN TABLE

MMC: 735

AA USE TABLE

MMC: 736

AUTO ATTENDANT MESSAGE MATCH

MMC: 739

ASSIGN AA MOH

MMC: 750

VM CARD RESTART

MMC: 751

ASSIGN MAILBOX

MMC: 752

AUTO RECORD

MMC: 753

WARNING DESTINATION

MMC: 754

VM HALT

MMC: 755

VM ALARM

MMC: 756

ASSIGN VM MOH

MMC: 757

VM IN/OUT

MMC: 758

VM DAY/NIGHT

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

1.6.7 Diagnosis Function
The MMC programs related to the function of diagnosing the system are as follows:
Table 1.16 Diagnosis Function Programming list
MMC Program No.

Program Description

MMC: 434

CONNECTION STATUS

MMC: 851

ALARM REPORTING

MMC: 852

SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS

MMC: 853

MAINTENANCE BUSY

MMC: 854

DIAGNOSTIC TIME

MMC: 890

INITIALIZE PORT

1.6.8 Hotel Function
The MMC programs related to the function of a hotel are as follows:
Table 1.17 Hotel Function Programming list
MMC Program No.

Program Description

MMC: 221

TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION

MMC: 222

EXTENSION TYPE

MMC: 433

COST RATE

MMC: 513

HOTEL TIMER

MMC: 748

COSTING DIAL PLAN

MMC: 749

RATE CALCULATION TABLE

MMC: 760

ITEM COST TABLE

MMC: 761

TAX RATE SETUP

MMC: 762

ROOM COST RATE

Samsung Business Communications

1-27

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming

This chapter describes how to use each MMC program as it was listed.

2.1 Overview of Programming Procedure
The order of programming will be discussed before explaining programming method of
each list. Please read the description carefully before programming.
The programming order is as follows:
1)

Make the programmable state.
y Press the Transfer button at pause.
y Enter the program number, either 200 or 800.
y Enter either the operator passcode or the technician passcode.
y Press 1 dial button to ‘enable’ the programming mode.
y In case of Program 800 Technician Program Mode Setting, enter the tenant number
to be programmed.

2)

Make the program number selectable state.
If the Speaker button is pressed, the program selection mode appears.
Or, if the Transfer button is pressed, the programming state ends and the pause state
begin.

3)

Select a program.
Enter the program number.
Or, select the program number with the Volume button and press the Speaker button.
Or, Press Transfer button in a pause state and enter the program number.

4)

Start programming the corresponding program.

Samsung Business Communications

2-1

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2.2 Programming Procedure
This section describes a procedure of each program. Refer to the programming procedure
corresponding to the MMC.

[100] STATION LOCK
Allows the system administrator or technician to lock or unlock an individual station or all
stations simultaneously. The three options are as follows:
No

Type

Description

0

UNLOCKED

Unlocks a locked station.

1

LOCKED OUT

The phone cannot make calls outside the system. It can however make
and receive intercom calls and receive incoming Trunk Line calls. When
in this mode the Hold button will flash slow RED.

2

LOCKED ALL

The phone cannot make or receive any calls. When in this mode the
Hold button will light steady RED.

CONDITIONS
y

Check if the station lock function is disabled at ‘MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS’.
If so, the station cannot be locked, but a locked station can be unlocked.

y

A station can be locked or unlocked under any condition when the station is in Operator Level Programming or Technician Level Programming.

DEFAULT DATA
ALL STATIONS UNLOCKED

2-2

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 100.
Display shows:

[201] STN LOCK

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all stations.

[205] STN LOCK

3) Enter 0 to unlock or 1 to lock.(e.g., 1)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

[205] STN LOCK

UNLOCKED

UNLOCKED

[ALL] STN LOCK
?

LOCKED OUT

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 101
MMC 301
MMC 701

CHANGE USER PASSCODE
ASSIGN STATION COS
ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

Samsung Business Communications

2-3

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[101] CHANGE USER PASSCODE
Allows the system administrator or technician to reset any phone’s passcode to its default
value of ‘1234’. This MMC cannot display station passcodes; it can only reset them to default.
Phone users can set or change their individual passcodes. The passcode is used to lock or
unlock the phone for toll restriction(call barring) override and to access the DISA feature.

CONDITIONS
y

The passcode of a station performing Operator Level Programming or Technician
Level Programming cannot be changed while the program mode is ‘ENABLE’.

y

An Operator or Technician Level can only delete the passcode of a station and reset the
passcode to the default value, ‘1234’, not permitting to know the passcode.

Default passcodes
Default passcodes cannot be used for toll restriction override or for DISA access.

DEFAULT DATA
ALL STATION PASSCODES: 1234

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 101.
Display shows:

[201] PASSCODE

2) Dial phone number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through phone numbers
and press Right Soft button to move the cursor right.

[205] PASSCODE

3) Press Hold button to reset passcode.

[205] PASSCODE

PASSCODE:****

PASSCODE:****

PASSCODE:1234

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 100

2-4

STATION LOCK

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[102] CALL FORWARD
Allows the system administrator to program the call forward destinations for other station
users. This MMC also allows call forward to be set after the destination has been entered.
Allows several types of call forwarding: FORWARD ALL, FORWARD NO ANSWER,
FORWARD BUSY and FORWARD DND. There is an additional option, FORWARD
BUSY/NO ANSWER, that allows both of these options to be activated at the same time,
provided that destinations have been entered for both.
No

Type

0

FORWARD CANCEL

1

FORWARD ALL CALL

2

FORWARD BUSY

3

FORWARD NO ANSWER

4

FORWARD BUSY/NO ANSWER

5

FORWARD DND

CONDITIONS
y

When ‘FORWARD BUSY/NO ANSWER’ is selected, calls are forwarded to stations set
in ‘FORWARD BUSY’ and ‘FORWARD NO ANSWER’. Thus, a destination number
must be set for both ‘FORWARD BUSY’ and ‘FORWARD NO ANSWER’ before you
can select the ‘FORWARD BUSY/NO ANSWER’ option.

y

If forwarding is set to ‘OFF’ in MMC 701, ASSIGN COS CONTENTS, call forwarding
cannot be set but can be cancelled.(Default: ‘OFF’)

y

Both ‘FORWARD’ and ‘EXT FWD’ must be set to ‘ON’ in MMC 701, ASSIGN COS
CONTENTS in order to forward a call to an external number. If only ‘FORWARD’ is set
to ‘ON’, calls can only be forwarded to internal numbers.(Default: ‘OFF’)

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-5

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 102.
Display shows:

[201] FORWARD

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

[205] FORWARD

3) Dial 0-5 to select forward type.
OR
Press Volume button to select forward type(e.g., 1)
and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

[205] FORWARD

4) Dial destination number.(e.g., 201)
OR
Press Volume button to select destination and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

[205] FORWARD

5) Dial 1 for YES, 0 for NO.
OR
Press Volume button to select YES or NO
and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

[205] FORWARD

0:FORWARD CANCEL

0:FORWARD CANCEL

1:ALL CALL:NONE

1:ALL CALL:201

CURRENTLY SET:YES

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to
next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 301
MMC 501
MMC 502
MMC 701
MMC 722
MMC 723

2-6

ASSIGN STATION COS
SYSTEM TIMERS
STATION-WIDE TIMERS
ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[103] SET ANSWER MODE
Allows the system administrator to change the answer mode of any phone. Each phone can
have its answer mode set to one of the following options:
No
0

Type
RING MODE

Description
The phone will ring in one of eight custom ring patterns. Calls
are answered by pressing the ANS/RLS or SEND button or
by lifting the handset.

1

AUTO ANSWER MODE

After giving a short attention tone, the phone will automatically answer calls on the speakerphone. When a Trunk line is
transferred to a phone in Auto Answer, the screened portion
of the call will be Auto Answered, but the phone will ring when
the transfer is complete if you have not pressed the ANS/RLS
or SEND button or lifted the handset.*

2

VOICE ANNOUNCE

The phone will not ring. After a short attention tone, callers
can make an announcement but the ANS/RLS or SEND button or handset must be used to answer calls.

To answer the C.O. call automatically
To answer the C.O. call automatically, set ‘ON’ the option ‘AUTO ANS CO’ in
MMC 110.

DEFAULT DATA
ALL PHONES: RING

Samsung Business Communications

2-7

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 103.
Display shows:

[201] ANS MODE

2) Dial phone number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select phone and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all phones.

[205] ANS MODE

3) Dial 0, 1 or 2 to change ring mode.
OR
Press Volume button to select ring mode and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2 above.

[205] ANS MODE

RING MODE

RING MODE

[ALL] ANS MODE
?

VOICE ANNOUNCE

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to
next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 111

2-8

PHONE RING TONE

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[104] STATION NAME
Allows the system administrator or technician to enter a name up to 11 characters to identify an individual station.

ENTERING CHARACTERS
Names are written using the keypad. Each key press selects a character. Pressing the dial
pad key moves the cursor to the next position. For example, if the directory name is ‘SAM
SMITH,’ press the number ‘7’ four times to get the letter ‘S’. Now press the number ‘2’
once to get the letter ‘A’. Continue selecting characters from the table below to complete
your message. Pressing ‘A’ button toggles between upper case and lower case.

Volume Up/Down keys
When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous
character, press the Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right or the Volume Down button to move the cursor to the left. A space can be entered using
these keys.

COUNT

1

2

3

4

5

DIAL 0

<

>

.

)

0

DIAL 1

Space

?

,

!

1

DIAL 2

A

B

C

@

2

DIAL 3

D

E

F

#

3

DIAL 4

G

H

I

$

4

DIAL 5

J

K

L

%

5

DIAL 6

M

N

O

^

6

DIAL 7

P

Q

R

S

7

DIAL 8

T

U

V

*

8

DIAL 9

W

X

Y

Z

9

DIAL *

:

=

[

]

*

The # button can be used for the following special characters:
#, space, &, !, :, ?, ., ,, %, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ; , ”, Æ, ’. \.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-9

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 104.
Display shows:

[201] STN NAME

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

[205] STN NAME

3) Enter the station name using the procedure
described above and press Right Soft button
to return to step 2.
4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to
next MMC.

[205] STN NAME

_

SAM SMITH

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-10

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[105] STATION SPEED DIAL
Allows the system administrator or technician to assign phone numbers to a station’s personal speed dial locations.

CONDITIONS
Each station may have up to 50 locations(or bins) assigned to it in MMC 606(Assign Speed
Block). The speed dial bins are numbered 00~49. Each assigned phone number consists of
a trunk or trunk group access code followed by a separator and up to 24 digits to be dial.
These dial digits may consist of 0~9, * and #. If the system recognizes a valid trunk or
trunk group access number, it will automatically insert the separator.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

PROGRAM BUTTONS
B
C
D
E
F

Used to insert a flash code ‘F’
Used to insert a pause code ‘P’
Used to insert a pulse/tone conversion code ‘C’
Used to mask/unmask following digits(shows as ‘[’or ‘]’)
Used to enter name for speed dial bin(see MMC 106)

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 105.
Display shows:

[201] SPEED DIAL

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

[205] SPEED DIAL

If selected station has no speed dial bins,
the display will be as shown and a new station
may be selected.
3) Dial location number.(e.g., 05)
OR
Press Volume button to select location and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

Samsung Business Communications

00:

00:

[205] SPEED DIAL
SPDBLK NOT EXIST

[205] SPEED DIAL
05:_

2-11

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

4) Enter trunk access code(e.g., 9) followed by
the number to be dialed.(e.g., 4264100)
OR
Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 3.
Press Hold button to clear an entry.
If an error is made, use VOLUME DOWN arrow to
step back.

[205] SPEED DIAL
05:9-4264100_

5) Press ‘F’ button to access MMC 106(Station Speed
Dial Name) to enter a name for speed dial.
OR
Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 106
MMC 606

2-12

STATION SPEED DIAL NAME
ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[106] STATION SPEED DIAL NAME
Allows a name up to 11 characters to be entered for each personal speed dial location. This
allows speed dial numbers to be selected by name when the directory dial feature is used.

ENTERING CHARACTERS
Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 106.
Display shows:

[201] SPEED NAME

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

[205] SPEED NAME

00:

00:

If selected station has no speed dial bins, the display
will be as shown and a new station may be selected.

[305] SPEED NAME

3) Dial speed dial location.(e.g., 01)
OR
Press Volume button to scroll through location numbers and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

[205] SPEED NAME

4) Enter the location name using the procedure
described above and press Right Soft button to
return to step 2.

[205] SPEED NAME

SPDBLK NOT EXIST

01:_

01:SAM SMITH

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to
next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 105
MMC 606

STATION SPEED DIAL
ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK

Samsung Business Communications

2-13

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[107] KEY EXTENDER
Use this program to view the programmable buttons assigned to stations. In addition, it allows the system administrator to assign key extenders to some keys to make a general access feature key more specific. The feature keys that can have extenders are listed below.
Key

Feature

Extender

AB

Absence

Extension number

ACC

Account code bin

000-999

BOSS

Boss and Secretary

1-4

CR

VM Call Record

Mailbox number

CS

UCD Call Status

UCD group number

DIR

Directory dial by name type

1-3

DP

Direct Pickup

Extension or station group number

DS

Direct Station Select

Station number

FWRD

Call Forward

0-7

GPIK

Group Pickup

01-99

IG

In/Out of Group

Station group number

MMPG

Meet Me Page

0-9, *

MW

Message Waiting

Extension or station group number

MS

Manual Signalling

Extension or station group number

PAGE

Page

0-9, *

PARK

Park Orbits

0-9

PMSG

Programmed Station Messaging

01-20

RP

Ring Plan

1-6

RSV

Room Status View(Hotel Application only)

1-5

SG

Station Group

Station group number

SP

UCD Supervisor

UCD group number

SPD

Speed Dial

Personal: 00-49
System: 500-999

VG

SVM-800 Group Message

Station group number

VM

VM Memo

Extension or station group number

VT

Voice Transfer

VM group number

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

2-14

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 107.
Display shows first station:

[201] EXT (MAST)

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through station numbers
and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

[205] EXT (MAST)

3) Enter key number.(e.g., 18)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through keys and
use Right Soft button to move the cursor.
OR
Press the key to be programmed.

[205] EXT (MAST)

01:CALL1Æ

01:CALL1Æ

18:DSÆ

[205] EXT (MAST)
18: DSÆ DS_

4) Dial extender according to above table.
System will return to step 3.

[205] EXT (MAST)
18: DSÆ DS207

5) Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.
OR
Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to
next MMC.

When using the Right Soft button
When the Right Soft button will not move the cursor to the right, you are attempting to add an extender to a key that cannot have one.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 720
MMC 721
MMC 722
MMC 723
MMC 724

COPY KEY PROGRAMMING
SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
DIAL NUMBERING PLAN

Samsung Business Communications

2-15

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[108] STATION STATUS
This is a READ-ONLY MMC. Displays the following attributes of a station port.
No

Status

Description

0

PORT NO

Cabinet(1)/Slot(MP,1,2)/Port(1-12)

1

TYPE

Phone Type

2

PICKUP GROUP

None, 01-99

3

SGR

Station Group Number

4

BOSS-SECR

None, 1-4

5

PAGE

None, Page Zone(0-4, * )

6

COS 1, COS 2

COS(1-30) per Ring Plan(01-06)

DEFAULT DATA
PORT #: FOLLOWS HARDWARE POSITION
TYPE: DEPENDENT ON CONNECTED PHONE
PICKUP GRP: NONE
SGR: NONE
BOSS-SECR: NONE
PAGE ZONE: NONE
COS NUMBER: 01 IN ALL RING PLANS

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 108.
Display shows first station:

[201] STN STATUS

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

[205] STN STATUS

3) Dial 0~9 to select station status type.
OR
Press Volume button to select status and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

[205] STN STATUS

PORT:C1-S1-P01

PORT:C1- S1-P05

PICKUP GROUP:01

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to
next MMC.

2-16

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 301
MMC 302
MMC 303
MMC 601
MMC 604

ASSIGN STATION COS
PICKUP GROUPS
ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY
ASSIGN STATION GROUP
ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-17

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[109] DATE DISPLAY
Allows the system administrator or technician to select the date and time display mode on a
per-station basis or system-wide.
No
0

1

2

Mode
COUNTRY

CLOCK

DISPLAY

Description
Sets overall display format and has two options:
0 = ORIENTAL

MM/DD

1 = WESTERN

DAY DD MON

DAY

HH:MM
HH:MM

Sets format of clock display and has two options:
0 = 12 HOUR

Displays 1 P.M. as 01:00

1 = 24 HOUR

Displays 1 P.M. as 13:00

Sets format of DAY and MON display and has two options:
0 = UPPER CASE

Displays Friday as ‘FRI’ and March as ‘MAR’.

1 = LOWER CASE

Displays Friday as ‘Fri’ and March as ‘Mar’.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
COUNTRY: WESTERN
CLOCK: 12 HOUR
DISPLAY: LOWER CASE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 109.
Display shows:

[201] DAY FORMAT

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all stations.

[205] DAY FORMAT

3) Dial 0~2 to select mode.
OR
Press Volume button to scroll through modes and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

[205] DAY FORMAT

COUNTRY:WESTERN

COUNTRY:WESTERN

[ALL] DAY FORMAT
COUNTRY:?

COUNTRY:ORIENTAL

4) Press Volume button to scroll through formats and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

2-18

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to
next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 505

ASSIGN DATE AND TIME

Samsung Business Communications

2-19

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[110] STATION ON/OFF
Allows the system administrator to set any of the phone features listed below.
No

Feature

00

AUTO HOLD

Default
OFF

Description
Automatically places an existing Trunk Line call on hold if
a CALL key, trunk key or trunk route key is pressed during that call.

01

AUTO TIMER

ON

Automatically starts the stopwatch timer during a Trunk
Line call.

02

HEADSET USE

OFF

When ON, this feature disables the hook switch allowing
a headset user to answer all calls by pressing the
ANS/RLS button or SEND and END buttons.

03

HOT KEYPAD

ON

When ON, this feature allows you to dial directory numbers without having to first lift the handset or press the
Speaker button.

04

KEY TONE

ON

Allows you to hear a slight tone when pressing buttons
on phone.

05

PAGE REJOIN

ON

Allows you to hear the remaining part of page announcements if phone becomes free during a page.

06

RING PREF.

ON

When OFF, requires you to press the fast flashing button
to answer a ringing call after lifting the handset.

07

CALL COST

OFF

When ON, the cost of the call in progress will show in the
upper right corner of the phone display instead of duration of the call.

08

AUTO CAMPON

OFF

When ON, phone users can allow intercom calls to
camp-on to other phones without having to press a
CAMP-ON key.

09

AME BGM

OFF

This feature selects whether a station using Answer Machine Emulation will hear their personal greeting or BGM
while callers are listening to the personal greeting.
A BGM source must be selected for this to work.

10

AME PASSCODE

OFF

When ON, station users who have AME set must enter
their station password to listen to messages being left.

11

DISP SPDNAME

OFF

When ON, the speed dial name associated with a speed
dial number is displayed on a phone equipped a LCD
display when using speed dial.

12

CID REVW ALL

ON

When ON, saves information on all calls that ring at an
extension, When OFF, saves information only on calls
that were not answered at the extension or were answered by voice mail.

13

SECURE OHVA

ON

When ON, OHVA announcements will be heard on the
handset. When OFF, OHVA announcements will be
heard over the phone speaker.

2-20

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

(continued)
No
14

Feature
NOT CONT.CID

Default
ON

Description
When OFF, the Caller ID will be displayed for the duration of the call. When ON, displays timer for duration of
call(if AUTO TIMER also set on).

15

AUTO ANS CO

OFF

When ON, keyset will automatically answer outside calls
through the speakerphone. For this to work, the keyset
must be set to Auto Answer mode in MMC 103. Calls to
groups cannot be auto-answered.

16

ENBLOCK 2LCD

OFF

Enables Enbloc dialling for 2-Line LCD phones.This option only works when 2 LINE ENBLOCK option is enabled in MMC 861.

17

STN NO RING

OFF

When ON, no tones will be heard when phone rings.

DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
SOME OPTIONS DEPEND ON COUNTRY

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 110.
Display shows:

[201] STN ON/OFF

2) Dial the station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and
press the Right Soft button to move the cursor.
OR
Select all stations.

[205] STN ON/OFF

3) Dial option number from above list.(e.g., 03)
OR
Press Volume button to select option and
press the Right Soft button to move the cursor.

[205] STN ON/OFF

4) Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF.
OR
Press Volume button to select ON or OFF.
Press Left or Right Soft button to return to step 2.
OR
5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to
next MMC.

[201] STN ON/OFF

Samsung Business Communications

AUTO HOLD

AUTO HOLD

:OFF

:OFF

HOT KEYPAD :ON

HOT KEYPAD :OFF

2-21

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 301
MMC 701

2-22

ASSIGN STATION COS
ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[111] PHONE RING TONE
Allows the system administrator or technician to select the ring tone heard at each phone.
Eight ring tones are available. A short tone burst of the selection will be heard when the
dial keypad is pressed.

DEFAULT DATA
FREQUENCY: 5

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 111.
Display shows:

[201] RING TONE

2) Dial phone number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all stations.

[205] RING TONE

3) Dial 1~8 to select ring tone.
OR
Press Volume button to select ring tone and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

[205] RING TONE

SELECTION 5

SELECTION 5

[ALL] RING TONE
SELECTION ?

SELECTION 5

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to
next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 114
MMC 318

PHONE VOLUME
DISTINCTIVE RINGING

Samsung Business Communications

2-23

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[112] ALARM REMINDER CLOCK
Allows the system administrator or technician to set or change the alarm clock/appointment
reminder feature for any station. Three alarms may be set for each station and each alarm
may be defined as a one-time or TODAY alarm, or as a DAILY alarm. The TODAY alarm
is automatically cancelled after it rings, while the DAILY alarm rings every day at the same
time. Alarm numbers are 1, 2 and 3. In the case of Station Pair assignments(MMC 740) the
alarm only rings the station that is programmed and does not ring the paired station.
No

Type

Description

0

NOTSET

No alarm

1

TODAY

Alarm once only

2

DAILY

Alarm daily at set time

DEFAULT DATA
ALARMS ARE NOTSET

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 112.
Display shows:

[201] ALM CLK(1)

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and
press Right Soft button.

[205] ALM CLK(1)

3) Dial 1~3 to select alarm.(e.g., 1)
OR
Press Volume button to select alarm and
press Right Soft button.

[205] ALM CLK(1)

4) Enter alarm time in 24-hour clock format.
(e.g., 1300 for 1pm)

[205] ALM CLK(1)

5) Dial entry from above list for alarm type.(e.g., 2)
OR
Press Volume button to select alarm type and press
Right Soft button to move cursor and return to
step 2.

[205] ALM CLK(1)

HHMM:ÆNOTSET

HHMM:ÆNOTSET

HHMM:ÆNOTSET

HHMM:1300ÆNOTSET

HHMM:1300ÆDAILY

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

2-24

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 116

ALARM AND MESSAGE

Samsung Business Communications

2-25

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[113] VIEW MEMO NUMBER
Allows a station user the ability to view a memo left by the user. A memo can be left by entering it via the dial keypad using the table below. A memo of up to and including 13 characters can be entered.

ENTER CHARACTERS
Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 113.
Display shows:

[201] VIEW MEMO

2) Dial the keyset number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Press VOLUME keys to select station and
press RIGHT soft key to move cursor.

[205] VIEW MEMO

1:

1:

3) Dial memo number.(1–3)
[205] VIEW MEMO
OR
1:_
Press VOLUME keys to select and press RIGHT soft
key to move cursor.
4) Enter memo via dial keypad.

[205] VIEW MEMO
1:CALL TOM

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to
next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-26

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[114] PHONE VOLUME
Allows the station user or system administrator to set the ring volume, off-hook ring volume, handset receive volume, speaker volume, background music volume and page volume
for any or all phones.
No

Type

Description

0

RING VOLUME

This is the volume setting for the phone ringer. There are eight volume
levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 8 the highest.

1

OFF-RING VOL

This is the volume of the alert tone that tells you there is a call camped
on to your phone. There are eight volume levels: level 1 is the lowest
and level 8 the highest.

2

HANDSET VOL

This is the volume setting for conversations on the handset receiver.
There are eight volume levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 8 the
highest.

3

SPEAKER VOL

This is the receive volume setting for conversations on the speaker
phone of a phone. There are 16 volume levels: level 1 is the lowest
and level 16 the highest.

4

BGM VOLUME

This is the volume you will hear background music over the phone
speaker at when your phone is idle and BGM is turned on. There are
16 volume levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 16 the highest.

5

PAGE VOLUME

This is the volume you will hear internal page over the phone speaker
when your phone is idle and BGM is turned on. There are 16 volume
levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 16 the highest.

DEFAULT DATA
RING VOLUME: 4
OFF-HOOK RING VOLUME: 4
HANDSET VOLUME: 4
SPEAKER VOLUME: 13
BGM VOLUME: 13
PAGE VOLUME: 13

Samsung Business Communications

2-27

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 114.
Display shows:

[201] STN VOLUME

2) Dial phone number.(e.g., 205)

[205] STN VOLUME

RING VOLUME :4

RING VOLUME :4

3) Dial volume type.(e.g., 3)
[205] STN VOLUME
OR
SPEAKER VOL :13
Press Volume button to select volume type and press
RIGHT soft key to move cursor.
4) Press Volume button to select volume.(You will hear a [205] STN VOLUME
brief tone for the volume you select.)
SPEAKER VOL :08
5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to
next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 111

2-28

PHONE RING TONE

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[115] SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE
Allows the system administrator to set a programmed message at any or all display phones.
There are 20 messages(01-20) available. The last five message can be modified by each
phone user.

CONDITIONS
These messages are as set up in MMC 715, PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE.

DEFAULT DATA
NO MESSAGES SELECTED

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 115.
Display shows:

[201] PGMMSG(00)

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all stations.

[205] PGMMSG(00)

3) Dial message number.(e.g., 05)
OR
Press Volume button to select message and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
OR
Dial 00 to cancel an existing message.

[205] PGMMSG(05)

CANCEL PGM MSG

CANCEL PGM MSG

[ALL] PGMMSG(??)

PAGE ME

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to
next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 715
MMC 722
MMC 723

PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE
STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING

Samsung Business Communications

2-29

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[116] ALARM AND MESSAGE
Allows the system administrator or technician to set or change the alarm clock/appointment
reminder feature for any station. Three alarms may be set for each station and each alarm
may be defined as a one-time or TODAY alarm, or as a DAILY alarm.
The TODAY alarm is automatically cancelled after it rings, while the DAILY alarm rings
every day at the same time. It is also possible to set a message to display when the alarm is
sounded.
No

Type

Description

0

NOTSET

No alarm

1

TODAY

Alarm once only

2

DAILY

Alarm daily at set time

ENTERING CHARACTERS
Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

DEFAULT DATA
ALARMS ARE NOTSET

ACTION

2-30

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 116.
Display shows:

[201] ALM REM(1)

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all stations.

[205] ALM REM(1)

3) Dial 1~3 to select alarm.(e.g., 2)
OR
Press Volume button to select alarm and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

[205] ALM REM(2)

4) Enter alarm time in 24-hour clock format.
(e.g., 1300 for 1pm)
Display will automatically advance to step 5.

[205] ALM REM(2)

HHMM:ÆNOTSET

HHMM:ÆNOTSET

[ALL] ALM REM(1)
HHMM:ÆNOTSET

HHMM:ÆNOTSET

HHMM:1300ÆNOTSET

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

5) Dial valid entry from above list for alarm type.
(e.g., 2)
OR
Press Volume button to select alarm type and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

[205] ALM REM

6) Enter message and press Right Soft button to
return to step 2.

[205] ALM REM

HHMM:1300ÆDAILY

Meeting

7) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to
next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 112

ALARM REMINDER CLOCK

Samsung Business Communications

2-31

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[117] EDIT TEXT MESSAGE
Allows the system administrator or technician to set or change text messages for any station. One station can use up to 10 text messages.

CONDITIONS
Only stations allowed to use text messages in MMC 611 can be selected here. Large LCD
phones are automatically allowed.

ENTERING CHARACTERS
Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

DEFAULT DATA
BLANK MESSAGE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 117.
Display shows:

[201] TXTMSG(01)

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

[205] TXTMSG(01)

3) Dial 01~10 to select message.
OR
Press Volume button to select message and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

[205] TXTMSG(02)

4) Enter message and press Right Soft button to return to
step 3.

[205] TXTMSG(02)

Blank Message

Blank Message

Blank Message

SAME TIME

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to
next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 611

2-32

ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[118] CONFERENCE GROUP
Allows the system administrator or technician to set conference groups for any station.
A station is allowed up to five conference groups, and each group can include 4 members
(excluding the station itself). Names can be allocated to groups.
Conference members can be other stations, station groups, and external telephone numbers.
(which must include the outgoing access code)

CONDITIONS
Only stations set to use conference groups in MMC 612 can be selected here. Large LCD
phones are automatically set to use conference groups.

ENTERING CONFERENCE GROUP NAME
Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 118.
Display shows:

[201] GRP(1)NAME

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

[205] GRP(1)NAME

3) Dial 1~5 to select group.
OR
Press Volume button to select group and press.
Right Soft button to move cursor.

[205] GRP(1)NAME

4) Dial 0 to select name or dial 1~4 to select member.
OR
Press Volume button to select name or member
and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 3.

[205] GRP(1)MBR1

Samsung Business Communications

NONE

2-33

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

5) Enter conference member dial number and
press Right Soft button to return to step 4.

[205] GRP(1)MBR1
9-2794296

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to
next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 612

2-34

ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[119] CALLER ID DISPLAY
Allows the technician to set the individual station display preference on a per-station basis.
Caller ID or CLI can be selected to either show the name, number first, or no display depending on the type of call. Caller ID or CLI displays have the following options:
No

Type

0

NO DISPLAY

1

NUMBER FIRST

Description
No Caller ID or CLIP data will be displayed.
The Caller ID or CLIP number received from the Central Office
will be displayed first.

2

NAME FIRST

The Caller ID or CLIP name received will be displayed first.
In the case of CLIP the number must be programmed in the
CLIP translation table(MMC 728). CLIP does not provide
names.

DEFAULT DATA
NUMBER FIRST

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 119.
Display shows first station:

[201] CID DISP

2) Enter station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press Right
Soft button.
OR
Select all stations.

[205] CID DISP

3) Dial display option 0, 1 or 2.(e.g., 2)
OR
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right or Left Soft button to return to step 2.

[205] CID DISP

NUMBER FIRST

NUMBER FIRST

[ALL] CID DISP
NUMBER FIRST

NAME FIRST

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to
next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 312
MMC 608
MMC 728

ALLOW CALLER ID
ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK
CID TRANSLATION TABLE

Samsung Business Communications

2-35

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[120] LARGE LCD OPTIONS
Allows the system administrator to set any of the following options for large LCD phones.
No
0

Option
IDLE DISPLAY

Description
Sets whether to display ‘CALENDAR’ or ‘INFORMATION’ on
LCD when idle.

1

DS KEY DISPLAY

Sets whether to display extension numbers or names for ‘DS’
keys on LCD.

2

DIAL MODE

Sets dial mode to ENBLOCK or OVERLAP.

3

CONV DISP

SOFT MENU FIRST
If selected, features assigned to keys are displayed when
SCREEN key is pressed while on a call.
AOM KEY FIRST
If selected, extensions assigned to keys are displayed when
SCREEN key is pressed while on a call.

4

CALENDAR

Sets whether to display PREVIOUS screen or CALENDAR
screen on LCD when idle.

5

AOM CURSOR

Sets cursor position on AOM menu screen.(01~99, PREV POSITION)

DEFAULT DATA
IDLE DISPLAY: CALENDAR
DS KEY DISPLAY: TEL NUMBER
DIAL MODE: ENBLOCK

ACTION

2-36

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 120.
Display shows:

[201] IDLE DISP

2) Enter station number.(e.g., 203)
OR
Press Volume button to scroll through stations and
press Right Soft button to select a station.
OR
Select all stations and press the Right Soft button.

[203] IDLE DISP

3) Dial the option number from above list.(e.g., 1)
OR
Press Volume button to select the option and
press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

[203] DS KEY DSP

CALENDER

CALENDER

[ALL] IDLE DISP
CALENDER

TEL NUMBER

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

4) Press Volume button to select display type and press Right
Soft button.

[203] DS KEY DSP
EXT NAME

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to
next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 719 IDLE DISPLAY

Samsung Business Communications

2-37

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[121] PHONE LANGUAGE
Allows the system administrator to assign an LCD display based on the user’s own language.
No

Language

00

ENGLISH

01

GERMAN

02

PORTUGAL

03

NORSK

04

DANISH

05

DUTCH

06

ITALY

07

SPANISH

08

SWEDISH

09

SPANISH/USA

10

FRENCH/CANADA

11

FINNISH

DEFAULT DATA
ENGLISH

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 121.
Display shows:

[201] LANGUAGE

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and use
Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all stations.

[205] LANGUAGE

3) Dial 00~10 for language required.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.

[205] LANGUAGE

ENGLISH

ENGLISH

[ALL] LANGUAGE
?

GERMAN

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

2-38

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-39

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[122] NEWS DISPLAY SPEED
Used to set the Smart News display speed between 0300 mS(fastest) and 1 sec(slowest).
This timer is related to the Smart News PC Application Package.

DEFAULT DATA
03(0300 mS)

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 122.
Display shows first station:

[201] CALL SPEED

2) Enter station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to scroll through stations
and press Right Soft button to select a station.
OR
Select all stations.

[205] CALL SPEED

3) Dial speed option.(03~10)

[205] CALL SPEED

03Æ

03Æ

03Æ04

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-40

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[125] EXECUTIVE STATE
Allows the system administrator or technician to set an executive station’s options, as follows.
No
0

Option
EXEC STATE

Description
When working with EASYSET, the state of the executive station can
be displayed.(e.g., IN A MEETING)

1

STATE(IN)

2

STATE(OUT)

If EXEC STATE set to OTHERS(IN), EASYSET displays this message.
If EXEC STATE set to OTHERS(OUT), EASYSET displays this message.

3

ANSWER MODE

Set answer mode for executive/secretary calling: Ring, Auto Answer,
Voice Announce.(Refer to MMC 103 for a description of answer
modes.)

ENTER CHARACTERS
Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 125.
Display shows:

[201] EXEC STATE

2) Dial executive station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

[205] EXEC STATE

3) Dial 0~3 to select option.(see the table above).
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.

[205] EXEC STATE

4) Dial 0~9 to select state.(e.g., IN A MEETING)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.

[205] EXEC STATE

IN THE ROOM

IN THE ROOM

IN THE ROOM

IN A MEETING

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.
Samsung Business Communications

2-41

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-42

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[199] SHOW LICENSE STATUS
Allows the system administrator or technician to confirm the status(Valid or Invalid) of the
inserted license key.
No

Feature

Description

0

MGI MAX

The license status for MGI port

1

VMS MAX

The license status for VMS port

2

SOFT MAX

The license status for SoftPhone max

3

SOFT USE

The license status for SoftPhone use

4

SOFT CON

The license status for SoftPhone connect

5

NEWS USE

The license status for NEWS USE

DEFAULT DATA
INVALID

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 199.

SHOW LICENSE STS
MGI MAX: INVALID

2) Use Volume buttons to confirm the status of the in- SHOW LICENSE STS
serted license key.
VMS MAX: 8

3) Press Transfer button to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to
next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 841

SYSTEM IP OPTION

Samsung Business Communications

2-43

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[200] OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING
Used to open(enable) and close(disable) customer-level programming. If programming is
not opened and an attempt is made to access a system MMC, the error message [NOT
PERMIT] will be displayed. A four digits passcode is required to access this MMC. Each
digit can be 0-9. When opened, this MMC enables access to all MMCs allowed in MMC
802, Customer Access MMC Number.
No

Mode

Description

0

DISABLE

Open(enable) customer-level programming.

1

ENABLE

Close(disable) customer-level programming.

DEFAULT DATA
DISABLE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 200.
Display shows:

ENABLE CUS.PROG.

2) Enter passcode.

ENABLE CUS.PROG.

PASSCODE:

PASSCODE:

Correct code shows.

ENABLE CUS.PROG.
DISABLE

Incorrect code shows.

ENABLE CUS.PROG.
PASSCODE ERROR

3) Press Volume button arrow key to select ENABLE
or DISABLE and press Right Soft button.
OR
Dial 1 for ENABLE or 0 for DISABLE.

ENABLE CUS.PROG.

4) Press Speaker button to advance MMC entry level
and press Volume button to select MMC.
OR
Enter MMC number and press Right Soft button
to enter MMC.

201:CUS.PASSCODE

ENABLE

SELECT PROG. ID

5) Press Transfer button to exit.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 201
MMC 501
MMC 802

2-44

CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE
SYSTEM-WIDE TIMERS
CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[201] CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE
Used to change the passcode allowing access to MMC 200, Open Customer Programming,
from its current value.

CONDITIONS
y

The passcode is four digits long. Each digit can be 0-9.

y

The current(old) passcode is required for this MMC.

DEFAULT DATA
PASSCODE: 1234

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 201.

CUST. PASSCODE
NEW CODE:_

2) Enter new passcode via dial keypad.
(maximum four digits)

CUST. PASSCODE

3) Verify new passcode via dial keypad.

CUST. PASSCODE

NEW CODE:****

VERIFY :****

Passcode verified.(go to step 4)
OR
Passcode failure.(return to step 2)

CUST. PASSCODE
VERIFY :SUCCESS

CUST. PASSCODE
VERIFY :FAILURE

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to
next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 200

OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING

Samsung Business Communications

2-45

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[202] CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE
Used to change the passcodes for the following features.
No
0

Feature

Description

RING PLAN

The passcode required to place the system in different Ring Plans(RP)
or change the Ring Time Override(RTO).

1

DISA ALARM

The passcode required to clear a DISA ALARM generated when the
number of DISA attempts are exceeded.

2

ALARM CLR

The passcode required to clear an ALARM generated by the disconnection of BI-PMS SIO.(Hotel Application only)

5

DELETE

This passcode is used to allow items to be deleted from a room bill.
(Hotel Application only)

6

WLAN REGST

The passcode required to register a WIP phone.

CONDITIONS
y

The passcode is four digits long. Each digit can be 0~9.

y

The current passcode is required for this MMC.

DEFAULT DATA
RING PLAN: 0000
DISA ALARM: 5678
ALARM CLR: 8765
DECT REGST: 4321
DELETE: 9999
WLAN REGST: 0000

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 202.
Display shows:

CHANGE PASSCODE

2) Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor to passcode entry.

CHANGE PASSCODE

3) Enter new passcode via digits from dial keypad.

CHANGE PASSCODE

RING PLAN :0000

AA RECORD :4321

AA RECORD :9999

Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
Continue to change other passcodes.

2-46

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to
next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 410
MMC 507

ASSIGN DISA TRUNK
ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME

Samsung Business Communications

2-47

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[203] ASSIGN UA DEVICE
Assigns ringing device to be accessed when a Universal Answer(UA) key is pressed or the
UA pickup code is dialled. UA assignment is made in MMC 601, Assign Station Group, for
a group and then the group is entered here. The device type is automatically determined by
the Directory Number(DN) entered.
Ringing Device

Description

NONE(NO UA)

No phone number

STATION

Station number

STN GROUP

Station group number

RING PAGE

External speaker phone number

COMMON BELL

Common bell phone number

When setting the MMC [203]
Only one of the above options can be selected. If the ability to ring more than one
item(e.g., all four external page zones) is required, a station group containing all
four zone codes must be created.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 203.
Display shows current assignment:

ASSIGN UA PORT

2) Dial DN of UA device.(e.g., 205)
OR
Use Volume buttons to scroll through
available devices.

ASSIGN UA PORT

NONE-NO UA

205 -STATION

3) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to
next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 204
MMC 601
MMC 605

2-48

COMMON BELL CONTROL
ASSIGN STATION GROUP
ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[204] COMMON BELL CONTROL
Determines whether the common bell relay contacts have an interrupted or continuous closure when activated. If interrupted is chosen, the relay follows an internal Trunk Line ring
pattern of one second closed followed by three seconds open.

CONDITIONS
When the common bell is not used for night time ring, the common bell must be set to a
station group so that all stations in the group ring.

DEFAULT DATA
CONTINUOUS

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 204.
Display shows current setting:

[3801]COM. BELL

2) Dial common bell number.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection of common
bell numbers and press Right Soft button to advance
cursor.

[3801]COM. BELL

3) Dial 0 for continuous or 1 for interrupted operation.
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through options and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

[3802]COM. BELL

CONTINUOUS

CONTINUOUS

INTERRUPTED

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to
next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 203
MMC 601

ASSIGN UA DEVICE
ASSIGN STATION GROUP

Samsung Business Communications

2-49

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[205] ASSIGN LOUD BELL
Designates the station that controls the loud bell ring output of a MIS card.(Each MIS card
provides one loud bell port.) The loud bell will follow the ring cadence of the designated
station.

CONDITIONS
Only a station can be assigned to control the loud bell, not a station group.

DEFAULT DATA
UNASSIGNED

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 205.
Display shows current setting.

[3901]LOUD BELL

2) Dial loud bell number.(e.g., 3902)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through loud bell numbers and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

[3902]LOUD BELL

3) Enter station number.(e.g., 201)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

[3902]LOUD BELL

RING PAIR:NONE

RING PAIR:NONE

RING PAIR:201

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to
next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-50

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[206] BARGE-IN TYPE
Sets the type of barge-in that is permitted.
No
0

Type
NO BARGE-IN

Description
Barge-in feature is unavailable regardless of a station’s barge-in
status.

1

WITH TONE

Barge-in will have an intrusion tone and display at the station
barged-in on.

2

WITHOUT TONE

Barge-in is allowed. There is no barge-in tone or display at the
station barged-in on and the barging-in station will be muted.

DEFAULT DATA
NO BARGE-IN

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 206.
Display shows:

BARGE IN TYPE

2) Dial 0-2 to select barge-in type.(e.g., 2)
OR
Press Volume button to select barge-in type and
press Right Soft button.

BARGE IN TYPE

NO BARGE IN

WITHOUT TONE

3) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 301
MMC 701

ASSIGN STATION COS
ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

Samsung Business Communications

2-51

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[207] ASSIGN VM/AA PORT
Enables SLI ports to be designated as NORMAL or VM/AA. VM/AA ports receive digits
and also receive a true disconnect signal on completion of a call. Only SLI cards, not keyset daughter-boards, support disconnect signal. Do not make VM/AA ports data; this will
return them to a single line port and stop voice mail integration. VM/AA ports have the
equivalent of data protect written in the program and are protected against tones.

When using the MMC [207]
This MMC is not used to assign voice mail card ports. Voice mail card ports are
assigned as voice mail ports automatically when the system detects an SVM-400
or SVMi-20 card.

DEFAULT DATA
NORMAL PORT

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 207.

[209] VMAA PORT
NORMAL PORT

Display shows:
2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

[205] VMAA PORT

3) Dial 1 or 0 to select port type.
(1:VMAA, 0:NORMAL)
OR
Press Volume button to select type and press
Right Soft button.

[205] VMAA PORT

NORMAL PORT

VMAA PORT

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to
next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

2-52

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[208] ASSIGN RING TYPE
Allows programming of single lines to have ICM ringing, Trunk Line ringing and data secure. With the many types of external ringing devices, all configurations can be met. All
devices will also have a positive disconnect signal. Do not make VM/AA ports data; this
will return them to a single line port and stop voice mail integration.
No

Type

Description

0

ICM RING

Follows normal SLI ring cadence.

1

CO RING

Follows Trunk line ring cadence.

2

DATA RING

Follows Trunk line ring cadence and does not support off-hook ring.

DEFAULT DATA
ICM RING

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 208.
Display shows:

[209] RING TYPE

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

[205] RING TYPE

3) Dial 1, 2 or 0 to select port type.(e.g., 2)
OR
Press Volume button to select type and press
Left or Right Soft button to return to step 2 above.

[205] RING TYPE

ICM RING

ICM RING

DATA RING

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to
next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-53

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[209] ASSIGN ADD-ON MODULE
Designates to which phone an add-on module(AOM) is assigned. There is no limit to the
number of AOMs that can be assigned in the system. A maximum of four AOMs can be assigned to a keyset.

CONDITIONS
An AOM cannot be designated as Master. If no AOM exists in the system, the ‘AOM NOT
EXIST’ message is displayed.

DEFAULT DATA
MASTER:NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 209.
Display shows first AOM:

[301] AOM MASTER

2) Dial AOM number.
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through AOM numbers
and use Soft buttons to move cursor.

[301] AOM MASTER

3) Enter station number.(e.g., 301)
OR
Use Volume button for selection of stations and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

[301] AOM MASTER

MASTER:NONE

MASTER:NONE

MASTER:201

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to
next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-54

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[210] CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TENANT
Allows the system administrator to set system features on a per-tenant basis. Each system
option has a corresponding dialling number, as listed below. All options toggle ON/OFF.
No
00

Option
DISA PSWD

Default
ON

Description
When ON, a caller must enter extension number and DISA
password when they call a DISA trunk. When OFF, extension
number and DISA password are not required and the caller
has full access to all features allowed on this trunk.

01

LCR ENABLE

OFF

This option determines whether the system will or will not
route outgoing calls based on the information in the LCR
routing tables

03

PERI UCD RPT

OFF

Periodic UCD Information provider. Enables UCD Statistics
data on a per-UCD group basis to print out on the IO port
which has been set as PERI UCD in real time(every 3~99
seconds). This allows the information to be interfaced and
manipulated by an external package or third party provided
software.

04

CID CODE INS

OFF

When ON, the system will insert the country code when receiving CID information. This feature can use the CID display
callback feature.

05

DISA MOH

OFF

When ON, outside parties will hear trunk MOH instead of dial
tone from the time the system answers a DISA trunk until the
caller dials a digit.

06

TRANSFER

OFF

MOH

When ON, outside parties will hear trunk MOH instead of
ringback tone from the time a transfer is completed until the
call is answered by an internal party.

08

DID BSY ROUT

OFF

When ON, a DID call directed to a busy station will re-route
to the destination in MMC 406 for that trunk, if CW is set to
OFF in MMC 714. If the CW option is set to ON the call will
camp on. When OFF and the CW option is set to OFF, the
call will re-route to the operator.

09

ALARM MOH

ON

When ON, a station user answering an alarm ring will hear
station MOH instead of dial tone.

13

RECALL PIKUP

OFF

When ON, a call recalling to a station can be picked up using
Direct Call Pickup, Pickup Group and My Group features.
This applies to held calls recalling and transferred calls recalling to a station.

Samsung Business Communications

2-55

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

(continued)
No
14

Option
ICM EXT FWD

Default
OFF

Description
When ON, call forward external is allowed when intercom calls
are placed to a station that has Call Forward External programmed and set.

16

DID ERR TONE

OFF

This option provides error tone when an invalid DID number
is received.

18

KTS DISC ALM

OFF

When ON, generates a system alarm when a phone disconnects or connects.

19

OFF HOOK ALM

OFF

When ON, generates a system alarm when a phone stays
off-hook longer than this timer.

20

SL SELF RING

OFF

When ON, generates ring of 10 seconds when a single line
phone dials itself and hangs up(self test).

21

SGR INC BUSY

OFF

When ON, generates busy tone when all station group
members are busy for a group call. This does not work for
station groups which have Unconditional Ring mode set.

24

TRANSFER

OFF

CANCEL

When OFF, a single line phone can handle 2 calls simultaneously using the hook-flash to toggle between them. When
ON, a single line phone can connect to the second call, but
pressing the hook-flash will not toggle between the two calls
it will disconnect the second call and reconnect the single
line phone to the first call.

26

RECALL DISC

OFF

When ON, the system disconnects a transferred call when it
recalls.

29

ARD TONE CHK

ON

When system detects CO BUSY TONE from Central Office,
it returns to auto redial state.

30

VPN ENABLE

OFF

When ON, VPN is enabled.(Australia only.)

31

IN TOLL CHK

OFF

When OFF, the system doesn’t toll restrict incoming calls.

ISDN PROG-

OFF

When ON, if an outgoing call receives PROGRESS mes-

32

CON

sage from ISDN trunk, the call will connect without CONNECT message.

33

INCLUDE VAT

OFF

When ON, an ‘Inclusive VAT of’ line is printed on Hotel invoices(Hotel Application).

36

DSS KEY DPU

OFF

When ON, pressing a DS key will pick up the call at a ringing
station

37

BEGN DGT DSP

OFF

When ON, and an outside call is made via speed dial or LNR
where more than 11 digits are dialled, then only the first 11
dialled digits are shown on the phone display.

38

ONE TCH
FACC

2-56

OFF

When OFF, phone users cannot use one-touch account
code(ACC) key.

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

(continued)
No
39

Option
SGR ALL OUT

Default
OFF

Description
When ON, the last remaining station group member can
leave a group.

40

CHAIN FWD

ON

If ON, an incoming call forwarded from a station to another
station may then be forwarded to the mailbox of the second
station, if the latter is set for ‘forward to voice mail’. If this
option is OFF, the call may only be forwarded to the mailbox
of the first station.

41

TRK MONITER

OFF

If ON, the system will monitor the trunk supervision signalling. That is, if a disconnection signal is received from the
exchange, the call will be cleared and the extension will go
back on hook.

42

VOIP MFRALOC

OFF

If ON, this allocates a DTMF receiver for a VOIP tandem
caller breaking out on another trunk group.

43

NTWK

OFF

AUTOTMR
44

USE EURO

If OFF, the call timer in the phone display will not function if
the call is from a network connection(Q-SIG).

OFF

If ON, the unit of currency shown in call displays and on
SMDR reports will be Euros(€).(This will also display on Hotel Application invoices.)

45

NO STAFF

OFF

COD
46

PERI UCD SIO

When ON, the steps verifying the staff code will be omitted in
Hotel operation.

OFF

When ON, the PERI UCD data will be sent to the SMDR IO
port.

47

AUTO

OFF

CLEANED

Normally, when a room is checked-out, the room status is
changed to NEED CLEAN. When the option is set to ON, the
room status will be changed to AVAILABLE instead.(Hotel
Application.)

48

REDIAL REVW

OFF

When ON, the CALL LOG review will appear when the Redial or LNR button is pressed.

50

ISDN KEYFAC

OFF

If ON, allows Keypad Facility messages to be sent to the
exchange to invoke network features.

52

CHK SPV TRK

OFF

When ON, if trunks don’t have the supervision feature they
cannot make outgoing transfers or unsupervised conferences.

53

PRE FWD

OFF

BUSY

When ON, and a call arrives at a busy station that is not set
for forward busy, if a preset no answer destination is available the call is re-routed to that destination.

54

ORG DIAL LOG

OFF

When ON, all dialled digits will be saved in the outgoing call
log for Large LCD phones. When OFF, invalid dialling such
as dialling of a non-existent station number will not be saved
in the outgoing call log for Large LCD phones.

Samsung Business Communications

2-57

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

(continued)
No

Option

56

VOIP REALRBT

Default
OFF

Description
When ON, the system will connect the real path of the outgoing trunk to the incoming VoIP trunk user instead of providing
virtual ringback tone.

57

CO-CO TM ALL

OFF

When ON, the system trunk call will be attached timer for
preven the call from locking up

58

SMDR LOG

OFF

ALL
59

NO ITEM COST

In case of admin or normal station, and although cost is 0,
the smdr record can be saved when this option is set.

OFF

When ON, during check-in in hotel, item code and cost don’t
have to be entered. It is possible to skip.

60

SMDR

OFF

AUT2ACC
64

IPNW REAL RB

When ON, the AUTHORIZATION CODE will be printed in
ACCOUNT field of SMDR.

OFF

When ON, the system will connect the real path of the outgoing trunk to the VoIP networking trunk user instead of providing virtual ringback tone.

66

TRK AUTO

OFF

MOH

When ON, an incoming trunk call is connected to MOH
automatically after the DISA ANSWR timer(MMC 503) expires and the caller hears MOH. If the TRK AUTOMOH DISC
timer in MMC501 expires before the call is answered, it is
disconnected.(To use this feature, MMC 400 AUTO ANSWER option must set to ON.)

67

TRSF VT KEY

ON

When ON, works like the VT key when the user transfers the
call to Voice Mail using the TRSF key.

68

PAIR NO RING

OFF

When ON, if a paired phone is busy the call camps on and a
message waiting indication is set at the busy phone and
does not ring the free paired extension.

69

DISA NO ACT

OFF

When ON, a DISA call will go to the station assigned in MMC
406 after the DISA NO ACT timer expires.

70

ICM AUTO-

OFF

HOLD

When ON, will allow internal calls to be put on hold automatically when another call is taken.

71

DTMF TO S0

OFF

When ON, DTMF can be sent to S0 station

72

STNHOLD

OFF

The holded call can be picked up by other station.

OFF

When ON, if call is created by phonebook, area code can be

PICK
73

AREA DELETE

deleted.
74

ELCR DIALTON

OFF

In case of second lcr, dial tone can be different.

75

NET DTMF

OFF

When spnet and station is seizing trk port and listening dial

FWD

2-58

tone, it can be forward to external.

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
SOME OPTIONS DEPEND ON COUNTRY

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 210.
Display shows:

TEN. ON AND OFF

2) Dial option number.(e.g., 00)
Press Right Soft button to move cursor.

TEN. ON AND OFF

3) Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.

TEN. ON AND OFF

DISA PSWD

DISA PSWD

DISA PSWD

:OFF

:OFF

:ON

4) Repeat steps 2-3 for other options.
OR
Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to
next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-59

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[211] DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT
Designates which station or group of stations will ring when a door phone button is pressed.
If the ring plan destinations are not entered the default ring plan 1 is used. Available ring
plans are 1 to 6.

DEFAULT DATA
STATION GROUP: 500

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 211.
Display shows first door phone:

[229] DOOR RING

2) Dial door phone number.(e.g., 230)
OR
Press Volume button to scroll through door phone
numbers and use the Right Soft button to move
cursor.
OR
Select All door ring.

[230] DOOR RING

3) Enter new ring plan number selection via dial
keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button.

[250] DOOR RING

1:500

1:500

2:500

2:500

[ALL] DOOR RING
1:500

1:301

2:500

2:500

4) Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 3.
OR
Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 601

2-60

ASSIGN STATION GROUP

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[214] DISA ALARM RINGING STATION
Assigns the DISA alarm to ring at a specific phone. It is recommended that the person who
can clear the alarm also receives the notification.

CONDITIONS
y

A valid destination can be either a station group or an individual station.

y

The alarm ringing station or group will follow the ring plan time destination.

DEFAULT DATA
ALL RING PLANS: 500

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 214.
Display shows:

DISA ALARM RING

2) Enter valid destination number for ring plan.
(e.g., 217)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

DISA ALARM RING

3) Enter valid destination number for another
ring plan.(e.g., 249)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection.

DISA ALARM RING

1:500

1:217

1:217

2:500

2:500

2:249

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to
next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 202
MMC 601

CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODE
ASSIGN STATION GROUP

Samsung Business Communications

2-61

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[217] TRAFFIC REPORT OPTION
This MMC is used to print a traffic report and select options. The traffic report can be
printed on demand, or every hour, or at a programmed time each day, or for up to three
separately-timed shifts. Automatic printing will always clear the totals.
When report MANUAL PRINT OUT is selected, the options are:
No

Option

Description

0

PRINT AND CLEAR

A report is printed and all totals are reset to 0.

1

PRINTOUT ONLY

A report is printed and all the totals are saved.

2

CANCEL PRINTOUT

Cancels printout.

When AUTO PRINT OPTN is selected, the options are:
No

Option

Description

0

AUTO PRINT OFF

Automatic print feature is disabled.

1

DAILY

A report is printed at a programmable time every day and all the
totals are reset to ‘0’.

2

EVERY HOUR

A report will be printed every hour.

3

THREE TIME SHIFT

Up to three separate Start and End times may be programmed to
report traffic within different shifts. A report is printed at the end of
each End time and all totals are reset to ‘0’.

When a report is printed, the totals represent call statistics accumulated from the date of the
last report stated as BEGINNING: D & T up to the date of this printout stated as ENDING
D & T.
If there are no trunks in a group, the trunk group report for that group will not print.

CONDITIONS
If this function is required in an OfficeServ 7100 system with an MCP card, you must connect the LAN cable to the MCP card and be connected to a terminal supporting the TCP/IP
function.

DEFAULT DATA
AUTO PRINT OFF

2-62

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 217.
Display shows:

TRAFFIC REPORT

2) Dial 0 for manual or 1 for automatic print.
OR
Press Volume button to select and press Right
Soft button.

TRAFFIC REPORT

3) If AUTO selected, dial 0, 1, 2 or 3 for automatic
print option.
OR
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button.

TRAFFIC REPORT

4) Enter daily report time.(HHMM)

TRAFFIC REPORT

MANUAL PRINTOUT

AUTO PRINT OPTN

DAILY HHMM:2359

DAILY HHMM:2200

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to
next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 829

LAN PRINTER PARAMETERS

Samsung Business Communications

2-63

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[219] RELAY TYPE
Assigns the service type of three relay ports of misc card. Service consists of External Page,
Common bell , loud bell, NOT USED.

DEFAULT DATA
External Page

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 219.
Display shows:

[362] RELAY TYPE

2) Enter the station number.
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button.

[362] ISDN SVC

3) Select service type.(0-3)
OR
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button.

[362] RELAY TYPE

EXTERNAL PAGE

EXTERNAL PAGE

EXTERNAL PAGE

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-64

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[220] ISDN SERVICE TYPE
Assigns the ISDN service type of a single line telephone port. Service consists of BC
(Bearer Capability) and HLC(High Layer Capability).
No

Type

Description

BC

HLC

0

VOICE

Voice service

Speech

-

1

FAX 3

G3 FAX service

3.1 kHz Audio

FAX G2/G3

2

AUDIO 3.1

3.1 kHz Audio service

3.1 kHz Audio

None

3

MODEM

MODEM service

3.1 kHz Audio

Telephony

DEFAULT DATA
VOICE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 220.
Display shows:

[209] ISDN SVC

2) Enter the station number.(e.g., 210)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button.

[210] ISDN SVC

3) Select service type.(0-3)
OR
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button.

[210] ISDN SVC

VOICE

VOICE

AUDIO 3.1

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-65

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[221] EXTENSION TYPE
This MMC assigns station ports for a specific use. Each phone can be designated as one of
five types(see table). These types can be changed by dialling the type number or by scrolling through the types and pressing the Right Soft button to select the type.
No
0

Type
NORMAL STATION

Description
This is the default setting. The station will operate in the normal
manner associated with this type of station. Ports designated as
VMAA in MMC 207 must be designated as normal in this MMC.

1

GUEST SMOKING

When a station is designated as this type it will appear in room
status and check-in features as a smoking room.

2

GUEST NO SMOKING

When a station is designated as this type it will appear in room
status and check-in features as a non-smoking room.

3

MEETING ROOM

Stations designated as Meeting Rooms will have the same attributes as guest rooms with regard to cleaning and occupied status
but will not show up while scrolling through room status lists.

4

ADMINISTRATOR

Only stations designated as administrator stations can use Hotel
features.(check in, etc.)

5

FAX STATION

When a station is designated as this type it can be assigned as a
‘pair’ station to a GUEST SMOKING ROOM or GUEST NO
SMOKING ROOM in MMC 222.

CONDITIONS
This MMC can be used only when the Hotel function is enabled in MMC 813, HOTEL
OPERATION.

DEFAULT DATA
NORMAL STATION

ACTION

2-66

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 221.
Display shows:

[201] PHONE USE

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 214)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

[214] PHONE USE

NORMAL STATION

NORMAL STATION

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

3) Dial 0 - 5 to select station type.
OR
Press Volume button to select option and
press Right Soft button.

[214] PHONE USE
GUEST NO SMOKING

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 813

HOTEL OPERATION

Samsung Business Communications

2-67

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[222] FAX PAIR
Enables a guest room to have a normal phone line and fax line simultaneously. Only a
Guest No Smoking Room or Guest Smoking Room can be assigned a fax pair station
which is already assigned as a fax station in MMC 221.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

CONDITIONS
This MMC can be used only when the Hotel function is enabled in MMC 813, HOTEL
OPERATION.
This MMC can be used only when there is station that set GUEST SMOKING, GUEST NO
SMOKING in MMC 222, and if not, display ‘ROOM NOT EXIST’:

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 222.
Display shows:

[201] FAX PAIR

2) Dial guest extension number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select and press Right
Soft button.

[205] FAX PAIR

3) Dial fax station number.(e.g., 301)
OR
Press Volume button to select and press Right
Soft button.

[205] FAX PAIR

NONE

NONE

301

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 221
MMC 813

2-68

EXTENSION TYPE
HOTEL OPERATION

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[224] WAKE-UP ANNOUNCEMENT
This MMC is an enhanced Wake Up feature. The system will play a recorded message
when a Wake Up call is answered by the user. The Wake Up Announcement feature requires an SVMi-20 card to be installed in the system. When a Wake Up call is answered,
the system will access the customized Wake Up message(1-48) recorded in the card. The
end user can record this message and also change it if desired. The Wake Up message will
have no default ROM message assigned to it; however, a ROM message(49-64) may also
be assigned as the Wake Up message if desired.
This MMC has three options.
No
0

Option
AA GROUP

Description
Determines which AA group will be connected when a Wake Up
call is answered. This destination can be any AA group.

1

MESSAGE NO

Determines which message will be played when a Wake Up call is
answered. This destination can be a custom recorded message
(1-48) or one of the pre-programmed messages(49-64).

2

GROUP BUSY

Determines which tone source will be connected when all AA group
members are busy. This destination can be NONE, TONE or external
music on hold.
If NONE is set then dial tone is connected; if TONE is set then hold tone
is connected.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
AA GROUP: NONE
MESSAGE NO: NONE
GROUP BUSY: NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 224.
Display shows:

WAKE-UP ANNOUNCE

2) Dial 0, 1 or 2 for option select.
OR
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button.

WAKE-UP ANNOUNCE

Samsung Business Communications

AA GROUP :NONE

AA GROUP :NONE

2-69

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

3) Enter the AA group number.
OR
Press Volume button to select and press Right
Soft button to return to step 2.

WAKE-UP ANNOUNCE
AA GROUP :520

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-70

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[300] CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION
Allows the following features to be enabled/disabled on a per-station basis.
No
00

Option
ACCESS DIAL

Default
ON

Description
Determines whether a user can select a trunk or trunk
group by dialling its Directory Number(DN). This selection should be turned off when using LCR.

01

MICROPHONE

ON

Allows phones to be used in speakerphone mode.

02

OFF-HOOK RING

ON

Will allow a short burst of ring tone to indicate another call.

03

SMDR PRINT

ON

When the station is set for no Trunk Line calls to and
from this station, the station will not print on SMDR.
This includes transferred calls or calls picked up from
hold or park.

04

TGR ADV.TONE

ON

When this feature is set to ON, a warning tone will be
heard each time LCR advances to the next route.

05

VMAA FORWARD

ON

This feature selects whether Trunk Line calls can be
forwarded to voice mail: ON, permits forward to voice
mail; OFF, no forward to voice mail.

07

NGT PASSCODE

ON

When ON, the steps verifying the ring plan passcode
will be added in Ring Plan change.

08

INTRCOM SMDR

OFF

When the station is set to OFF, the station will not print
intercom calls on SMDR.

09

FWD DELAY USE

OFF

When ON, calls will overflow to the Forward No Answer
destination when the Forward No Answer timer expires
even when the Forward No Answer feature is not activated at the called party extension.

11

FORWARD OVRD

OFF

When set to ON and the station calls another station
which has forwarding set, the call will not forward.

12

RECL TO OPER

OFF

When the station is set to ON, if the station transfers a
call and the destination doesn’t answer, the call will
recall to the operator instead of the station.

13

SLT LP OPEN

OFF

When ON, SLI port receives real disconnect signal instead of busy or error tone.(VMAA or DATA ports always receive real disconnect signal.)

15

CID TO SLT

OFF

When a MIS card is installed and this option is set to
ON, the system will provide the CID signal to SLTs.

22

NO RCL FLASH

OFF

When the hook switch is flashed or the flash key is
pressed, a recall signal will not be sent to the system.

23

RBK STN NAME

OFF

When ringback, station name can be displayed, instead
of “Ringing”

Samsung Business Communications

2-71

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
SOME OPTIONS DEPEND ON COUNTRY

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 300.
Display shows:

[201] CUS.ON/OFF

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR

[205] CUS.ON/OFF

Press Volume button to select station.
OR
Select all stations and press Right Soft button to
move cursor.

ACCESS DIAL :ON

ACCESS DIAL :ON

[ALL] CUS.ON/OFF
ACCESS DIAL :ON

3) Press Volume button to select feature and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

[ALL] CUS.ON/OFF

4) Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF.
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button.

[ALL] CUS.ON/OFF

ACCESS DIAL :ON

ACCESS DIAL :OFF

5) Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.
Press Right Soft button to return to step 1.
OR
Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
LCR PROGRAMMING:
MMC 710
MMC 711
MMC 712

2-72

LCR DIGIT TABLE
LCR TIME TABLE
LCR ROUTE TABLE

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[301] ASSIGN STATION COS
Used to assign a class of service to each phone. There are 30 different classes of service
(defined in MMC 701, Assign COS Contents) and six ring plans based on the Ring Plan
Time in MMC 507 that can apply to the COS. Classes of service are numbered 01-30. The
default is COS 01.

DEFAULT DATA
RING PLANS 1-6: 01

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 301.
Display shows first station:

[201] STN COS

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through stations.
Press Right Soft button to advance step 3.
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through stations and
press Left Soft button to advance to step 4.
OR
Select all stations.

[205] STN COS

3) Enter new ring plan selection via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

[205] STN COS

4) Enter ring plan class of service.(e.g., 05)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through classes of
service and press Right Soft button to advance to
the next ring plan.
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service
and press Left Soft button to return to step 2.

[205] STN COS

Samsung Business Communications

1:01 2:01 3:01

1:01 2:01 3:01

[ALL] STN COS
1:01 2:01 3:01

1:01 2:01 3:01

1:05 2:01 3:01

2-73

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

5) Enter the next ring plan class of service.(e.g., 05)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through classes of
service and press Right Soft button to move cursor
to the next ring plan.
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through classes of
service and press Left Soft button to return to
previous step.

[205] STN COS
1:05 2:01 3:01

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance
to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 701

2-74

ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[302] PICKUP GROUPS
Allows the assignment of stations into call pickup groups. There is a maximum of 20
pickup groups. An unlimited number of members can belong to each group. Stations can
only be in one pickup group at any given time.

DEFAULT DATA
NO PICKUP GROUPS ASSIGNED

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 302.
Display shows:

[201] PICKUP GRP

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Use Volume button to select station number and
press Right Soft button.
OR
Select all stations.

[205] PICKUP GRP

3) Dial pickup group number.(e.g., 05)
OR
Press Volume button to select group number.

[205] PICKUP GRP

PICKUP GRP:NONE

PICKUP GRP:NONE

[ALL] PICKUP GRP
PICKUP GRP:??

PICKUP GRP:05

4) Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 to
enter more stations.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 3.
OR
Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 107
MMC 722
MMC 723

KEY EXTENDER
STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING

Samsung Business Communications

2-75

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[303] ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY
Assigns BOSS phones to SECRETARY phones. One BOSS station can have up to and including four SECRETARY stations and one SECRETARY station can have up to and including four BOSS stations.

CONDITIONS
y

A dedicated BOSS button must be programmed on the SECRETARY phone(s).

y

A dedicated BOSS button must also be programmed on the BOSS phone.

y

A station designated as BOSS may not be assigned as a secretary of another BOSS.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

PROGRAM BUTTONS
F BUTTON

Used to toggle BOSS/SECRETARY field

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 303.
Display shows.

BOSS STN:NONE
SECR 1:NONE

2) Dial BOSS station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button.

BOSS STN:205
SECR 1:NONE

3) Dial SECRETARY number.(1, 2, 3 or 4)
OR
Press Volume button to select number and press
Right Soft button.

BOSS STN:205
SECR 1:NONE

4) Dial SECRETARY station number.(e.g., 201)
OR
Press Volume button to select station.
Press Right Soft button to return to step 3 to
enter more SECR numbers.

BOSS STN:205
SECR 1:201
BOSS STN:205
SECR 2:202

5) Press Left Soft button to return to step 2 and
continue entries.
OR
Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 722
2-76

STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[304] ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE
Allows you to select which stations are allowed to make calls through C.O. lines or
to answer calls for C.O. lines.(on a station and trunk use group basis)

CONDITIONS
y

Stations are set within use group numbers 001~100and trunks are set within use group
numbers 101~200 in MMC 614, ASSIGN USE GROUP.

y

If a station group is set to NO Dial, stations cannot place calls on that trunk group.

y

If a station group is set to NO Answer, stations cannot answer incoming calls on that
trunk group.

Note: MMC 406, Trunk Ring Assignment, overrides this MMC for the Answer option.

DEFAULT DATA
DIAL: YES
ANS: YES

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 304.
Display shows:

(001) USE (101)

2) Dial the station use group number.(e.g., 005)
OR
Press Volume button to select station use group
and press Right Soft button.
OR
Select all station use groups.

(005) USE (101)

3) Dial the station use group number.(e.g., 101)
OR
Press Volume button to select trunk use group
and press Right Soft button.
OR
Select all trunk use groups.

(005) USE (101)

Samsung Business Communications

DIAL:YES ANS:YES

DIAL:YES ANS:YES

(ALL) USE (101)
DIAL:YES ANS:YES

DIAL:YES ANS:YES

(005) USE (ALL)
DIAL:YES ANS:YES

2-77

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

4) Press Volume button to select YES/NO option.
OR
Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press Right
Soft button to move cursor to ANS option.
Press Volume button to select YES/NO Option.
OR
Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press Right
Soft button to return to step 2.

(005) USE (101)
DIAL:NO ANS:YES

(005) USE (101)
DIAL:NO ANS:YES

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 316
MMC 614

2-78

COPY STATION USABLE
STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[305] ASSIGN FORCED CODE
This MMC allows one of the four options to be selected: the assignment of account codes
with verification, account codes without verification and authorization codes(or none of
these) on a per-station basis or on an all-station basis. The system supports 500 authorization codes and 999 account codes which may or may not require verification.
No

Type

Description

0

NONE

No Account or Authorization code required.(strictly voluntary)

1

AUTHORIZE CODE

Forces user to enter a valid Authorization code of four or
more digits listed in the AUTHORIZATION CODE Table.(MMC
707)

2

ACCT VERIFIED

Forces user to enter a valid Account code listed in the ACCOUNT CODE Table.(MMC 708)

3

ACCT NO VERIFIED

Forces user to enter an Account code which is not verified.
User can enter any code up to 12 digits.(including ∗ and #)

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 305.
Display shows.

[201] FORCD CODE
NONE

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

[205] FORCD CODE
NONE

3) Dial a feature option 0-3.(e.g., 2)
OR
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button to return to step 2.

[205] FORCD CODE
ACCT VERIFIED

4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 707
MMC 708

AUTHORIZATION CODE
ACCOUNT CODE

Samsung Business Communications

2-79

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[306] HOT LINE/OFF HOOK SELECTION
Allows a station to make a predetermined call, similar to a ring-down circuit, upon the expiration of a timer.(see MMC 502, STATION TIMERS, Off-Hook Selection Timer)

CONDITIONS
y

The hotline destination can be a station, a station group, a trunk, a trunk group or an
external number.

y

There is a maximum of 18 digits in the dial string for external numbers. The access
code for trunk or trunk group access(e.g., 0 or 9) is not counted as part of the 18.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

PROGRAM BUTTONS
B
C
D
E

Used to insert a flash code ‘F’
Used to insert a pause code ‘P’
Used to insert a pulse/tone conversion code ‘C’
Used to mask/unmask following digits-shows as ‘[’ or ‘]’

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 306.
Display shows.

[201] HOT LINE

2) Dial station number.
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through stations.
Press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

[205] HOT LINE

3) Enter the hot line destination of a station or
trunk ID(e.g., 9 or 701) with a maximum of
18 outgoing digits after the access code for
the CO call.(see above list of options if needed)

[205] HOT LINE

NONE

NONE

9-1305P4264100_

4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 502

2-80

STATION-WIDE TIMERS(OFF-HOOK SELECTION TIMER)

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[308] ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE
Assigns a background music source to phones. There is one internal music source/external
music source. The default directory numbers for the music sources are 371.

CONDITIONS
To use an external sound source, connect the corresponding port of the MOH source to the
misc port of MP10/11 card. If ‘NONE’ is set for background music or if a sound source is
not connected to the external sound source port designated as the background music source,
music will not be played even if the background music function is enabled.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 308.
Display shows current setting.

[201] BGM SOURCE

2) Dial phone number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through phone
numbers and press Right Soft button to move
the cursor.
OR
Select all stations.

[205] BGM SOURCE

3) Enter source number.(e.g.,371)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

[205] BGM SOURCE

BGM SOURCE:NONE

BGM SOURCE:NONE

[ALL] BGM SOURCE
BGM SOURCE:?

BGM SOURCE: 371

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 309
MMC 408

ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE
ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE

Samsung Business Communications

2-81

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[309] ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE
Assigns a Music On Hold source to phones. There is one internal music source/external
music source.
The default directory numbers for the music sources is 371.

CONDITIONS
To use an external sound source, connect the corresponding port of the MOH source to the
external sound source of MISC port of MP10/11 card.

DEFAULT DATA
TONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 309.
Display shows current setting:

[201] STN MOH

2) Dial phone number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through phone numbers
and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all stations.

[205] STN MOH

3) Enter source number.(e.g., 371)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

[205] STN MOH

MOH SOURCE:NONE

MOH SOURCE:NONE

[ALL] STN MOH
MOH SOURCE:?

MOH SOURCE:371

4) Press Transfer button and enter to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 308
MMC 408

2-82

ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE
ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[310] LCR CLASS OF SERVICE
Assigns the LCR class of service allowed on a per-station/per-trunk basis. There are eight
classes which may be assigned. LCR class of service allows specific users to ‘trunk advance’ up to a matching LCR class of service programmed in MMC 712.

DEFAULT DATA
LEAST COST ROUTING COS: 1

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 310.
Display shows:

[201] LCR CLASS

2) Dial station/trunk number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all stations.

[205] LCR CLASS

3) Dial 1-8 to select class type.(e.g., 3)
OR
Press Volume button to select class type and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

[205] LCR CLASS

LCR CLASS 1

LCR CLASS 1

[ALL] LCR CLASS
LCR CLASS ?

LCR CLASS 3

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
LCR PROGRAMMING:
MMC 710
MMC 711
MMC 712
MMC 713

LCR DIGIT TABLE
LCR TIME TABLE
LCR ROUTE TABLE
LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE

Samsung Business Communications

2-83

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[312] ALLOW CALLER ID
Allows the system administrator or technician to allow or deny CID data to be sent from, or
displayed at, LCD phones.
Option

Description

RCV

Set whether to display CID.

SND

Set whether to send CID for ISDN calls.

DEFAULT DATA
RCV: YES
SND: YES

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 312.
Display shows:

[201] CID/ANI

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all stations.

[205] CID/ANI

3) Dial 0 or 1 to select Receive option.
OR
Press Volume button to select receive option and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

[205] CID/ANI

4) Dial 0 or 1 to select Send option.
OR
Press Volume button to select send option and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

[205] CID/ANI

RCV:YES SND:YES

RCV:YES SND:YES

[ALL] CID/ANI
RCV:YES SND:YES

RCV:YES SND:YES

RCV:YES SND:YES

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 119

2-84

CALLER ID DISPLAY

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[314] CONFIRM OUTGOING CALL
Allows outgoing call restriction by call duration time: calls can be disconnected or the user
can receive ‘confirm tone’.(refer to the CO Confirm timer in MMC 501)
No

Type

Description

0

NONE

No action

1

CONFIRM TONE

Caller hears confirmation tone at programmed time

2

DISCONNECT

Call is disconnected.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 314.
Display shows:

[201] CO CONFIRM

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and use
Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all stations.

[205] CO CONFIRM

3) Dial a feature option 0-2.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

[205] CO CONFIRM

NONE

NONE

[ALL] CO CONFIRM
NONE

CONFIRM TONE

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 501

SYSTEM-WIDE TIMERS

Samsung Business Communications

2-85

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[315] CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION
Customer Set Relocation allows the system administrator or technician to exchange similar
stations in the system without hardware changes. All the button settings, features, etc. for a
phone can be copied to another. The user can relocate to the new station and work as normal.

CONDITIONS
Refer to the Relocate Allowed Table(next page) listing which phones/AOMs can be exchanged.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 315.
Display shows:

SET RELOCATION

2) Enter number of original station.(e.g., 202)
Press Right Soft button to move cursor.

SET RELOCATION

3) Enter second station number.(e.g., 210)
Press Right Soft button to enter data.

SET RELOCATE

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

SET RELOCATION

EXT_

EXT

EXT202 EXT_

EXT202 EXT210

EXT_

EXT

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-86

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Relocate
Allowed
Table

SLT

EURO

EURO

EURO

48B

64B

iDCS

iDCS

6B

12B

24B

AOM

AOM

28D

18D

SLT

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

EURO 6B

NO

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

EURO 12B

NO

NO

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

EURO 24B

NO

NO

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

48B AOM

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

YES

NO

NO

64B AOM

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

YES

NO

NO

iDCS 28D

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

YES

iDCS 18D

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

YES

iDCS 8D

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

DS-5012L

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

DS-5014D

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

DS-5021D

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

DS-5007S

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

DS-5014S

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

DS-5038S

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

IP Phone*

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

Samsung Business Communications

2-87

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

Relocate
Allowed
Table

2-88

iDCS

DS-

DS-

DS-

DS-

DS-

DS-

IP

8D

5012L

5014D

5021D

5007S

5014S

5038S

Phone*

SLT

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

EURO 6B

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

EURO 12B

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

EURO 24B

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

48B AOM

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

64B AOM

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

iDCS 28D

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

iDCS 18D

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

iDCS 8D

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

DS-5012L

NO

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

DS-5014D

NO

NO

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

DS-5021D

NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

DS-5007S

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

NO

NO

DS-5014S

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

NO

DS-5038S

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

IP Phone*

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[316] COPY STATION USABLE
Provides a tool for copying station/trunk use assignments in MMC 304 from one station
user group to another. This can be done on a station use group basis or for all station use
groups.
Use groups are set up in MMC 614.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 316.
Display shows:

(001)COPY USABLE

2) Enter station use group number.(e.g., 005)
OR
Press Volume buttons to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

(005)COPY USABLE

3) Enter station use group number to copy from.
Cursor returns to step 2.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection.

(005)COPY USABLE

FROM:NONE

FROM:NONE

FROM:003

4) Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
OR
Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 304
MMC 614

ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE
STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP

Samsung Business Communications

2-89

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[317] ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE
This MMC is used to determine whether stations in one use group can make intercom calls
to stations in other use groups.(within the same tenant)
Use groups are set up in MMC 614.

DEFAULT DATA
DIAL: YES

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 317.
Display shows:

(001) USE (001)

2) Dial the first station use group number.(e.g., 005)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and
press Right Soft button.
OR
Select all station use groups.

(005) USE (001)

3) Dial the second station use group number.(e.g., 004)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and
press Right Soft button.

(005) USE (004)

4) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.(NO means first group
cannot dial second group)
OR
Press Volume button to select YES/NO and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

(005) USE (004)

DIAL:YES

DIAL:YES

(ALL) USE (001)
DIAL:YES

DIAL:YES

DIAL:NO

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 614

2-90

STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[318] DISTINCTIVE RINGING
Allows the technician to select the ring tone heard at a keyset when called by a specific station or when a specific trunk rings that keyset. There is also a cadence control option to
perform a similar function for SLTs.
There are eight ring tones available along with a Follow Station option(default) for keysets.
There are five cadences and a Follow Station option(default) for SLTs. See table, below.
It also allows the technician to assign the call priority for a group call when called by a
specific station or when a specific trunk rings that phone. When calls come into a station
group and all group members are busy, the system will assign a priority to a specific station
or a specific trunk so that high priority calls will be placed at the front of the group queue.
If this option is set to NO, the call held longest in the group queue has the highest priority.
There are nine priority levels: level 1 is the highest and level 9 is the lowest.
Option
TONE
Option
CADENCE
Option

No

Description

Calls will ring with the keyset user’s choice of ring frequency.
1~8

Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring with this frequency.

Calls will ring with the normal SLT ring cadences.
1

Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring with the intercom ring cadence.

2

Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring with the CO ring cadence.

3

Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring with the DOOR ring cadence.

4

Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring with the ALARM ring cadence.

5

Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring with the CALLBACK ring cadence.

CONDITIONS
y

Digital phone(keyset) rings are distinguished by their tone. If the T(TONE) of the calling internal/external phone is set to ‘NO’, the bell rings according to the normal setting in MMC 111, PHONE RING TONE, for the receiving station. If T is set to 1-8,
the bell rings according to the designated ring tone.

y

SLT rings are distinguished by their ringing interval. If the C(CADENCE) of the calling internal/external phone is set to ‘NO’, the bell rings according to the interval set in
MMC 510, SLI RING CADENCE, for each calling station type. If C is set to 1-5, the
bell rings according to that interval regardless of the calling station type.

Samsung Business Communications

2-91

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

DEFAULT DATA
T: NO
C: NO

(FOLLOW STATION SETTING)
(FOLLOW STATION SETTING)

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 318.
Display shows first station:

[201] RING TONE

2) Dial trunk or station number.(e.g., 705)
OR
Press Volume button to select trunk or station
and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

[705] RING TONE

3) Dial 1-8 to select ring tone.
OR
Press Volume button to select ring tone and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

[705] RING TONE

4) Dial 1-5 to select ring cadence.
OR
Press Volume button to select ring cadence and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

[705] RING TONE

5) Enter priority level via dial keypad.
(1-9 or NO)

[705] RING TONE

T:NO C:NO PRI:NO

T:NO C:NO PRI:NO

T:5 C:NO PRI:NO

T:5 C:3 PRI:NO

T:5 C:3 PRI:NO

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 111
MMC 510

2-92

PHONE RING TONE
SLI RING CADENCE

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[319] BRANCH GROUP
Assign stations to branch groups. There is a maximum of four branch groups. When a C.O.
line is ringing at a station, other stations assigned the same branch group can answer the incoming call by going off hook.

MMC [319]
This MMC is currently not valid in the UK/EU.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 319.
Display shows.

[201] BRANCH GRP

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205).
OR
Press Volume button to select station and use
Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all stations.

[205] BRANCH GRP

3) Dial a branch group number. (01-20).
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

[205] BRANCH GRP

BRANCH GRP:NONE

BRANCH GRP:NONE

[ALL] BRANCH GRP
BRANCH GRP:??

BRANCH GRP:04

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-93

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[320] PRESET FORWARD NO ANSWER
Allows a technician to assign a default destination for Forward No Answer(FNA) to each
station on the system. These destinations may be the same or different for each station. The
preset FNA destination will be temporarily overwritten if the station user enters a different
FNA destination. If you cancel the new destination, the preset destination will once more
be in effect. Preset FNA time follows the station ‘NO ANS FWD’ timer(MMC 502).
Preset FNA can be assigned respectively for each type of call.
No

Type

Description

0

INT

Preset FNA applies only to intercom calls.

1

EXT

Preset FNA applies only to incoming calls.

2

BOTH

Preset FNA applies to both intercom and incoming calls.

When using PRE FWD BUSY option in MMC [210]
If PRE FWD BUSY option in MMC 210 is set ON, the forward busy follows this
feature.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

2-94

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 320.
Display shows:

[201] PRESET FNA

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all stations.

[205] PRESET FNA

3) Dial valid number via keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to select call type and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

[205] PRESET FNA

NONE

NONE

OPT:BOTH

OPT:BOTH

[ALL] PRESET FNA
NONE

202

OPT:BOTH

OPT:BOTH

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

4) Dial call type 0, 1 or 2.(e.g., 1)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to return to step 2.

[205] PRESET FNA
202

OPT:EXT

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 102

CALL FORWARD

Samsung Business Communications

2-95

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[323] CALLING PARTY NUMBER
Allows a number up to 16 digits to be entered and associated with a station or trunk number on a per PRI/BRI basis. When this station makes an outgoing call on this PRI, the
number entered here will be the Calling Party Number sent on the call. There are four tables for the system. If there are no entries in the tables the system uses the number for the
trunk entered in MMC 405, TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER, for the Calling Party Number.

DEFAULT DATA
EMPTY

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 323.
Display shows:

[201] SEND CLIP

2) Dial extension or trunk number.(e.g., 230)
OR
Press Volume button to select extension and
press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

[230] SEND CLIP

3) Dial table number.
OR
Press Volume button to select table number and
press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

[230] SEND CLIP

4) Enter the Calling Party Number.

[230] SEND CLIP

1:

1:

2:

2:3055922900

5) Repeat steps 3 & 4 to enter other tables and Calling
Party Numbers.
OR
Repeat steps 2, 3, & 4 to enter other station or trunk
and Calling Party Numbers.
6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 419
MMC 420
MMC 834

2-96

BRI OPTIONS
PRI OPTIONS
H.323 OPTIONS

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[326] RINGBACK TONE MESSAGE
Assigns Color Ring Message by using SVMi message.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 326.
Display shows:

[301] RBT MSG

2) Enter the VM station number.
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button.

[302] RBT MSG

3) Select Ring Message. (0001-9999)
OR
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button.

[302] RBT MSG

NONE

NONE

0001

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

Samsung Business Communications

2-97

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[400] CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK
Assigns several options(listed below) on a per-trunk basis.
No
0

Option
1A2 EMULATION

Default
OFF

Description
When this option is set to ON up to 4 internal stations
can participate in a conversation on this trunk by pressing the trunk key.

1

TRUNK INC DND

OFF

When this option is set to ON a trunk that is programmed to ring a specific station(a private line or DIL)
will ring at that station if the station is in DND.

2

TRUNK FORWARD

ON

When this option is set to OFF this trunk will not follow a
ringing stations call forwarding.

3

LCR ALLOW

OFF

Allows LCR to be switched ON/OFF when a trunk is
accessed using a DT key or by dialling its port number
(e.g., 701).

6

EFWD EXT CLI

ON

This option determines what kinds of CLI number will be
sent to the external forwarded outgoing call.(Station or
Received CLI from Trunk)

7

REPEAT CLI

ON

This option determines what kinds of CLI number will be
sent to the trunk to trunk call.(Trunk or Received CLI
from Trunk)

8

TONECHK DISC

OFF

When this option is set to ON, loop trunk can be disconnected by detecting busy tone.(To use this feature, the
LP TRK TONE DISC option in MMC 861 must be set to
ENABLE.)

9

AUTO ANSWER

OFF

When this option is set to ON, Auto Answer mode can
be assigned on a per-trunk basis.

10

COLORRING AS

OFF

When this options is set to ON, coloring service can be
used by svmi message.

DEFAULT DATA
1A2 EMULATE: OFF
TRK INC. DND: OFF
TRK FORWARD: ON
EFWD EXT CLI: ON
REPEAT CLI: ON
TONECHK DISC: OFF
AUTO ANSWER: OFF
COLORRING AS: OFF

2-98

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 400.
Display show:

[701] TRK ON/OFF

2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704)
OR
Press Volume button to select trunk.
OR
Select all trunks and press Right Soft button to move
cursor to options.

[704] TRK ON/OFF

3) Dial option number from above list
OR
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

[704] TRK ON/OFF

4) Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF.
OR
Press Volume button to select ON/OFF and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

[704] TRK ON/OFF

1A2 EMULATE:OFF

1A2 EMULATE:OFF

[ALL] TRK ON/OFF
1A2 EMULATE:?

TRK FORWARD:ON

TRK FORWARD:OFF

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-99

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[401] TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE
Used to select the mode of the trunk lines: CO LINE or PBX LINE. If PBX mode is chosen,
this allows PBX access codes to be recognized, thus allowing more complete toll restriction.
(call barring) This mode is assigned on a per-trunk basis.

DEFAULT DATA
ALL TRUNKS: CO LINE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 401.
Display shows:

[701] PBX LINE

2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through trunk
numbers and press Right Soft button to move.
OR
Select all trunks.

[704] PBX LINE

3) Dial 1 for PBX or 0 for CO.(e.g., 1)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through options
Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

[704] PBX LINE

CO LINE

CO LINE

[ALL] PBX LINE
?

PBX LINE

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-100

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[402] TRUNK DIAL TYPE
Used to determine the dialling type of each trunk line. There are two options:
No

Type

Description

0

DTMF TYPE

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency

1

DIAL PULSE TYPE

Dial Pulse

DEFAULT DATA
ALL TRUNKS: DTMF

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 402.
Display shows:

[701] DIAL TYPE

2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers
and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.
OR
Select all.

[704] DIAL TYPE

3) Dial 0 for DTMF or 1 for PULSE.
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through options
Press Right Soft buttons to return to step 2.

[704] DIAL TYPE

DTMF TYPE

DTMF TYPE

[ALL] DIAL TYPE
?

DIAL PULSE TYPE

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 501
MMC 503

SYSTEM TIMERS
TRUNK-WIDE TIMERS

Samsung Business Communications

2-101

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[403] TRUNK TOLL CLASS
Assigns to ll class level assignments on a per-trunk or all-trunk basis in a day or night condition. The options for toll level will follow either the station class or the class of service
defined in MMCs 702, Toll Deny Table, and 703, Toll Allowance Table. The toll classes
available are listed below with their entry numbers.
No

Class

Description

0

F-STN

Follow station toll restriction

1

CLS-A

Follow toll class A(Unrestricted)

2

CLS-B

Follow toll class B

3

CLS-C

Follow toll class C

4

CLS-D

Follow toll class D

5

CLS-E

Follow toll class E

6

CLS-F

Follow toll class F

7

CLS-G

Follow toll class G

8

CLS-H

Follow toll class H(All restricted)

DEFAULT DATA
ALL TRUNKS: F-STN

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 403.
Display shows:

[701] TOLL CLASS

2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers
and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.
OR
Select all.

[704] TOLL CLASS

3) Dial ring plan number.(1~6)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through ring plan
numbers and press Right Soft button to move
the cursor.

[704] TOLL CLASS

2-102

1:F-STN 2:F-STN

1:F-STN 2:F-STN

[ALL] TOLL CLASS
1:F-STN 2:F_STN

1:F-STN 2:F-STN

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

4) Enter day toll class.(e.g., 2 for CLS-B)
OR
Press Volume button to scroll through toll classes and
use Right Soft button to move the cursor.

[704] TOLL CLASS
1:CLS-B 2:F-STN

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 301
MMC 507
MMC 701

ASSIGN STATION COS
ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME
ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

Samsung Business Communications

2-103

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[404] TRUNK NAME
Allows a name up to 11 characters long to be entered to identify an individual trunk.

ENTERING CHARACTERS
Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 404.
Display shows:

[701] TRUNK NAME

2) Dial trunk.(e.g., 704)
OR
Press Volume button to select trunk and press
Right Soft button to move the cursor.

[704] TRUNK NAME

3) Enter trunk name.
Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

[704] TRUNK NAME
TELECOMS

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 104
MMC 405

2-104

STATION NAME
TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[405] TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER
Allows a number up to 11 digits long to be entered to identify an individual trunk.

ENTERING NUMBERS
Numbers are written using the keypad. Each press of a key selects the digit and moves the
cursor to the next position.
The # button can be used for special characters:
#, space, &, !, :, ?, ., %, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ; , \ , " , ~.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 405.
Display shows:

[701] CO TEL NO.

2) Dial trunk.(e.g., 704)
OR
Press Volume button to select trunk and press
Right Soft button to move the cursor.

[704] CO TEL NO.

3) Enter trunk number using the dial keypad.

[704] CO TEL NO.
3054264100

4) Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
OR
Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 404

TRUNK NAME

Samsung Business Communications

2-105

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[406] TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT
Enables ringing to a specific station or to a group of stations when incoming calls are received. This MMC controls ring plan destinations for ring down trunks. If the ring plan
destinations are not entered, the default ring plan is ring plan 1.

DEFAULT DATA
ALL TRUNKS RING DEFAULT OPERATOR GROUP

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 406.
Display shows:

[701] TRK RING

2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers
and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.
OR
Select all.

[704] TRK RING

3) Dial ring plan number or press Right Soft button to
move to the next step.

[704] TRK RING

4) Dial station number or station group number.
(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor to the
next ring plan destination and repeat step 4.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 3.

[704] TRK RING

1:500

1:500

2:500

2:500

[All] TRK RING
1:500

1:500

1:205

2:500

2:500

2:500

[704] TRK RING
1:205

2:501

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 202
MMC 507
MMC 601

2-106

CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODES
ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME
ASSIGN STATION GROUP

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[407] FORCED TRUNK RELEASE
Provides a positive forced trunk release to a specific trunk or all trunks in the event of a
trunk lock-up.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 407.
Display shows:

[701] TRK RELS.

2) Dial in trunk number.(e.g., 704)
OR
Press Volume button selected trunk and press
Right Soft button.
OR
Select all trunks.

[704] TRK RELS.

3) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.
(Pressing 1 or 0 will return to step 2)

[704] TRK RELS.

RELEASE?_Y:1,N:0

RELEASE?_Y:1,N:0

[ALL] TRK RELS.
RELEASE?_Y:1,N:0

RELEASE?_Y:1,N:0

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-107

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[408] ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE
Allows the system administrator to select which Music-On-Hold(MOH) source can be
heard on each trunk. There is one internal music source/external music source (371).

CONDITIONS
To use an external sound source, connects the corresponding port of the to the misc port of
MP10/11 card.

DEFAULT DATA
TONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 408.
Display shows: current setting.

[701] TRK MOH
MOH:TONE AA:TONE

2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers
and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all.

[704] TRK MOH
MOH:TONE AA:TONE

3) Enter source number.(e.g., 371)
OR
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button to return to step 2.

[705] TRK MOH
MOH:371 AA:TONE

[ALL] TRK MOH
MOH:? AA:?

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 756

2-108

ASSIGN VMMOH

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[409] TRUNK STATUS READ
This is a READ-ONLY MMC. Allows the status of trunks to be read in a format that will
enable the servicing personnel to quickly identify the ownership and position of a trunk.
No

Type

Description

00

PORT

Port Number(Cabinet/Slot/Port)

01

TYPE

LOOP, GND, E & M, DID, BRI, PRI, VOIP

02

1A2 EMULATE

1A2 Emulation On/Off

03

TRK FORWARD

Trunk Forward On/Off

04

LINE

CO/PBX

05

DIAL

DTFM/Dial Pulse

06-11

TOLL TYPE 1-6

Ring Plan Toll Restriction(1-6)

12-17

RING PLAN 1-6

Ring Plan Ring Destination(1-6)

18

MOH SOURCE

MOH Source

19

DISA LINE

DISA Status

DEFAULT DATA
FOLLOWS TRUNK

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 409.
Display shows:

[701] TRK STATUS

2) Enter trunk number via dial keypad.(e.g., 704)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance cursor.

[704] TRK STATUS

3) Enter desired option 00-19.(e.g., 01)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection.

[704] TRK STATUS

PORT:C1-S5-P01

PORT:C1-S5-P04

TYPE:LOOP TRUNK

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

Samsung Business Communications

2-109

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 400
MMC 401
MMC 402
MMC 403
MMC 404
MMC 406
MMC 408
MMC 410

2-110

CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK
TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE
TRUNK DIAL TYPE
TRUNK TOLL CLASS
TRUNK NAME
TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT
ASSIGN TRUNK MUSIC ON HOLD SOURCE
ASSIGN DISA TRUNK

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[410] ASSIGN DISA TRUNK
Allows the system to have Direct Inward System Access(DISA). Because there is a possibility that unauthorized calls will be made via this feature, several safeguards have been
added. Users must be informed of these to prevent unnecessary service calls. DISA can
lock out when a predetermined number of invalid consecutive calls are attempted. Callers
will then receive error tone until the programmable timer has expired.

CONDITIONS
y

The * key may be used to initiate new dial tone while in a station to station call.

y

The # button may be used to terminate the DISA call and disconnect the central office
line. DISA lines must be assigned to the ring plan(s).

DEFAULT DATA
ALL TRUNKS: NORMAL

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 410.
Display shows:

[701]

2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704)
OR
Press Volume button to select trunk and press
Right Soft button.
OR
Select all trunks.
OR

[704]

3) Press Volume button to select a Ring Plan.(e.g., 3)
OR
Using the dial keypad, press 1 to select or 0 not to select the Ring Plan.(e.g., 1 to select)
Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

[704]

123456

DISA LINE:000000

123456

DISA LINE:000000

[ALL]

123456

DISA LINE:000000

123456

DISA LINE:001000

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 500

SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS

Samsung Business Communications

2-111

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[412] ASSIGN TRUNK SIGNAL
Allows the assignment of analogue DID or E & M cards for proper signalling. These trunks
can also use the translation tables in MMC 714.
No

Signalling condition type

0

IMMEDIATE START

1

DELAYED START

2

WINK START

3

NO ANSWER BACK

4

DIRECT BACK

CONDITIONS
An analogue E & M/DID Trunk card must be installed in the OfficeServ 7100 system. Otherwise, the ‘NO E&M/DID TRUNK’ message is displayed.

DEFAULT DATA
IMMEDIATE START

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 412.
Display shows:

[701] TRK SIGNAL

2) Enter desired trunk number.(e.g., 705)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all trunks.

[705] TRK SIGNAL

3) Enter desired trunk type selection from above list.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.

[705] TRK SIGNAL

IMMEDIATE START

IMMEDIATE START

[ALL] TRK SIGNAL
IMMEDIATE START

WINK START

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 714

2-112

DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[414] MPD/PRS SIGNAL
Used on a per-trunk basis to define if a Trunk line is to be either a Metering Pulse Detection(MPD) or a Polarity Reversal Signal(PRS) trunk.
An MPD Trunk will detect a C.O-provided meter pulse. A Polarity Reversal trunk will detect the line reversal signal which may be provided by the Trunk Line when the other party
answers the outgoing call or the outside party clears the call.
Type
PRS 1

Description
When first PRS is detected, call duration timer is started. When second PRS is detected, call duration timer is stopped. The call is not released.

PRS 2

When first PRS is detected, call duration timer is started. When second PRS is detected, call duration timer is stopped and the call is released.

PRS 3

The call duration timer starts based on the timer. When first PRS is detected, call duration timer is stopped and call is released.

MPD

Metering Pulse Detection.

CONDITIONS
y

If the trunk is designated as PRS, the call duration timer will be started and the results
printed on the SMDR record.

y

PRS is also essential for dropping a trunk-to- trunk conversation which is unsupervised
by an internal party.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE(NORMAL)

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 414.
Display shows:

[701] TRK PRS

2) Dial desired trunk number.(e.g., 705)
OR
Press Volume button to select trunk and use
Right Soft button to move cursor.

[705] TRK PRS

Samsung Business Communications

NONE

NONE

2-113

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

3) Dial 0 for PRS 1, 1 for PRS 2, 2 for PRS 3, 3 for
MPD or 4 for NORMAL.
OR
Press Volume button to scroll through options and
use Left or Right Soft button to return to step 2.

[705] TRK PRS
PRS 2

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC503

2-114

TRUNK-WIDE TIMERS

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[415] REPORT TRUNK ABANDON DATA
Allows the system administrator or technician to enable or disable the reporting of abandoned Trunk Line calls for which CLIP information has been collected on a per-trunk basis.
There are two options for this MMC:
No
0

Option

Description

REPORT: NO

Abandoned call records for incoming calls with CLIP information will not
be printed on SMDR or stored in the system call abandon list. These
records will continue to be stored in the station review list.

1

REPORT: YES

Abandoned call records for incoming calls with CLIP information will be
printed on SMDR and stored in the system call abandon list. These records will also be stored in the station review list.

DEFAULT DATA
ALL TRUNKS REPORT: YES

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 415.
Display shows:

[701] TRK ABNDN

2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 705)
OR
Use Volume button to select trunk and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

[705] TRK ABNDN

3) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.
OR
Use Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button to return to step 2.

[705] TRK ABNDN

REPORT:YES

REPORT:YES

REPORT:NO

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 725

SMDR OPTIONS

Samsung Business Communications

2-115

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[417] E1/PRI CRC4 OPTION
This option is used to enable/disable CRC4 generation and checking.

CONDITIONS
y

This is useful with some networks which do not support CRC4 framing but only
PCM30 framing.

y

After changing this option, MMC 418 must be used to restart the card to make the
change effective.

DEFAULT DATA
CRC4: ON

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 417.
Display shows:

[701] E1/PRI CRC

2) Enter first trunk number in PRI card.(e.g., 701)
OR
Press Volume button to select trunk and use
Right Soft button to move cursor.

[701] E1/PRI CRC

3) Enter 1 for ON 0 for OFF.
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button.

[701] E1/PRI CRC

ON

ON

OFF

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 418

2-116

BRI & PRI CARD RESTART

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[418] BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART
This MMC is used to restart a BRI or PRI card at the card level. This action is required to
update the processor on the BRI or PRI card with any changes in the card setup MMCs and
to put these changes into effect.

CONDITIONS
y

A BRI card or TEPRI card or TEPRI2 card must be installed in the system.

y

Before setting the PRI program, the J2 jumper of the TEPRI or TEPRI2 card must be
set ON to PRI mode.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 418.
Display shows first BRI or PRI circuit:

[725] RESTART

2) Dial first trunk on a BRI or PRI card.(e.g., 733)
OR
Press Volume button to select the first trunk
and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

[733] RESTART

3) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.
Pressing 1 will advance to step 4.

[733] RESTART

4) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.
Pressing 1 or 0 will return to step 2.

[733] RESTART

CARD RESTART?NO

CARD RESTART?NO

CARD RESTART?YES

ARE YOU SURE?YES

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 419
MMC 420
MMC 423
MMC 424

BRI OPTIONS
PRI OPTIONS
S/T MODE
BRI S0 MAPPING

Samsung Business Communications

2-117

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[419] BRI OPTIONS
Assigns several options on a per-BRI basis. There are different options depending on
whether the BRI is programmed as a trunk or station in MMC 423.
OPTIONS FOR BRI PORTS PROGRAMMED AS TRUNKS
No

Option

0

CHANNEL ANY

Description
When this option is set to YES, the system will place calls on any free
channel of that BRI if the channel chosen by the user is busy. If set to
NO, they will receive a busy signal if they attempt to access a busy
channel even if the other channel on that BRI is free.

1

BRI MODE

BRI access mode select.

P-P NOR

Point to Point NORmal. This operates like a standard telephone line with
one CO number per channel and ring according to MMC 406.

P-P DID

Point to Point Direct Inward Dial. This operates in a similar manner to an
analogue DID circuit with multiple CO numbers pointed to a single
channel and translated within the system(MMC714) to a single device.

P-M NOR

Point to Multi-point NORmal. This type of circuit operates in a similar
manner to P-P NORmal but allows multiple devices to be attached to the
circuit. Ringing is defined in MMC 406.

P-M MSN

Point to Multi-point MSN. This setting is used when the line uses the
MSN supplementary service. Ringing is defined in MMC 421.

2

3

DLSEND

BRI dial sending mode select.

ENBLOCK

Digits will be collected and sent in a single block similar to a Cellphone.

OVERLAP

Digits will be sent as they are dialled by the user.

CLIP TABLE

Used to select the Calling Party Number to send to the network. If
NONE, MMC405 TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER is sent to the network; otherwise, the Calling Party Number entry in MMC 323 corresponding with
the selected number is sent to the network.

4

NB TYPE

Used to select the type of the Calling Party Number to send to the network.

2-118

UNKNOWN

Unknown number

INT.NAT

International number

NATIONAL

National number

NETWORK

Network specific number

SUBSCRIB

Subscriber number

EXTEN

Local number

ABBREV

Abbreviated number

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

(continued)
No
5

Option
NB PLAN

Description
Used to select the type of the Calling Party Number Plan to send to the network.

UNKNOWN

Unknown numbering plan

ISDN

ISDN numbering plan(CCITT E.163-164)

DATA

Data numbering plan(CCITT X.121)

TELEX

Telex numbering plan(CCITT F.69)

NATIONAL

National standard numbering plan

PRIVATE

Private numbering plan

EXTEN

Local numbering plan

OPTIONS FOR BRI PORTS PROGRAMMED AS STATIONS
No

Option

0

ANY CHANNEL

Description
When this option is set to YES, the system will place calls on any free
channel of that BRI if the channel chosen by the user is busy.(e.g., Preferred channel selection) If set to NO, the user will receive a busy signal
if they attempt to access a busy channel even if the other channel on
that BRI is free.(e.g., Exclusive channel selection)

1

POWER FEED

This field determines if power to a BRI access will be supplied.(YES or
NO)

CONDITIONS
y

A BRI card must be installed in the system. Otherwise, the ‘NO BRI CARD’ message
is displayed.

y

If any changes are made in this MMC, the BRI card that is affected by these changes
MUST be restarted using MMC 418 in order for the changes to become effective.

DEFAULT DATA
For BRI Ports programmed as Trunks:
CHANNEL ANY: YES
BRI MODE: P-P DDI
DLSEND: OVERLAP
CLIP TABLE: NONE
NB TYPE: NATIONAL
NB PLAN: ISDN
For BRI Ports programmed as Stations:
CHANNEL ANY: YES
POWER FEED: NO
Samsung Business Communications

2-119

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 419.
Display shows first BRI channel.

[725] BRI-TRK
CHANNEL ANY:YES

2) Dial BRI trunk number.(e.g., 727)
OR
Press Volume button to select BRI trunk and
press Right Soft button.

[727] BRI-TRK
CHANNEL ANY:YES

3) Select option item.
OR
Press Volume button to select option item and
press Right Soft button.

[727] BRI-TRK
CHANNEL ANY:NO
[727] BRI-TRK
BRI MODE:P-M MSN
[727] BRI-TRK
DLSEND :OVERLAP
[727] BRI-TRK
CLIP TABLE :NONE
[727] BRI-TRK
NB TYPE:UNKNOWN

4) Select option.
OR
Press Volume button to select BRI station and
press Right Soft button.

[727] BRI-TRK
CLIP TABLE:1

5) Dial BRI station number.(e.g., 729)
OR
Press Volume button to select BRI station and
press Right Soft button.

[729] BRI-STN
CHANNEL ANY:YES

6) Select option item.
OR
Press Volume button to select BRI station and
press Right Soft button.

[729] BRI-STN
CHANNEL ANY:YES

7) Select option.
OR
Press Volume button to select option item and
press Right Soft button.

[729] BRI-STN
POWER FEED :YES

[729] BRI-STN
POWER FEED :NO

8) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

2-120

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 323
MMC 405
MMC 418
MMC 421
MMC 423
MMC 714

CALLING PARTY NUMBER
TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER
BRI & PRI CARD RESTART
MSN DIGIT
S/T MODE
DID NAME AND NUMBER TRANSLATION

Samsung Business Communications

2-121

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[420] PRI OPTIONS
This MMC allows the technician to program a PRI trunk card.
No

Option

0

CHANNEL ANY

Description
When this option is set to YES, the system will place calls on any free
channel of that PRI if the channel chosen by the user is busy. If set to
NO, they will receive a busy signal if they attempt to access a busy
channel even if the other channel on that PRI is free.

1

PRI MODE

PRI access mode select.

NORMAL

Point to Point NORMAL. This operates like a standard telephone line
with one CO number per channel and ring according to MMC 406.

DID

Point to Point Direct Inward Dial. This operates in a similar manner to an
analogue DID circuit with multiple CO numbers pointed to a single
channel and translated within the system(MMC714) to a single device.

2

3

DLSEND

PRI dial sending mode select.

ENBLOCK

Digits will be collected and sent in a single block similar to a cellphone.

OVERLAP

Digits will be sent as they are dialled by the user.

CLIP TABLE

Used to select the Calling Party Number to send to the network. If
NONE, MMC405 CO TRUNK NUMBER is sent to the network; otherwise, the Calling Party Number entry in MMC 323 corresponding with
the selected number is sent to the network.

4

NB TYPE

Used to select the type of the Calling Party Number to send to the network.

5

UNKNOWN

Unknown number

INT.NAT

International number

NATIONAL

National number

NETWORK

Network specific number

SUBSCRIB

Subscriber number

EXTEN

Local number

ABBREV

Abbreviated number

NB PLAN

Used to select the type of the Calling Party Number Plan to send to the
network.

6

UNKNOWN

Unknown numbering plan

ISDN

ISDN numbering plan(CCITT E.163-164)

DATA

Data numbering plan(CCITT X.121)

TELEX

Telex numbering plan(CCITT F.69)

NATIONAL

National standard numbering plan

PRIVATE

Private numbering plan

EXTEN

Local numbering plan

SAME CONNID

When this option is set to OFF, ISDN port is searched by CONN ID and
if set to ON, searched by data channel id.

2-122

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

CONDITIONS
y

Before setting the PRI program, the J2 jumper of the TEPRI or TEPRI2 card must be
set to ‘ON’ for PRI mode.

y

After changing this program, run MMC 418, BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART, to apply the new setting.

DEFAULT DATA
CHANNEL ANY: YES
PRI MODE: DDI
DLSEND: OVERLAP
CLIP TABLE: NONE
NB TYPE: NATIONAL
NB PLAN: ISDN

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 420.
Display shows:

[701] PRI OPTION

2) Dial first PRI trunk number in PRI card.(e.g., 730)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.

[730] PRI OPTION

3) Enter option number.
OR
Press Volume button to select option.

[730] PRI OPTION

4) Press Volume button to make selection.
Then press Right Soft button.

[730] PRI OPTION

CHANNEL ANY:YES

CHANNEL ANY:YES

PRI MODE:DDI

PRI MODE:NORMAL

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 323
MMC 405
MMC 418
MMC 714

CALLING PARTY NUMBER
TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER
BRI & PRI CARD RESTART
DID NAME AND NUMBER TRANSLATION

Samsung Business Communications

2-123

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[421] MSN DIGIT
Provides a method of assigning an incoming MSN call to a specific station. If any entry in
the MSN DIGIT TABLE matches an incoming call’s called party number, either the specific station is alerted, if it is programmed to accept the call, or the call is cleared if it is
programmed to reject the call.
If the incoming called party number does not have a matching entry in the MSN table,
MMC 406 ringing destination is alerted or the call is optionally released.
You can give each MSN number to a specific station and you can select the call waiting option: when a destination is busy, the incoming call must be cleared or camped-on to the station.(which is alerted to the call)

CONDITIONS
y

A BRI card must be installed in the system. Otherwise, the ‘NO BRI CARD’ message
is displayed.

y

For each BRI access, two adjacent ports are assigned. You need only change the value
for one of the two ports; the value for the other port will be changed automatically.

DEFAULT DATA
1-6: NONE
CW: YES
OPT: ACCEPT

ACTION

2-124

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 421.
Display shows:

[701] MSN DGT (1)

2) Enter trunk number.(e.g., 704)
OR
Press Volume button to scroll through ISDN
ports and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

[704] MSN DGT (1)

3) Enter the location 1-8.(e.g., 4)
OR
Press Volume button to select location and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

[704] MSN DGT (4)

4) Enter digits to be translated(e.g., 4603881) via
dial keypad and press Right Soft button to move
to the destination selection.(Max. Digit is 12)

[704] MSN DGT (4)

DGT:

DGT:

DGT:

DGT:4603881

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

5) Enter destinations for the six ring plans via the dial
keypad.(e.g., 204 for ring plan 1)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.

[704] MSN DGT (4)

6) Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.

[704] MSN DGT (4)

7) Enter 1 for ACCEPT or 0 for REJECT.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.

[704] MSN DGT (4)

1:204

2:NONE

CW:NO OPT:ACEPT

CW:NO OPT:ACEPT

8) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 423

S/T MODE

[422] TRUNK COS
Used to assign a class of service to each trunk for each of the six ring plans available.
There are 30 different classes of service that are defined in MMC 701, Assign COS Contents. Classes of service are numbered 01-30. Trunk COS applies on Tandem connections.

DEFAULT DATA
ALL RING PLANS: COS 01

ACTION
1) Press Transfer button and enter 422.
Display shows first trunk:

Samsung Business Communications

DISPLAY
[701] TRK COS
1:01 2:01 3:01

2-125

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 705)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through trunks.
Press Right Soft button to advance to step 3.
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through trunks and
press Left Soft button to advance to step 4.
OR
Select all trunks.

[705] TRK COS

3) Enter ring plan class of service.(e.g., 05)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Right Soft button to advance to
step 4.
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Left Soft button to return to step 2.

[705] TRK COS

4) Enter the next ring plan class of service.(e.g., 05)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Right Soft button to return to
step 2.
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through classes of service and press Left Soft button to return to the previous step.

[705] TRK COS

1:01 2:01 3:01

[ALL] TRK COS
1:01 2:01 3:01

1:05 2:01 3:01

1:05 2:05 03:01

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 701

2-126

ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[423] S/T MODE
Allows the technician to select whether a BRI circuit is a station port or a trunk port.
No

Type

Description

0

TRUNK

The BRI trunk port used for ISDN trunk.

1

STATION

The BRI trunk port used for ISDN phone.

CONDITIONS
The BRI card must be installed in the system, otherwise the message ‘NO BRI CARD’ is
displayed.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 423.
Display shows first BRI:

[725] S/T MODE

2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 727)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through BRI numbers
and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all.

[727] S/T MODE

3) Enter circuit type.(e.g., station).
OR
Press Volume button to select option and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

[727] S/T MODE

TRUNK

TRUNK

[ALL] S/T MODE
TRUNK

STATION

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 424
MMC 418
MMC 419
MMC 421

BRI S0 MAPPING
BRI AND PRI CARD RESTART
BRI OPTIONS
MSN DIGIT

Samsung Business Communications

2-127

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[424] BRI S0 MAPPING
This MMC assigns an ISDN terminal number to a BRI station port.

CONDITIONS
This function can be used only when the BRI card or BRM is installed in the system.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 424.
Display shows first terminal number:

[8701]S0 MAPPING

2) Dial terminal number.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection of terminal
numbers and press Right Soft button to advance
cursor.

[8704]S0 MAPPING

3) Dial BRI port number.
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through ports and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

[8704]S0 MAPPING

NONE

NONE

712

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 419
MMC 423

2-128

BRI OPTIONS
S/T MODE

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[425] CID TRUNKS
This MMC assigns a TRUNK number to a CID TRUNK.

CONDITIONS
This function can be used only when the TRM or trunk card is installed in the system.

DEFAULT DATA
NORMAL TRUNK

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 425.
Display shows first terminal number:

[701]CID TRUNKS

2) Enter trunk number.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection of trunk numbers and press Right Soft button to advance
cursor.
OR
Select all.

[702]CID TRUNKS

3) Enter trunk type.(e.g., CID TRUNK).
OR
Press Volume button to select option and
Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

[ALL] CID TRUNKS

NORMAL TRUNK

NORMAL TRUNK

[ALL] CID TRUNKS
NORMAL TRUNK

CID TRUNK

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

Samsung Business Communications

2-129

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[426] TRUNK GAIN CONTROL
Allows loss levels to be adjusted on a per-trunk basis. There are two adjustments available
in this MMC: ‘TX’ is the transmission level adjustment of the trunk to the station. ‘RX’ is
the receiving level adjustment of the station to the trunk.
There are four types of adjustment:
No

Trunk Gain

Description

0

+0.0

No adjustment

1

+1.9

Up 1.9 dB

2

-6.0

Down 6.0 dB

3

-2.5

Down 2.5 dB

DEFAULT DATA
TX: +0.0
RX: +0.0

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 426.
Display shows:

[701] TRUNK GAIN

2) Enter desired trunk number.(e.g., 705)
via the dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all.

[705] TRUNK GAIN

3) Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

[705] TRUNK GAIN

4) Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor and
return to step 1.

[701] TRUNK GAIN

RX:+0.0 TX:+0.0

RX:+0.0 TX:+0.0

[ALL] TRUNK GAIN
RX:+0.0 TX:+0.0

RX:+0.0 TX:+0.0

RX:+0.0 TX:-2.5

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-130

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[428] ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE
This MMC is used to allow or restrict trunks from making outgoing calls to other trunks
within the same system. By default(DIAL=YES) all trunks can use other trunks. To prevent
use, select NO.

DEFAULT DATA
DIAL: YES

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 428.
Display shows:

(301) USE (301)

2) Dial the trunk use group number.(e.g., 305)
OR
Press Volume button to selection and press
Right Soft button.
OR
Select all trunk use groups.

(305) USE (301)

3) Dial the trunk use group number.(e.g., 304)
OR
Press Volume button to selection and press Right
Soft button.

(305) USE (304)

4) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.
OR
Press Volume button to select YES/NO and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

(305) USE (304)

DIAL:YES

DIAL:YES

(ALL) USE (301)
DIAL:YES

DIAL:YES

DIAL:NO

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 614

STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP

Samsung Business Communications

2-131

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[432] SET H-TRK
This MMC is used to select the type of signalling for each H- trunk. There are three operation types available.(E & M, DID, R/D)

DEFAULT DATA
E&M

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 432.
Display shows:

[701] SET H-TRK

2) Enter desired trunk number.(e.g., 705)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection.
Press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all trunks.

[705] SET H-TRK

3) Press Volume button to select trunk type and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

[705] SET H-TRK

E&M

E&M

[ALL] SET H-TRK
E&M

DID

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-132

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[433] COST RATE
In this MMC, the TRUNK COST RATE flags are entered for each trunk. DIAL PLANs are
defined in MMC 746(Costing Dial Plan). RATE CALCULATION TABLES are defined in
MMC 749. Each trunk may be defined with up to eight cost rates. Enter one or more of the
eight COST RATES per trunk. If an entry is left blank, no call costing will be calculated for
that particular DIAL PLAN.
Call type 8 is fixed for incoming calls. Select cost rate type 8 only if you want incoming
call costing for a trunk.

DEFAULT DATA
ALL TRUNKS/ALL DIAL PLANS: ALL COST RATES ASSIGNED

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 433.
Display shows trunk number and Cost Rate
table numbers:

[701] :12345678

2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 705)
OR
Press Volume button to select trunk and press Right
Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all.

[705] :12345678

3) Press Volume button to move cursor along the line until
the cursor is under the Cost Rate number.(e.g., 2)
Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press Right Soft
button to return to step 1.
OR

[701] :12345678

CR

CR

CR

:11111111

:11111111

:10111111

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 746
MMC 747

COSTING DIAL PLAN
RATE CALCULATION TABLE

Samsung Business Communications

2-133

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[434] CONNECTION STATUS
This read-only MMC will confirm the connection status of stations or trunks. Display
status displays the status of a station or trunk at the time requested. If a conference is in
progress with the selected trunk or station, the display will show one of the conference parties and an arrow(Æ). The technician or system administrator can then display the other
parties in the conference. If a station or trunk is in an idle state, the display will show
‘IDLE’. If the station or trunk selected is not a valid selection, the display will show ‘INVALID DATA’. If the station or trunk is made busy by the CPU, the display will show
‘MADE BUSY’. If the station is in busy state with no other connection, the display will
show ‘BUSY’ only.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

Display trunk connection status
1) Press Transfer button and enter 434.

DISPLAY STATUS
201 IDLE

2) Enter station or trunk number.
Display show connection status:

DISPLAY STATUS

3) Enter another station or trunk.
OR
Press Transfer button to exit.

DISPLAY STATUS

702 227

702 227

Display station connection status
1) Press Transfer button and enter 434.

DISPLAY STATUS
201 IDLE

2-134

2) Enter station or trunk number.
Display show connection status.

DISPLAY STATUS

3) Enter another station or trunk.
OR
Press Transfer button to exit.

DISPLAY STATUS

235 715

235 715

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Display trunk status in conference
1) Press Transfer button and enter 434.

DISPLAY STATUS
201 IDLE

2) Enter station or trunk number.
Display shows connection status:

DISPLAY STATUS

3) Press Right Soft button to display the next
station or trunks involved.

DISPLAY STATUS

4) Enter another station or trunk.
OR
Press Transfer button to exit.

DISPLAY STATUS

702 227 ,215 Æ

702 216

Æ

216 702 ,227 Æ

Display status no connection
1) Press Transfer button and enter 434.

DISPLAY STATUS
201 IDLE

2) Enter station or trunk number.
Display show connection status.

DISPLAY STATUS

3) Enter another station or trunk.
OR
Press Transfer button to exit.

DISPLAY STATUS

702 NONE

702 NONE

Display status no connection
1) Press Transfer button and enter 434.

DISPLAY STATUS
201 IDLE

2) Enter invalid station or trunk number.
Display show INVALID DATA:

DISPLAY STATUS

3) Enter another station or trunk.
OR
Press Transfer button to exit.

DISPLAY STATUS

Samsung Business Communications

INVALID DATA

201 IDLE

2-135

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

Display connection status with invalid trunk
or station number
1) Press Transfer button and enter 434.

DISPLAY STATUS
201 IDLE

2) Enter invalid station or trunk number
Display show INVALID DATA:

DISPLAY STATUS

3) Enter another station or trunk.
OR
Press Transfer button to exit.

DISPLAY STATUS

INVALID DATA

201 IDLE

Display connection status with trunk or station number in maintenance busy
1) Press Transfer button and enter 434.

DISPLAY STATUS
201 IDLE

2) Enter station or trunk number.
Display show connection status:

DISPLAY STATUS

3) Enter another station or trunk.
OR
Press Transfer button to exit.

DISPLAY STATUS

725 MADE BUSY

725 MADE BUSY

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 108
MMC 409

2-136

STATION STATUS
TRUNK STATUS READ

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[436] TRUNK TMC GAIN
Allows loss levels of TMC for analogue trunks to be adjusted on a per-trunk basis. There
are two adjustments available in this MMC: ‘TX’ is the transmission level adjustment of
the trunk to the station. ‘RX’ is the receiving level adjustment of the station to the trunk.

DEFAULT DATA
TX: +0 dB
RX: +0 dB

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 436.
Display shows:

[701] TMC GAIN

2) Enter desired trunk number.(e.g., 705) via the
dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all.

[705] TMC GAIN

3) Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

[705] TMC GAIN

4) Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor and
return to step 2.

[701] TMC GAIN

RX:+0 dB TX:+0 dB

RX:+0 dB TX:+0 dB

[ALL] TMC GAIN
RX:+0 dB TX:+0 dB

RX:+0 dB TX:+0 dB

RX:+0 dB TX:-2 dB

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-137

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[437] 16TRK GAIN CONTROL
Allows gain levels to be adjusted on a per-trunk basis. There are two adjustments available
in this MMC: ‘TX’ is the transmission level adjustment of the trunk to the station. ‘RX’ is
the receiving level adjustment of the station to the trunk.

CONDITIONS
This function can be used only when the TRM or trunk card is installed in the system.

DEFAULT DATA
TX: 3
RX: 3

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 437.
Display shows:

[701] TRK TYPE:3

2) Enter desired trunk number.(e.g., 705)
via the dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all.

[701] TRK TYPE:3

3) Press Volume button to select trunk type (1~4) and
press Right Soft button to move cursor. (e.g. 4)

[ALL] TRK TYPE:4

4) Press Volume button to select RX value(1~6) and
press Right Soft button to move cursor (e.g. 1)

[ALL] TRK TYPE:4

5) Press Volume button to select TX value(1~6) and
press Right Soft button to move cursor (e.g. 5)

[ALL] TRK TYPE:4

RX:3

RX:3

TX:3

TX:3

[ALL] TRK TYPE:3
RX:3

RX:3

RX:1

RX:1

TX:3

TX:3

TX:3

TX:5

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-138

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[500] SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS
Used to set the values of the system counters. The counters are listed below with a brief description of each.
No
0

Counter
ALARM REM.

Default
5

CNTER
1

AUTO RDL

Description
The number of times that an alarm reminder will
ring a station before cancelling. RANGE = 1-99.

5

COUNTER

The number of times the system will redial an outside number after the auto redial feature has been
activated. RANGE = 1-99.

2

DISA CALL CNTER

99

Sets the maximum number of intercom calls that
can be made after accessing a DISA line.
RANGE = 1-99.

3

DISA LOCK CNTER

3

Number of attempts the system will allow to incorrectly access a DISA line before locking out the
DISA line. RANGE = -99

4

NEW CALL

99

COUNTER

Number of times the system will allow a user to
signal New Call on a Trunk line during one call.
RANGE = 1-99.

5

UCDS VISUAL

0

ALARM

Used to set the Visual alarm threshold. It is triggered when the number of calls waiting to be answered in the UCD group reaches this value.
RANGE = 0-25.

6

UCDS AUDIO ALARM

0

Used to set the Audio alarm threshold. It is triggered when the number of calls waiting to be answered in the UCD group reaches this value.
RANGE = 0-25.

7

UCD CS LEVEL 1

0

Provides call wait indication level 1 if number of
calls waiting to be answered in UCD group reaches
this value. RANGE = 0-25.

8

UCD CS LEVEL 2

0

Provides call wait indication level 2 if number of
calls waiting to be answered in UCD group reaches
this value. RANGE = 0-25.

DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION

Samsung Business Communications

2-139

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 500.
Display shows:

ALARM REM.CNTER

2) Enter number from above list.(e.g., 6)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

UCDS AUDIO ALARM

3) Enter in new value via dial keypad.
If entry is valid, system will return to step 2.

UCDS AUDIO ALARM

05Æ

00Æ

00Æ02

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-140

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[501] SYSTEM TIMERS
Allows the technician to adjust individual timers as necessary.

TIMER TABLE
Timer Name
ALARM TIME

Default

Range Unit

Description

100

0-2500 MIN

This is the time the system alarm key will start
ringing after the alarm key has been silenced.

ALERT TONE TIME

1000

100-2500

This timer sets the duration of the attention

MSEC

tone preceding a call to a phone in the Voice
Announce or Auto Answer mode. This tone
will also precede a forced Auto Answer call.

ALM REM.INTERVAL

25

1-250 SEC

This timer controls the time between ring attempts at a station when alarm reminder is
set.

ALM REM RING OFF

10

1-25 SEC

This timer controls the length of the ring cycle
duration when an alarm reminder is set at a
station.

ATT. RECALL TIME

30

0-250 SEC

This controls how long a transfer recall will
ring at a station before recalling the operator.

AUTO REDIAL INT.

30

1-250 SEC

This timer controls the time between attempts
after RETRY dialling is set on a station.

AUTO REDIAL RLS.

45

1-250 SEC

This timer controls the duration of a Ring No
Answer condition on a retry number dialled
before the auto redial is automatically cancelled.

BOOTH TIME OUT

005

0-250 MIN

(Hotel application only)
CALLBACK NO ANS

Controls the time for which a booth phone is
enabled.

30

1-250 SEC

This timer controls the time before the callback is automatically cancelled when a callback detects Ring No Answer.

CAMP ON RECALL

30

0-250 SEC

This timer controls the time a camped-on call
will stay at a destination before recalling to the
transferring station.

CID MSG RECEIVE

6

1-25 SEC

The amount of time that the system will allow
a valid message from the analogue CID trunk.

CLI DISPLAY TIME

5

1-25 SEC

The amount of time that the Caller ID information remains on the phone’s display.

CO CLEAR TIME

30

0-250 SEC

The length of time a Direct Trunk Select key
remains busy after cleardown.

Samsung Business Communications

2-141

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

(continued)
Timer Name
CO CONFIRM TIME

Default
3

Range Unit
0-250 MIN

Description
According to MMC 314 CO CONFIRM type,
the outgoing call will be disconnected after
this timer expires or the outgoing caller will
hear the confirm tone.

CO-CO DISCONNECT

20

1-250 MIN

This timer monitors the duration of an unsupervised conference; when it expires, both
trunks are disconnected.

CONFIRM TONE TM
CRD TONE INT TM

1000
30

100-2500

The tone heard when a feature is activated or

MSEC

deactivated.

0-250 SEC

This is the call record tone interval time. An entry
other than zero will cause a tone to be heard by
all the parties in a recorded conversation. The
range for the tone is 001(every second) to 255
(every 255 seconds). A value of 000 means no
tone. Requires an SVMi card.

DIAL PASS TIME

3

0-25 SEC

This timer monitors the time before connecting the transmit of the phone to the trunk side
of an outgoing call.

DISA DISCONNECT

30

1-250 MIN

This timer controls the maximum duration of a
DISA call.

DISA LOCK OUT TM

30

1-250 MIN

This timer controls how long a DISA call is not
allowed to be made after the DISA error
counter has expired(MMC 500).

DISA NOANS DISC.

30

0-250 SEC

This timer determines when a DISA call is
disconnected by force when a called party
does not answer.

DISA PASS CHECK

30

1-250 MIN

This timer defines the period before the system clears the incorrect passcode counter.

DISA NO ACTION

10

0-250 SEC

This timer controls how long a DISA line will
wait for further action from the caller.

DISPLAY DELAY TM

2

1-250 SEC

This timer controls how long a display is
shown in the LCD and how long error tone is
heard.

DOOR LOCK RELES.
DOOR RING DETECT
DOOR RING OFF TM

500
50
30

100-2500

This timer controls how long the door lock

MSEC

relay will be activated.

10-250

This timer controls the time before a call is

MSEC

answered by the door phone.

1-250 SEC

This timer controls the duration of ringing at
the door ring destination before automatically
cancelling.

E-HOLD RECALL TM

45

0-250 SEC

This timer controls how long a call is held exclusively at a station before recalling.

2-142

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

(continued)
Timer Name
FIRST DIGIT TIME

Default
10

Range Unit
1-250 SEC

Description
This timer controls how long the system will
wait for dialling to begin before dropping the
dial tone and returning the you to error tone.

HOK FLASH MAX TM

120

20-2500

This timer monitors the duration of a hook-

MSEC

switch flash to ensure that the flash is valid
and not a line noise or an accidental hookswitch bounce LONGEST duration.

HOK FLASH MIN TM

80

20-2500

This timer monitors the duration of a hook-

MSEC

switch flash to ensure that the flash is valid
and not a line noise or an accidental hookswitch bounce SHORTEST duration.

HOOK OFF TIME
HOOK ON TIME
INQUIRY RELEASE

100
200
30

20-2500

This timer controls the time before dial tone is

MSEC

sent to a single line station.

20-2500

This timer sets the minimum amount of time that

MSEC

the system will recognize as an SLT hang up.

1-250 SEC

This timer monitors the duration of the interaction of the Soft button to determine when to
return the LCD back to a normal status. This
timer affects only display phones.

INTER DIGIT TIME

10

1-250 SEC

This timer controls the grace period between
dialling valid digits before dropping the call
and returning you back to error tone.

ISDN INT DGT TM

7

1-15 SEC

This timer controls the grace period between
dialling valid digits and the end of the dialling
string on an ISDN call.

KMMC LOCK OUT TM

30

10-50 SEC

This timer controls the grace period between
programming actions while in a programming
session. The timer automatically returns the system to secure programming status.

LCR ADVANCE TIME

5

1-250 SEC

This timer controls the time before selecting
the next allowable route when a station is
allowed to route advance.

LCR INTER DIGIT

5

1-250 SEC

This timer controls the grace period between
dialling valid digits before accessing a trunk.

LONG KEY DETECT
LONG KEY REPEAT
MCL DELAY TIME

600
300
4

0-2500

This timer controls the time a key must be held

MSEC

down before the key press is repeated.

0-2500

This timer controls the time between repeated

MSEC

digits on a long key press.

0-9 SEC

This timer controls the time when the system
should start transmitting Authorisation Code
after sending MCL access code(Cable& Wireless 131 access). Available in UK only.

Samsung Business Communications

2-143

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

(continued)
Timer Name
MS LED ON TIME

Default
5

Range Unit
1-10 SEC

Description
This timer controls the duration a Manual Signalling key will remain on after use.

OFF HOOK RING INT

15

1-250 SEC

This timer controls the time between ring
bursts to a user who has a camped-on call.

OHVA ANSWER TIME

10

1-250 SEC

This timer controls the time allowed to answer
an OHVA call before automatic rejection.

PAGE TIME OUT

20

1-250 SEC

This timer controls the duration of a page announcement.

PAGE TONE TIME

500

100-2500

This timer controls the duration of tone burst

MSEC

heard over the page prior to the page announcement.

PARK RECALL TIME

45

0-250 SEC

This timer controls how long a call is parked
before recalling to the call park originator.

AP-MMC LOCK TIME

5

1-60 MIN

This timer monitors the PCMMC activity,
drops the link if no action is created by
PCMMC and returns the system back to secure program status.

PERI UCD REPORT

5

3-99 SEC

This timer determines the interval between
periodic UCD reports provided to an SIO port.

POWER DOWN TIME
RECALL

2000
2

500-9900

This timer monitors the power to the ROM

MSEC

pack to begin shutdown status.

1-250 MIN

This is the time an attendant recall will ring

DISCONNECT
RECALL WAIT TIME

before being disconnected.
15

0-250 SEC

This is the time any recall(hold or transfer)
continues to recall at your station before it
recalls to the operator.

ROUTE OPTIMISE

5

0-250 SEC

When a call is made via Q-SIG signalling,
route optimization is activated after this time.

SMDR START /DP

30

1-250 SEC

This grace period timer starts SMDR recording for rotary dialing.

SMDR START /DTMF

15

1-250 SEC

This grace period timer starts SMDR recording
for touchtone dialling. This timer also controls
the LCD duration timer on the phones. The duration time displayed and the SMDR time duration will be the same.

SYS HOLD RECALL

45

0-250 SEC

This timer determines the time calls can be
left on hold before recalling to the holding
station. This is a system-wide timer. Setting
the timer to 000 means that no recalling will
take place.

2-144

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

(continued)
Timer Name
TRANSFER RECALL

Default
20

Range Unit
0-250 SEC

Description
This timer determines how long transferred
calls ring before recalling. This is a systemwide timer.

TRK AUTOMOH DISC

60

1-250 SEC

When set to ON, incoming trunk calls are
connected to MOH automatically after the
DISA ANSWR timer(MMC 503) expires. In
this case the caller hears MOH. If the TRK
AUTOMOH DISC timer expires before the
call is answered, the call is disconnected.

TSW CONN. DELAY

0

0-10 SEC

When an incoming trunk makes an outgoing
call to another trunk, the system connects the
voice path after this time.

UCDS AUDIO ALARM

0

0-990 SEC

When an SVMi-20 card is installed and the digital
UCD package enabled, this counter determines
the maximum number of seconds a call has
been waiting at the UCD group before the UCD
group’s SUPV key begins to flash along with an
audio alarm. For more UCD alarm conditions,
see MMC 500.

UCDS VISUAL ALARM

0

0-250 SEC

When an SVMi-20 card is installed and the
digital UCD package enabled, this counter
determines the maximum number of seconds
a call at the UCD group before the UCD
group’s SUPV key begins to flash as an
alarm. For more UCD alarm conditions, see
MMC 500.

VOIP RE-ROUTE TM

15

0-25 SEC

If an outgoing call made via a VoIP trunk
does not receive an acknowledgement message from the called party within this time,
the call is treated as failed.

When timers value is ‘0’
Some timers are disabled when their value is set to ‘0’.

DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
SOME TIMERS DEPEND ON COUNTRY

Samsung Business Communications

2-145

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 501.
Display shows first timer value:

AA INT DGT TIME

2) Press Volume button to select timer and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

KMMC LOCK OUT TM

3) Enter new value using keypad; if valid, system
returns to step 2 with new value.

KMMC LOCK OUT TM

05 SECÆ

060 SECÆ

060 SECÆ250

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-146

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[502] STATION-WIDE TIMERS
Allows certain station timer values to be changed on a per-station basis or for all stations.
No

Item

0

NO ANS FWD

Description
This timer controls how long the station will ring before Forward on No
Answer takes place.(1-250 sec)

1

DTMF DUR.

This timer governs the duration of DTMF digits which are transmitted to
an external VMS system port. This can be used when a VMS system fails
to recognise the default DTMF digit duration being transmitted from the
SLT port.(100-9900 ms)

2

F-DGT DELY

This timer will be valuable for the system administrator to insert a suitable
delay before generating DTMF digits for In-Band integration.(1009900 ms)

3

OFFHK SEL.

This timer controls the grace period before placing an internal/external call
as programmed in MMC 306.(0-250 sec)

4

EFWD DELAY

This timer controls the External Call Forward feature which will allow a
station to ring before the call is placed on external call forwarding.
(1-250 sec)

5

CC RNG DLY

If a station does not answer an incoming call within this time, other stations with a CC key for that station will ring.

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
NO ANS FWD: 015 SEC
DTMF DUR: 100 MSEC
F-DGT DELY: 600 MSEC
OFFHK SEL: 008 SEC
EFWD DELAY: 010 SEC
CC RNG DLY: 010 SEC

Samsung Business Communications

2-147

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 502.
Display shows:

[201] NO ANS FWD

2) Dial station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and
press Right Soft button.
OR
Select all stations and press Right Soft button.

[205] NO ANS FWD

015 SECÆ

015 SECÆ_

[ALL] NO ANS FWD
015 SECÆ_

3) Enter new value(must be three digits) via
dial keypad.(e.g., 020)
System will return to step 2.

[205] NO ANS FWD

4) Dial timer number from above list.(e.g., 1)
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

[205] DTMF DUR.

5) Enter new timer value.(must be four digits, e.g.,
0200)
System returns to step 2.

[205] DTMP DUR.

015 SECÆ020

0100 MS Æ_

0100 MS Æ0200

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 102
MMC 306

2-148

CALL FORWARD
HOT LINE/OFF HOOK SELECTION

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[503] TRUNK-WIDE TIMERS
Allows certain trunk timer values to be changed on a per-trunk basis or for all trunks.
No

Item

Description

Range

00

ANS.BAK TM

ANSWER BACK TIME. This timer is used for certain
types of E & M signalling and does not affect normal
CO lines.

0-2500 MSEC

01

CLEARING

This timer ensures that a call is fully disconnected at
the CO by preventing CO access outgoing or receiving incoming ring between a disconnect and the
expiration of this timer.

100-9900 MSEC

02

CO SUPV TM

CO SUPERVISION TIME. this is the minimum
length of loop open disconnect received from the
CO that will be seen as a valid hang up on the system.

10-2500 MSEC

03

DTMF DUR.

DTMF DURATION. This is the length of the DTMF
digits that will be sent to the CO on this line.

100-9900 MSEC

04

F-DGT DELY

First-DIGIT DELAY. This is the length of time the
system will wait for CO line conditions to stabilize
after seizure before sending DTMF digits.

100-9900 MSEC

05

FLASH TIME

This is the duration of the momentary open sent on
a circuit when FLASH key is pressed.

20-2500 MSEC

06

NO RING TM

This is the length of time the system will wait after
detecting a ring burst on a line before deciding the
call has disconnected.

1-25 SEC

07

PAUSE TIME

This is the length of time the system will wait before
sending the next digit for a pause in a speed dial
bin.

1-25 SEC

08

PRS DET TM

This means the duration of PRS signal pulse. If the
PRS signal is reversed when opposite party is answered and maintain the status before the opposite
party disconnect the call, the PRS DET TM must be
set to 0.

0-2500 MSEC

09

RNG DET TM

RING DETECT TIME. This is the minimum length of
ring signal the system will regard as a valid ring.

10-2500 MSEC

10

WINK TIME

This is the duration of the acknowledgment signal
that the system will send on an E&M circuit

100-300 MSEC

11

MF/DP INT

This is the interval between sending digit. In case of
DTMF signal, over the 500ms will be serviced as
100 ms.

100-9900 MSEC

12

MFR DLY TM

This is a delay time to allocate the MFR after incoming trunk is detected. This is to prevent the wrong
detection of DTMF signal by noise.

0-25 SEC

Samsung Business Communications

2-149

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

(continued)
No

Item

Description

Range

13

DISA ANSWR

This is a delay time to answer the DISA trunk call or
to answer the trunk when TRK AUTO ANSWER is
set to ON(MMC400).

0-9 SEC

14

CONN DELAY

This is the delay time to connect a voice path when
users make outgoing calls via a loop trunk. This is to
prevent users hearing noise when the loop trunk is
seized.

0-2500 MSEC

DEFAULT DATA
ANS.BAK TM: 0600 MSEC
CLEARING: 2000 MSEC
CO SUPV TM: 0400 MSEC
DTMF DUR.: 0100 MSEC
F-DGT DELY: 0600 MSEC
FLASH TIME: 0090 MSEC
NO RING TM: 04 SEC
PAUSE TIME: 03 SEC
PRS DET TM: 0000 MSEC
RNG DET TM: 0300 MSEC
WINK TIME: 200 MSEC
MF/DP INT: 0800 MSEC
MFR DLY TIME: 00 SEC
DISA ANSWR: 01 SEC
CONN DELAY: 0000 MSEC

ACTION

2-150

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 503.
Display shows:

[701] ANS.BAK TM

2) Dial trunk number.(e.g., 704)
OR
Press Volume button to select trunk and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all trunks.

[704] ANS.BAK TM

3) Dial timer number from the list.
OR
Press Volume button to select timer and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

[704] DTMF DUR.

4) Enter new timer value.(must be four digits, e.g., 0200)
System returns to step 2.

[704] DTMF DUR.

0600 MS Æ

0600 MS Æ

[ALL] ANS.BAK TM
0600 MS Æ_

0100 MS Æ_

0100 MS Æ 0200

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-151

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[504] PULSE MAKE/BREAK RATIO
Allows the ability to change the value of pulses per second and the duration of the
make/break time. This will only affect rotary dial trunks.
No

Item

Description

0

MAKE/BREAK RATIO

Make/Break ratio of dial pulse(01-99)

1

PULSE PER SECOND

Number of dial pulses per second(10 or 20)

DEFAULT DATA
MAKE/BREAK: 33 MAKE
PULSES PER SECOND: 10 PPS

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 504.
Display shows:

MAKE/BREAK RATIO

2) Dial 0 or 1 for option.
OR
Press Volume button for selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

PULSE PER SECOND

3) Dial new value.
System returns to step 2.

PULSE PER SECOND

33 MAKE Æ

10 PPS Æ_

10 PPS Æ 20

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 402

2-152

TRUNK DIAL TYPE

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[505] ASSIGN DATE AND TIME
Allows the system date and time to be set. This will set the system-wide clock.
Type

Description

Range

YY

Year

00-99

MM

Month

01-12

DD

Date

01-31

W

Day

0-6(0: SUN, 1: MON, 2: TUE, 3: WED, 4: THU, 5: FRI, 6: SAT)

HH

Hour

00-23

MM

Minute

00-59

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 505.
Display shows:

OLD:0111095:0901

2) Enter new time and date using above table.
System returns to step 2.

OLD:0111095:0901

3) Verify time and date.
Re-enter if necessary.

OLD:0111121:1445

NEW:YYMMDDW:HHMM

NEW:0111121:1445

NEW:YYMMDDW:HHMM

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 861

SYSTEM OPTIONS(AUTO UPDATE TIME)

Samsung Business Communications

2-153

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[506] TONE CADENCE
Provides the ability to customize the tone cadence on a system-wide basis. The system provides 11 types of tone and three types of tone provided from Central Office or a PBX system can be detected.

When changing the MMC [506]
MMC [506] should not be changed from the default levels without the assistance
of the local SAMSUNG distributor.

No

Item

Description

00

BUSY TONE

The called station is busy.

01

CONFM/BARGE

A feature has been successfully activated/cleared or a Barge-In with
Tone has been performed.

02

DIAL TONE

The system is ready to interpret key presses/dialled digits.

03

DND/NO MORE

The called station is in DND or has no free CALL buttons.

04

ERROR TONE

An error has been made.

05

HOLD/CAMPON

This is the system generated hold tone.

06

MSGWAT TONE

This is the tone heard at an SLT with a message waiting.

07

RGBACK TONE

The called station is ringing.

08

RING TONE

This is the tone heard from a ROP device or Loud Bell when these devices are called.

09

TRANSFER

This is the tone heard when the transfer button is pressed or an SLT

TONE

hook flashes.

10

DID RNGBACK

This is the tone heard by the outside party when they dial a DID number.

11

CO BUSY

This is used to detect the busy tone provided from Central Office or a PBX
system.

12

CO RINGBACK

This is used to detect the ring back tone provided from Central Office or
PBX system.

13

CO DIAL

This is used to detect the dial tone provided from Central Office or PBX
system.

DEFAULT DATA
(unit: milliseconds)
TONE

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

BUSY TONE

500

500

500

500

CONFIRM/BARGE-IN

200

200

200

5000

DIAL TONE

2-154

CONTINUOUS

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

(unit: milliseconds)
TONE

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

DND/NO MORE TONE

250

250

250

250

ERROR TONE

500

500

500

500

HOLD/CAMP-ON TONE

500

3500

500

3500

MESSAGE WAIT TONE

1000

250

1000

250

RING BACK TONE

400

200

400

2000

RING TONE

1000

3000

1000

3000

100

100

100

100

1000

3000

1000

3000

CO BUSY TONE

350

350

350

350

CO RINGBACK TONE

400

200

400

2000

TRANSFER TONE
DID RINGBACK TONE

CO DIAL TONE

ACTION
1) Press Transfer button and enter 506.
Display shows:

CONTINUOUS

DISPLAY
BUSY TONE
INTERRUPT TONE

TRANSFER TONE
2) Dial tone number from above list.(00-13, e.g., 09)
INTERRUPT TONE
OR
Press Volume button to select tone, press Left Soft
button and advance to step 3.
TRANSFER TONE
3) Dial tone option 0 for CONTINUOUS or 1 for ININTERRUPT TONE
TERRUPT.
OR
Press Volume button to select tone control and press
Right Soft button to advance step 4.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.

4) Dial new value for interrupt times.
(must be four digits)
Press Right Soft button advances cursor and
press Left Soft button retreats cursor.
If valid entry, system returns to step 2.

TRANSFER TONE:0100
9900 0100 9900

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-155

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[507] ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME
Use this MMC to program Ring Plans time settings. Ring Plans provide six separate ringing destinations based on day of the week and time of day. The start time within a plan is
the time the system will switch from one ringing destination to the next. The end time is the
time the system will switch from that plan to the previous plan.
An RPO(Ring Plan Override) button is not needed as the system will switch automatically;
however, it is helpful to have a dedicated button so the status can be manually changed if
needed. If a ring plan has no time entry the ring plan defaults to ring plan 1. The ring plans
correlate with all MMCs that program ring or termination destinations and station and
trunk COS.
The following example may be useful when assigning ring plan times:
RING PLAN

Start Time

End Time

(MON: 1)

ST: 0000

END: 23:59

(MON: 2)

ST: 0800

END: 2200

(MON: 3)

ST: 1000

END: 2000

(MON: 4)

ST: 1200

END: 1800

(MON: 5)

ST: 1300

END: 1600

(MON: 6)

ST: 1400

END: 1500

Using a 24-hour clock in the example above, notice that the END time is within the same
24-hour period as the START time. The system will stay in the last active Ring Plan from
the previous day until the end time which is 23:59. Monday starts Ring Plan 1 at 00:00.
The system will stay in Ring Plan 1 until Ring Plan 2 starts(08:00) and will stay in Ring
Plan 2 until Ring Plan 3 starts(10:00), and so on. As each ring Plan start it will override the
previous Ring Plan.
If a Ring Plan expires and there are no additional Ring Plans set, the system will default to
the Ring Plan with a time that extends past the expired Ring Plan time.

CONDITIONS

2-156

y

When using a Samsung built-in Voice Mail card that only has day/night mode, the
day/night must be set for each RING PLAN in MMC 758, VM DAY/NIGHT.

y

Ring Plans must be programmed in sequence.(RP 1, 2, 3, 4, etc.) A Ring Plan cannot
be omitted.(i.e. you cannot program RP 1, 2, 5, etc.)

y

A higher numbered Ring Plan cannot have a START time which begins before a lower
numbered Ring Plan.

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Ring Plan 1
Ring Plan 1 is the default Ring Plan for each day. If no Ring Plan destination is
entered, the operator group is the default destination.

DEFAULT DATA
START: NONE
END: NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 507.
Display shows:

RING PLAN (SUN:1)

2) Dial day number.(0-6, e.g., 3 for Weds)
OR
Press Volume button to select day.
Press Right Soft button to advance cursor to step 3.

RING PLAN (WED:1)

3) Dial ring plan number.(1-6, e.g., 2)
OR
Press Volume button to select day.
Press Right Soft button to advance cursor to step 4.

RING PLAN (WED:2)

4) Dial start time.(e.g., 1030)
If valid, cursor moves to end time.
Enter end time.
If valid, system returns to step 2.
Begin again.

RING PLAN (WED:1)

ST:

ST:

ST:_

END:

END:

END:

ST:1030 END:1800

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 722
MMC 723

STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING

Samsung Business Communications

2-157

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[508] CALL COST
Set the Call Cost attributes generated by the system during a call. This information can be
displayed on the phone during a call or as an SMDR record.
No

Display

0

UNIT COST PER MP

Description
When the system is installed to receive metering pulses
on a C. O. outgoing call. It is used for generating total call
cost by multiplying it by the number of pulses. Allows a
maximum value of 9999.(Currency is PENCE or ECENTS
depending on USE EURO option setting in MMC 210.)

1

CALL COST RATE

This generates additional call cost calculated by multiplying this rate by the original call cost. Ranges from 100 to
255.

CALL COST
Changing this value when there is a call in progress may result in an inaccurate
call cost. This MPD facility requires the Meter Pulse Detection version of the trunk
card.

DEFAULT DATA
UNIT COST PER MP: 0200 PENCE, CALL COST RATE: 100 PERCENT

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 508.
Display shows:

UNIT COST PER MP

2) Dial 0 or 1.
OR
Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft
button to move cursor.

CALL COST RATE

3) Enter new value.(e.g., 110)
System returns to step 2.

CALL COST RATE

0200 PENCE ™

100 % ™

110 % ™

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 110

2-158

STATION ON/OFF(CALL COST OPTION)

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[510] SLI RING CADENCE
Provides the ability to customize the ring cadence for single line ports on a system-wide
basis. There are five cadences available.

When changing the MMC [510]
MMC [510] should not be changed from the default levels without the assistance
of the local SAMSUNG distributor.

No

Item

Description

1

STN RING

This is the cadence intercom calls will ring at.

2

TRK RING

This is the cadence trunk calls will ring at.

3

DOOR RING

This is the cadence door phone calls will ring at.

4

ALM RING

This is the cadence alarm reminder calls will ring at.

5

CBK RING

This is the cadence callbacks will ring at.

DEFAULT DATA
(unit: milliseconds)
Item

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

STN RING

1000

3000

1000

3000

TRK RING

0400

0200

0400

2000

DOOR RING

0400

0100

0400

2000

ALM RING

0400

0200

0400

3000

CBK RING

1000

4000

1000

4000

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 510.
Display shows:

1:STN RING :0400

2) Dial cadence number from above list.(e.g., 3)
OR
Press Volume button to select
Press Left Soft button and advance to step 3.

3:DOOR RING:0400

3) Dial new value for interrupt times.
(must be four digits)
Press Right Soft button to advance cursor.
Press Left Soft button to retreat cursor.
If valid entry, system returns to step 2.

3:DOOR RING:0100

Samsung Business Communications

0200 0400 3000

0100 0400 2000

9900 0100 9900

2-159

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-160

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[511] MSG WAITING LAMP CADENCE
This MMC defines the cadence(flash rate) of single line telephone message waiting lamps
on phones connected to systems with an MWSLI card. There are two choices for the MW
lamp cadence: continuous and interrupted.
No

Item

0

INTERRUPTED

Description
The MW lamp will flash at a rate determined by the timer settings.
The shortest ‘on’ time is 100 ms and the longest ‘on’ time is
3000 ms. The timer is adjusted in 100 ms increments.

1

CONTINUOUS

When an MWSLI port has a message, the lamp will be lit steady.

CONDITIONS
Systems with MWSLI cards only.

DEFAULT DATA
INTERRUPT LED: 1000MS-ON 1000MS-OFF

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 511.
Display shows:

MW LAMP CADENCE

2) Press 0 or 1 to select CADENCE.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection.
Press Right Soft button to advance step 3.

MW LAMP CADENCE

3) Dial new values for interrupt times.(four digits)

MW LAMP CADENCE

INTERRUPT LED

INTERRUPT LED

2000 2000

Press Right Soft button to move cursor back.
If valid entry, system returns to step 2.
Press Left Soft button to move cursor back.
If valid entry, system returns to step 2.
4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-161

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[512] HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT
This MMC defines up to 60 holiday dates throughout the year. The system will override the
normal ring plan for these days and remain in the ring plan associated with the holiday.
Dates are entered in a month-day format: for example, July 4th would be 0704. One ring
plan applies to all holidays.

DEFAULT DATA
NO HOLIDAY ASSIGNED
FOLLOWS RING PLAN 1

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 512.
Display shows the Ring Plan:

RING PLAN

2) Press Right Soft button advance cursor.
Press Volume button to select a Ring Plan.
OR
Use the dial keypad to select a Ring Plan.(e.g., 2)

RING PLAN

3) Press Right Soft button to enter and advance cursor.

RING PLAN

FOLLOW 1

FOLLOW 2

FOLLOW 2

4) Press Volume button to scroll to assign Holiday
and press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

ASSIGN HOLIDAY

5) Press Volume button to select entry and press Right
Soft button enter and advance cursor.

ASSIGN HOLIDAY

6) Dial date for holiday using the dial keypad.
(e.g., 0704)

ASSIGN HOLIDAY

01:

05:

05:0704

7) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 507

2-162

ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[513] HOTEL TIMER
This MMC is where the Hotel timers for guest-rooms are set. These are system-wide timers
that affect all rooms. Refer to your Hotel documentation for more details.
No
0

Item
CHECK OUT TIME

Description
If a room is occupied after the checkout time, an additional day’s
room charge will be automatically added to the room bill.(If a
room is flagged as Occupied and HOLD then the additional day’s
room charge will not be added. Setting a room status to HOLD
allows a late checkout to be performed.)

1

ROOM CLEAN TIME

This is the time each day that the system will flag all occupied
rooms as NEEDS CLEANING.

2

CHECK IN END TM

This is used to decide if an additional day’s room charge will be automatically added to the room bill when the first Check Out Time is
reached. For example, if you set the Check In End time as 5 am, all
rooms checked in before 5 am will be automatically charged an extra
day at the Check Out Time(which might be, say, 11 am). Rooms
checked in after 5 am will not be charged extra until the next day, if still
occupied at the Check Out Time.

CONDITIONS
This function can be used only when the Hotel function is enabled in MMC 813, HOTEL
OPERATION.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 513.
Display shows:

CHECK OUT TIME

2) Select the timer using the Volume buttons.

ROOM CLEAN TIME

HH:MM :

HH:MM :

3) Enter new time using 24-hour clock format
system returns to step 2.

:

:

ROOM CLEAN TIME
HH:MM : 11:30

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Samsung Business Communications

2-163

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[514] TONE SOURCE
This program can assign an external tone source(e.g., a music source) instead of the normal
system tone(TONE) for certain calls. The tones that can be changed are:
No

Type

0

BUSY TONE

1

DIAL TONE

2

DND TONE

3

TRANSFER TONE

4

MSG WAIT TONE

5

ERROR TONE

6

RINGBACK TONE

DEFAULT DATA
TONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 514.
Display shows:

BUSY TONE

2) Enter the tone number 0-6.(e.g., 1)
OR
Press Volume button to select tone number and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

DIAL TONE

3) Dial a number for external tone source.(e.g., 3762)
OR
Press Volume button to select tone number and
press Right Soft button to store.

DIAL TONE

TONE

TONE

3762

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-164

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[515] DAYLIGHT ASSIGNMENT
Defines up to 10 summertime periods. The system time will automatically increase by an
hour at 2 a.m. on the assigned Start date and will automatically decrease by an hour at 3
a.m. on the assigned End date.
Dates are entered as follows:
NO=

entry number 01–10

YY=

year(last 2 digits, e.g., 05 for 2005)

START =

start date(MMDD, e.g., 0801 is 1st August)

END =

end date(MMDD, e.g., 0910 is 10th September)

For example, the entry might be:
NO : YY : START : END
01 : 05 : 3103 : 2710

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 515.
Display shows:

NO : YY : START : END

2) Dial 01–10 to select entry number.(e.g., 01)
OR
Press Volume button to select and press Right
Soft button to move cursor.

NO : YY : START : END

3) Enter dates as described above.

NO : YY : START : END

01 :

01 :_

:

:

:

:

01 : 05 : 3103 : 2710

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 505
MMC 861

ASSIGN DATE AND TIME
SYSTEM OPTIONS(AUTO UPDATE TIME)

Samsung Business Communications

2-165

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[600] ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP
Used to assign an operator group for each ring plan.

DEFAULT DATA
RING PLAN 1-6: 500

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 600.
Display shows:

OPERATOR GROUP

2) Dial the ring plan number.(1~6)
OR
Press Right Soft button to advance the cursor.

OPERATOR GROUP

3) Dial the group number.
OR
Press Volume button to select group and press
Right Soft button.

OPERATOR GROUP

1:500

1:500

1:501

2:500

2:500

2:500

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 601

2-166

ASSIGN STATION GROUP

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[601] ASSIGN STATION GROUP
This MMC is used to build all station groups. There are 40 programmable groups available.
The options for setting up these groups are as follows:
No
0

Option
TYPE

Description
This is the type of group you are creating and can be one of the following:
0 NORMAL: Used to assign stations in a ring group. The members can
be stations, common bell contacts or Ring over Page relays.
1 VMAA: Used to group a number of voice mail port extensions. These
must have been defined in MMC 207 as VMAA ports or they cannot
be entered here..
2 UCD: Used to build a UCD group. The system will support two
methods of UCD:
TYPE 1 UCD
The group OVERFLOW/N-ANS destination(see below) is defined as
an SLT port to which you must connect some type of announcement
device to play to callers while they are on hold.
Please note that this type of UCD group has the following limitations.
a) The announcement device must be able to terminate the announcement with a hook-flash and a transfer back to the UCD
group.
b) Only one caller at a time can hear the announcement.
c)

Each caller connected to the announcement must hear the announcement in its entirety.

d) It is possible that a new caller may ‘jump ahead’ in the queue if a
previous caller is currently connected to the announcement device.
TYPE 2 UCD
The group OVERFLOW/N-ANS destination(see below) is defined as
an AA port or group. This will only work if an AA card has been installed in the system.
The digital announcer in the AA card will supply two recorded announcements to callers in queue. The first announcement is played
only once, the second announcement will repeat for as long as the
caller is in queue.
This type of UCD group has the following advantages:
a) No external device need be installed to provide an announcement.
b) Multiple callers can hear the announcement(s) simultaneously.
c) Callers hearing the announcement will be transferred to a free
UCD group member(agent) as soon as the agent becomes
available.

Samsung Business Communications

2-167

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

(continued)
No
0

Option

Description

TYPE(contd)

d) The callers place in queue is always maintained.
Additional programming for this type of UCD group is in MMC
607. There is a maximum of 20 UCD groups available on a system due to availability of system resources.
3

AA: This is used to group a number of AA ports. An Auto Attendant(AA) card must be installed in the system to do this.

4 BI-VMS: This is the voice mail group for the Built-In Voice Mail card.
5

MESSAGE: Used to group a number of extensions to serve as a
message desk or message group. When one of the stations in this
type of group leaves a message to another station the messaged
station will return the message to the message group so any member can answer the call. If a station is a member of more than one
message group, then any message indications made by that station
would be for the first numerical message group they are a member
of. It is not recommended to program stations in to multiple station
groups.

6 S0 STN GRP: This is used to group a number of S0 stations for a
video conference.
7 VMSUCD GRP: This is used to collect UCD queuing prompts from
the SVMi-20. The group members will be the VM ports.
1

RING MODE

Each group can have one of the following ring modes. This will decide
how calls are placed to the group.
0 SEQUENTIAL: The stations listed as ‘members’(see below) will be
called on a ‘first available’ basis. Calls will first go to the first member; if the first member is busy, calls will go to the second member; if
the second member is busy, calls will go to the third member, and so
on. This type of group is useful for placing the bulk of the incoming
calls with a selected individual, and other members only getting the
calls when that member is busy. The number of members allowed
for a sequential group is 48.
1 DISTRIBUTED: The first call will go to the first member, the second
call will go to the second member, the third call will go to the third
member. This type of group is useful for evenly distributing the call
among all group members. The number of members allowed for a
distributed group is 48.
2 UNCONDITIONAL: Calls are placed to all group members simultaneously.
This reduces the number of members of the groups to 32. If a group
member is busy, they can receive off-hook ring if defined in MMC
300. This ring mode option is not available for UCD or VMAA groups.
The SGR INC BUSY option is not available for unconditional ring
mode.

2-168

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

(continued)
No
2

Option
OVERFLOW

Description
This is the timer value that will cause unanswered calls to a group to
begin also ringing the NEXT PORT(see below) after this timer has
elapsed. If set to 000, no overflow will take place.

3

GROUP

This is a timer that will determine how long Trunk Line calls transferred

TRANSFER

to the group will ring at the group before recalling. If set to 000, no recall
will take place.

4

NEXT PORT

This is the station or group number that callers will also ring at if the OVERFLOW feature has been programmed. The OVERFLOW DESTINATION
can be defined as:
1 COMMON BELL There is a common bell port on each MIS card.
2 RING OVER PAGE The ROP port can be defined as the NEXT port.
3 STATION OR STATION GROUP. Any station or station group can be
defined as the NEXT port.

5

MEMBER

List all members that are to be in the group. Up to 32 members for the
system are allowed in each group, but stations can be assigned to multiple station groups.

6

NEXT HUNT

The length of time a call will ring at a station before it hunts to the next
group member.

7

GROUP BUSY

When this option is set to ON, a busy signal will be sent to the caller if
all group members are busy. When this option is set to OFF, the ring
back tone is sent to the caller even if all group members are busy. UCD
is an exception to this rule. This option only works when MMC 210 SGR
INC BUSY is set to OFF. When MMC 210 SGR INC BUSY is set to ON,
all station groups will follow this setting.

9

ALLOUT NEXT

If all members are log-out, the call would be send to next port.

10

RBT MSG

If set ON, coloring service can be used by using svmi message.

Calls to a group
Calls to a group do not follow the call forwarding instructions of any station in the
group.

Samsung Business Communications

2-169

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

CONDITIONS
y

A station can be assigned to all station groups. A station group can accommodate up to
32 members.

y

To enable off-hook ring for incoming calls to busy members, set OFFHOOK RING in
MMC 300, CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION, to ON. Even in this case, however,
the off-hook ring is enabled only when the RING MODE is UNCONDITIONAL.

DEFAULT DATA
NORMAL GROUP

ACTION

2-170

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 601.
Display shows:

[501] STN.GROUP

2) Dial group number.(e.g., 505)
OR
Press Volume button to select group and
Press Right Soft button to move cursor.

[505] STN.GROUP

3) Dial feature option number.(0-7, e.g., 0)
OR
Press Volume button to scroll options and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

[505] STN GROUP

4) DIAL group type.(e.g., 1)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Left Soft button to move cursor to TYPE.

[505] STN GROUP

5) Dial feature option number.(0-6, e.g., 1)
OR
Press Volume button to scroll options and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

[505] STN GROUP

6) Dial ring option.(0-2, e.g., 0)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection.
Press Left Soft button to move cursor
back to RING or press Right Soft button to
return to step 2.

[505] STN GROUP

TYPE:NORMAL GRP

TYPE:NORMAL GRP

TYPE:VMAA GROUP

TYPE:VMAA GROUP

RING:DISTRIBUTE

RING:SEQUENTIAL

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

7) Dial next feature option and continue.
OR
Press Volume button to select option and
press Right Soft button.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.

[505] STN GROUP
RING:SEQUENTIAL

8) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 203
MMC 204

ASSIGN UA DEVICE
COMMON BELL CONTROL

Samsung Business Communications

2-171

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[602] STATION GROUP NAME
Allows the system administrator or technician to enter a name up to 11 characters to identify an individual station group.

ENTERING CHARACTERS
Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 602.
Display shows:

[500] SGR NAME

2) Dial group number.(e.g., 505)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Left or Right Soft button to move cursor.

[505] SGR NAME

3) Enter name.

[505] SGR NAME
TELECOMS

4) Press Left or Right Soft button to return to step 2.
OR
Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 104
MMC 404
MMC 601

2-172

STATION NAME
TRUNK NAME
ASSIGN STATION GROUP

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[603] ASSIGN TRUNK GROUP
Allows the assignment of trunks to a specific trunk group or to several trunk groups. This is
useful in the programming of LCR when more than one trunk is to be in several dialling
plans. There are two different modes of operation: (1) sequential and (2) distribute. There
are 30 programmable trunk groups with up to 60 members per group.

Trunk group
One trunk can appear in more than one trunk group. If necessary, delete the trunk
member from other groups to prevent accidental access.

DEFAULT DATA
ALL LOOP/ISDN TRUNKS: 9
ALL TIE TRUNKS: 801
ALL VOIP NETWORKING TRUNKS: 803
ALL VOIP H.323 TRUNKS: 804
ALL VOIP SIP TRUNKS: 805

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 603.
Display shows:

[9]

2) Enter valid trunk group.(e.g., 9)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance cursor.

[9]

3) Press Right Soft button to change mode.
OR
Press Volume button to change mode to member.

[9]

4) Press Right Soft button to move cursor to number
of member and enter valid member number
(e.g., 05) via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

[9]

Samsung Business Communications

TRK GROUP

MODE:SEQUENTIAL

TRK GROUP

MODE:SEQUENTIAL

TRK GROUP

MEMBER 01:NONE

TRK GROUP

MEMBER 05:NONE

2-173

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

5) Enter valid trunk number.(e.g., 729)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to return to step 2.

[9]

TRK GROUP

MEMBER 01:729

6) Repeat steps 1-5 to remove trunk from group 9
if necessary.
7) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
LCR PROGRAMMING
MMC 710
MMC 711
MMC 712
MMC 713

LCR DIGIT TABLE
LCR TIME TABLE
LCR ROUTE TABLE
LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE

VoIP PROGRAMMING
MMC 832
MMC 833

2-174

VoIP ACCESS CODE
VoIP IP TABLE

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[604] ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE
Allows the technician to assign a phone to any of the five internal paging zones. Each page
zone can have up to 32 members. A phone may be assigned to more than one zone. Page
zone(*) will page all external page zones as well as all phones that are members of page
zone 0.

DEFAULT DATA
NO STATIONS ASSIGNED

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 604.
Display shows:

INT.PAGE ZONE(0)

2) Enter the page zone number.(0-4, e.g., 3)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

INT.PAGE ZONE(3)

3) Enter index number(e.g., 05) via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

INT.PAGE ZONE(3)

4) Enter station number(e.g., 205) via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

INT.PAGE ZONE(3)

MEMBER 01:NONE

MEMBER 01:NONE

MEMBER 05:NONE

MEMBER 05:205

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-175

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[605] ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE
Determines which relays will close when one of the four external page zones is accessed.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 605.
Display shows first page zone:

EXT. PAGE ZONE(5)

2) Dial page zone number.(e.g., 6)
OR
Use Volume button to select desired page zone numbers
and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.

EXT. PAGE ZONE(6)

3) Dial member number.(e.g., 3)
OR
Use Volume button to select member numbers
and press Right Soft button to move the cursor.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.

EXT. PAGE ZONE(6)

4) Dial relay number via dial keypad.(e.g., 3751)
and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 3 above.

EXT. PAGE ZONE(6)

MEMBER 1 :NONE

MEMBER 1 :NONE

MEMBER 3 :NONE

MEMBER 3 :3751

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-176

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[606] ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK
Provides a means of adding or deleting speed dial blocks to the system or an individual
phone. With the ability to delete a block or blocks of speed dial, it will not be necessary to
waste these on such items as voice mail, DPIMs or stations that do not require the ability to
use speed dial. The Free List will show how many bins are left to be assigned.
A library of up to 200 speed dial numbers may be allocated as needed. The system list can
have up to 50 numbers(or 95 numbers if set in MMC 861 SYSTEM OPTIONS) and each
station can have up to 5 numbers. Speed dial numbers are assigned in blocks of 10. Each
speed number may contain up to 24 digits.

DEFAULT DATA
SYSTEM: 200 ENTRIES
STATIONS: 1 BLOCK ASSIGNED

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 606.
Display shows:

FREE LIST:20

2) Press Right Soft button to advance to next line.
OR

FREE LIST:20

You can view BUSY LIST using Volume button.

SYSTEM:20

SYSTEM:20

BUSY LIST:180
SYSTEM:20

3) Make a selection of SYSTEM or EXT using Volume
button and press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

FREE LIST:20

4) Enter desired extension number via dial keypad.
(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance cursor.

FREE LIST:20

Samsung Business Communications

EXT201:1

EXT205:1

2-177

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

5) Enter valid number for bins.
(e.g., 0-5 for EXT or 00-50 for SYSTEM)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection.
OR
Press Hold button to delete bin(s).

FREE LIST:20
EXT205:5

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 105
MMC 106
MMC 705
MMC 706

2-178

STATION SPEED DIAL
STATION SPEED DIAL NAME
ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL
SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[607] UCD OPTIONS
Sets up UCD options when an AA card has been installed. MMC 601 must have already
been used to define a UCD group with an overflow destination of an AA port or group.
(A group is preferred over a port because a group allows multiple paths into the AA card
and therefore has greater traffic handling capabilities.) When the group overflow timer in
MMC 601 expires, the caller will be routed to the AA card. It is here that the caller is
played the UCD ‘FIRST MESSAGE’ and ‘SECOND MESSAGE’ while in queue. This will
continue until an agent becomes free or the caller is transferred to a final destination.
The following program options apply:
No
00

Option
FIRST MESSAGE

Description
After the caller has overflowed from the UCD group, the first
message will immediately play.
This message will only be played once for the caller.

01

SECOND MESSAGE

If no agent has become free after the UCD recall time(see UCD
Recall Time), the caller will be played the second message.
This message will be repeated for as long as the caller is in
queue, at an interval specified in the UCD Recall timer below.

02

EXIT CODE

While the caller is hearing a message(but not during MOH),
the caller may dial the DTMF digit specified here and be transferred immediately to the final destination.(see Final Destination)
The exit code is optional and does not need to be used. If used,
the first and second messages may be modified to provide instructions on its use.

03

RETRY COUNT

The UCD program is designed to route a caller to a ‘final destination’ after a programmable number of ‘loops’ through the UCD
message. The range of this counter is 0 to 99. 00 means that
there is no retry counter and the caller will remain in the UCD
queue until answered. Any non zero value will route a caller
through the UCD loop that many times before going to the final
destination. The UCD will route calls to the final destination immediately if all members of the group are either out of group or in
DND.
Example: If this counter is set to 02, callers reaching a busy
group will hear the first UCD message, be placed on hold, hear
the second UCD message, be placed on hold, and finally hear
the second message again before being transferred to the final
destination.

Samsung Business Communications

2-179

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

(continued)
No

Option

04

FINAL DESTINATION

Description
This is the final destination for the caller if not answered by a
UCD agent.
This destination is only reached if(a) the caller dials an exit digit
during a message or(b) the retry count has expired. The final
destination can be a station number, a group number, a disconnect or another plan. Plans are entered by pressing button ‘A’
plus two digits 01-12. A disconnect is entered as a destination of
NONE.(Hold button)
If the final destination is a voice mail port, the port will receive a
FWD from UCD group integration message. The final destination
will forward or overflow.
If the forward to destination is a voice mail port the port will receive FWD from UCD group integration message. If the final destination is not forwarded, the call will ring or camp on to the final
destination indefinitely.
To ensure that you do not get a situation where all the call buttons are busy on the final destination it is advisable to make the
final destination a group.(even if the group has only one station in
it.)

05

RING NEXT TIME

This timer must be shorter than the overflow timer in MMC 601.
If a higher value is entered, the display will show invalid entry. In
the case where a UCD group has the ring next timer set at 000,
an unanswered call will rotate evenly among all agents until it is
answered. The UCD greetings will be heard during this routing
process, but can be removed by defining the UCD messages in
MMC 607 as unrecorded message numbers. This will simulate a
circular hunt group.

06

UCD RECALL TIME

After a caller has heard a UCD announcement, they will be
placed on hold until an agent becomes available or the UCD recall timer expires. When the UCD recall timer expires, the caller
will again hear the UCD announcement. The range is
00-99. The default is 10.

07

MOH SOURCE

This option determines what Music-On-Hold source callers will
be connected to between messages.

08

WRAP-UP TIME

This option will make a UCD agent unavailable to receive additional UCD calls after hanging up from the last one. This is to
allow agents to complete work associated with the previous call
before the next call begins ringing. The range is 000-250. The
default is 010.

2-180

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

(continued)
No
09

Option
AUTO LOG OUT

Description
This YES/NO option determines if a station will automatically log
out of the UCD group when the RING NEXT timer expires.
This setting will be ignored if the RING NEXT timer is set to 000.

10

ALLOUTÆFINAL

This YES/NO option determines if calls forward to the UCD final
destination when all stations are logged out of the UCD group.
If no UCD final destination is assigned then the call will disconnect.

11

AGENT PIN NO

This YES/NO option determines if an agent is required to enter
an Agent ID when logging on to this group. The Agent ID can be
entered in MMC 717.

12

GROUP BUSY NEXT

This YES/NO option determines if all agents are busy, specifies
whether the next port is called immediately during overflow time.

DEFAULT DATA
FIRST MSG: 61
SECOND MSG: 62
EXIT CODE: NONE
RETRY COUNT: 03
FINAL DEST: 500
RING NEXT: 30 SEC
UCD RECALL: 10 SEC
MOH SOURCE: NONE
WRAP-UP: 10 SEC
AUTO LOG OUT: ON
ALL OUT TO FINAL: OFF
AGENT PIN NO: OFF
GROUP BUSY NEXT: OFF

Samsung Business Communications

2-181

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 607.
Display shows:

[530] UCD OPTION

2) Press Volume button to select UCD group or dial
group number.
OR
Press Left Soft button to position cursor under
message number and enter new message.
OR
Press Right Soft button and advance to next option
using the Volume buttons to select an option.

[542] UCD OPTION

3) Press Right Soft button and advance to next option.
Use the Volume buttons to make a selection.
OR
Make a selection using the dial keypad.

[530] UCD OPTION

4) Press Left Soft button to enter the selection and
to return to step 1.
OR
Press Right Soft button to return to step 3.

[530] UCD OPTION

FIRST MSG :61

FIRST MSG :61

[530] UCD OPTION
FIRST MSG :25

[530] UCD GROUP
UCD RECALL:10 SEC

UCD RECALL:10 SEC

EXIT CODE :NONE

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 601

2-182

ASSIGN STATION GROUP

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[608] ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK
Provides a means of adding or deleting CID review blocks to an individual phone. With the
ability to delete a block or blocks of CID review, it will not be necessary to waste these on
items such as voice mail and DPIMs or phones that do not have displays. The free list will
show how many bins are left to be assigned. The system has 1000 total bins. Each phone
may be assigned a maximum of 50 bins.

DEFAULT DATA
PHONES: 10 BINS

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 608.
Display shows first station:

[201] REVIEW BLK

2) Enter desired EXT number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

[205] REVW BLOCK

3) Enter valid number for bins.(e.g., 50)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection.
OR
Press Hold button to delete bin(s).

[205] REVW BLOCK

10:0060 FREE

10:0060 FREE

50:0010 FREE

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 119
MMC 312
MMC 725

CALLER ID DISPLAY
ALLOW CALLER ID
SMDR OPTIONS

Samsung Business Communications

2-183

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[609] CALL LOG BLOCK
Provides a means of adding or deleting Call Log blocks for an individual phone. With the
ability to delete blocks it will not be necessary to waste these on items such as voice mail
and DPIMs or phones that do not have displays. The free list will show how many bins are
left to be assigned. The system has 1000 total bins. Each phone may be assigned a maximum of 50 bins.

DEFAULT DATA
PHONES: 10 BINS

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 609.
Display shows first station:

[201] LOG BLOCK

2) Enter desired EXT number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

[205] LOG BLOCK

3) Enter valid number for bins.(e.g., 50)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection.
OR
Press Hold button to delete bin(s).

[205] LOG BLOCK

10:0070 FREE

10:0070 FREE

50:0030 FREE

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-184

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[611] ALLOW TEXT MESSAGING
This program allows stations to send text messages to other stations if they are busy or during an OHVA. Up to 20 stations can be allowed text messaging.

DEFAULT DATA
y
y

NOT USED(no text messaging allowed)
ITP-5012L(Large LCD) keysets are automatically set to USED(text messaging allowed)

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 611.
Display shows:

[201] TMSG STN

2) Enter the number of a station.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

[202] TMSG STN

3) Specify whether text messaging will be used or not.

[202] TMSG STN

NOT USED:100 FREE

NOT USED:100 FREE

USED

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 117

EDIT TEXT MESSAGE

Samsung Business Communications

2-185

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[612] ALLOW GROUP CONFERENCE
This program allows a station to use the Group Conference call feature. Up to 20 stations
can be allowed this feature. Each allowed station can have up to five pre-programmed conference groups.

CONDITIONS
This feature is only for Large LCD phones.(e.g., ITP-5012L, DS-5012L, WIP-5000M)

DEFAULT DATA
Large LCD phones are automatically set to allow this feature.(USED)

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 612.
Display shows:

[201] CONF STN

2) Enter the number of a station.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

[202] CONF STN

3) Specify whether Group Conference feature can be
used or not.

[205] CONF STN

NOT USED:100 FREE

NOT USED :100 FREE

USED

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 118

2-186

CONFERENCE GROUP

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[614] STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP
This program allows you to assign stations to station use groups and trunks to trunk use
groups. This is useful if you want to restrict calling between stations, outgoing calls
through a trunk lines, or call answering.

CONDITIONS
Station use groups are numbered from 001 to 100, and trunk use groups from 101 to 200.

DEFAULT DATA
ALL STATIONS: 001
ALL TRUNKS: NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 614.
Display shows first station:

STATION GROUP

2) Enter 0 if you want to set a station group.
Enter 1 if user want to set a trunk group.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance cursor.

TRUNK GROUP

3) Enter number of station/trunk.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

TRUNK GROUP

4) Enter the number of the use group.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

TRUNK GROUP

201 :001

701 :101

702 : 101

702 : 101

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 304
MMC 317
MMC 428

ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE
ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE
ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE

Samsung Business Communications

2-187

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[615] MGI GROUP
This program assigns designated MGI ports to specific services. This allows ‘grading’ of
MGI card(s) for traffic conditions. The MGI ports can be segregated into groups. Any entries made here may be ineffective if conflicting entries exist in MMC 616.
No
0

Type
LOCAL ITP

Description
This determines what MGI ports can be used with ITP phones across a
private IP network.

1

PUB IP ITP

This determines what MGI ports can be used with ITP phones on a public IP network.

2

VOIP NTWK

This determines what MGI ports can be used for enhanced proprietary
Samsung VoIP networking between OfficeServ 7100 systems across a
private IP network.

3

PUB IP NTWK

This determines what MGI ports can be used for enhanced proprietary
Samsung VoIP networking between OfficeServ 7100 systems on a public IP network.

4

VOIP TRUNK

This determines what MGI ports can be used as industry-standard
H.323 or SIP VoIP trunks for communications across a private network

5

PUB IP TRK

This determines what MGI ports can be used as industry-standard
H.323 or SIP VoIP trunks for communications on a public network.

6

MGI3 NEEDED

This determines what MGI ports can be used for T.38 facsimile communications across a private network.

7

PUB IP MGI3

This determines what MGI ports can be used for T.38 facsimile communications on a public network.

8

ITP PAGED

This determines what MGI ports can be used with station page to ITP
phones across a private IP network.

The MGI ports have two selection modes: Sequential or Distributed. The members for each
selection are the actual ports on the MGI card(s).

DEFAULT DATA
LOCAL ITP: MGI1, MGI2, MGI3
PUB IP ITP: MGI2, MGI3
VOIP NTWK: MGI2, MGI3
PUB IP NTWK: MGI2, MGI3
VOIP TRUNK: MGI2, MGI3
PUB IP TRK: MGI2, MGI3
MGI3 NEEDED: MGI3
PUB IP MGI3: MGI3
ITP PAGED: MGI1, MGI2, MGI3

2-188

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 615.
Display shows the first available option:

USER: LOCAL ITP

2) Press Volume button to select an user type.
Press Right Soft button to move cursor.

USER: LOCAL ITP

3) Press Volume button to select an option and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

USER: LOCAL ITP

4) Press Volume button to select and press Right
Soft button to store data and return to step 1.

USER: LOCAL ITP

MODE:SEQUENTIAL

MODE:SEQUENTIAL

MODE:SEQUENTIAL

MODE:SEQUENTIAL

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-189

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[616] MGI USER
This program selects which specific MGI ports will be dedicated on a per-port basis for IP
station/trunk devices. If this MMC is not used, allocation of MGI ports will be controlled
by MMC 615. By defining dedicated MGI port usage, the IP station/trunk selected will always use the port programmed. MGI ports can be assigned for digital stations
(2XX~2XXX), private and public ITP stations(32XX), VoIP Networking trunks(83XX),
H.323 trunks(84XX), SIP trunks(85XX) and MGI3 facsimile. Only one assignment per
MGI port is permitted. Any entries made here will override entries made in MMC 615.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 616.
Display shows the first available option:

[3801] MGI USER

2) Enter MGI dial number.
OR
Press Volume button to select an MGI port and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

[3801] MGI USER

3) Enter MGI user dial number.
OR
Press Volume button to select an MGI user and
press Right Soft button to store and move cursor.

[3801] MGI USER

NONE

NONE

NONE

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-190

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[700] COPY COS CONTENTS
This MMC allows the technician to duplicate classes of service.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

PROGRAM BUTTONS
‘F’ KEY

Used to advance to MMC 701

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 700.
Display shows:

COPY COS ITEMS

2) Dial selected COS to copy.(e.g., 05)
OR
Press Volume button to select COS and press.
Right Soft button to move cursor and advance
to next step.

COPY COS ITEMS

3) Dial target COS.(e.g., 06)
OR
Press Volume button to select COS and press
Right Soft button to move cursor back to step 2.

COPY COS ITEMS

4) Press F key to advance MMC 701 and press
Right Soft to advance cursor.

COS CONTENTS(06)

COS01ÆCOS01

COS05ÆCOS01

COS05ÆCOS06

TOLL LEVEL:A

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 701

ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

Samsung Business Communications

2-191

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[701] ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
Similar to MMC 700 but does not allow a copy command. This MMC is primarily used for
creating a new class of service(COS). If the unsupervised conference feature is allowed, a
programmed CONF key must be available to allow re-entry into a conference call.
There are 30 classes of service available.
This MMC is divided into 5 categories.
No
0

1

Category
TOLL LEVEL

USABLE FEATURE

Description
TOLL

LEVEL

0

A

Follow toll class A(Unrestricted)

1

B

Follow toll class B in MMC 702, 703

2

C

Follow toll class C in MMC 702, 703

3

D

Follow toll class D in MMC 702, 703

4

E

Follow toll class E in MMC 702, 703

5

F

Follow toll class F in MMC 702, 703

6

G

Follow toll class G in MMC 702, 703

7

H

Follow toll class H(All restricted)

No

COS

Default

Description

00

AA CALER

YES

Auto answer control by caller

01

ABSENCE

YES

Absence

02

ALM CLR

YES

Alarm Clear

03

AUTO RDL

YES

Retry on busy

04

CALLBACK

YES

Callback

05

CLIP ABN

YES

Caller ID Abandon

06

CLIP INQ

YES

Caller ID Inquire

07

CLIP INV

YES

Caller ID Investigate

08

CONFER.

YES

Conference

09

DALM CLR

YES

DISA alarm ring clear

10

DIRECT.

YES

Directory dial

11

DISA

YES

Allow DISA use

12

DND

YES

Do Not Disturb

13

DND FWRD

YES

Forward Do Not Disturb

14

DND OVRD

NO

Do Not Disturb Override

15

DOOR

YES

Door ring answer

16

DSS

YES

Direct station select

17

DTS

YES

Direct trunk select

18

EXT AREC

NO

Intercom call automatic record
(SVM-800)

19

2-192

EXT FWD

YES

External call forward

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

(continued)
No
1

Category
USABLE FEATURE

Description
No

COS

Default

Description

20

FEATURE

YES

Transfer button

21

FLASH

YES

Trunk flash

22

FOLLOW-ME

YES

Call forward-follow me

23

FORWARD

YES

Call forwarding

24

FWDTOVMS

YES

Call forward to SVM-800

25

GRP I/O

YES

Group in/out

26

HOLD

YES

Hold

27

HOTLINE

YES

Hot line and Off-hook selection

28

INTERCOM

YES

Intercom call

30

MESSAGE

YES

Message

31

MM PAGE

YES

Meet me page

32

NEW CALL

YES

New call

33

OHVAED

YES

Receive Off-hook voice announcement

34

OHVAING

YES

Make Off-hook voice announcement

Samsung Business Communications

35

ONEA2

YES

1A2 emulation

36

OPERATOR

YES

Call to Operator

37

OUT TRSF

YES

Outgoing transfer

38

OVERRIDE

NO

Barge-In

39

PAGE 0

YES

Page zone 0 Paging

40

PAGE 1

YES

Page zone 1 Paging

41

PAGE 2

YES

Page zone 2 Paging

42

PAGE 3

YES

Page zone 3 Paging

43

PAGE 4

YES

Page zone 4 Paging

44

PAGE 5

YES

Page zone 5 Paging

45

PAGE 6

YES

Page zone 6 Paging

46

PAGE 7

YES

Page zone 7 Paging

47

PAGE 8

YES

Page zone 8 Paging

48

PAGE 9

YES

Page zone 9 Paging

49

PAGE *

YES

Page zone * Paging

51

PICKUP

YES

Call pickup

52

PRB

YES

Privacy Release and Bridge

2-193

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

(continued)
No
1

Category
USABLE FEATURE

Description
No

COS

Default

Description

53

REM. HOLD

YES

Remote Hold

54

RNG PLAN

YES

Ring Mode Change

55

SECURE

YES

Barge-In secure

56

SET RLOC

NO

Set Relocation

57

SSPD TOL

YES

System Speed dial toll check

58

STN LOCK

YES

Station Lock

59

SYS SPD

YES

System Speed dial

60

TRK AREC

NO

Trunk call automatic record
(SVM-800)

61

TRK EHLD

YES

Trunk call exclusive hold

62

UNCO CNF

YES

Unsupervised Conference

63

VM AREC

NO

Auto Record(SVMi)

64

VM AME

NO

Answer Machine Emulation
(SVMi)

2

CALL STATION

65

VM REC

NO

Call Record(SVMi)

66

VMS PSWD

NO

VMS password(SVM-800)

67

VMS REC

NO

VMS Call Record(SVM-800)

STN GROUP 01-80

YES

Station group 01~80 calling

TRK GROUP 01-30

YES

Trunk group 01~30 calling

BIVMS STN 01-16

YES

SVMi port 01~16 calling

GROUP
3

CALL TRUNK
GROUP

4

CALL TO
BIVMS STN(SVMi).

DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION

2-194

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 701.
Display shows:

COS CONTENTS(01)

2) Dial COS.(e.g., 06)
OR
Press Volume button to select COS number and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

COS CONTENTS(06)

3) Dial COS contents categories.
(e.g., 1 for Usable Features)
OR
Press Volume button to select COS categories and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

COS CONTENTS(06)

4) Dial COS usable feature option.(e.g., 12)
OR
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

COS CONTENTS(06)

5) Dial 0 for NO or 1 for YES.
OR
Press Volume button to select option and
press Right Soft button to return to step 4.

COS CONTENTS(06)

TOLL LEVEL:A

TOLL LEVEL:A

00:AA CALER :YES

12:DND

12:DND

:YES

:NO

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 700

COPY COS CONTENTS

Samsung Business Communications

2-195

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[702] TOLL DENY TABLE
Provides a way to make toll restriction(call barring) very easy and flexible. There are 500
entries allowed in the deny table and each entry index can be assigned to a class of service.
Each index can have up to 12 digits. With the use of wild cards(MMC 704, Assign Wild
Character), more flexibility can be built into toll restriction. Wild cards can be used repeatedly in the dial string, limited only to what is allowed or denied in MMC 704.
Six toll levels, B to G, are programmable. Toll level A is set as ‘unrestricted’ by default and
toll level H is set as ‘in-house only’ by default.

DEFAULT DATA
ALL ENTRIES ARE SET TO 0

PROGRAM BUTTONS
A
B
C

Used to enter wild card X
Used to enter wild card Y
Used to enter wild card Z

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 702.
Display shows:

DENY(001):BCDEFG

2) Dial index number.(e.g., 005)
OR
Press Volume button to select index and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

DENY(005):BCDEFG

3) Enter toll pattern via dial keypad.(e.g., 212)

DENY(005):BCDEFG

:000000

:000000

212

OR
Enter wild card(e.g., 21X) and press Right Soft button to move cursor to COS options.
4) Press Volume button to move cursor along line until
under toll class mark.(e.g., E).
Enter a 1 for ‘Yes’ or 0 for ‘No’.
Press Right Soft button to store and return to step 1.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.

2-196

:000000

DENY(005):BCDEFG
21X

:000000

DENY(001):BCDEFG
212

:000100

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 703
MMC 704

TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE
ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER

[703] TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE
Provides a way to make toll restriction very easy and flexible. There are 500 allowable entries in the allow table for an OfficeServ 7100-main system and each entry index can be assigned to a class of service. Each index can have up to 12 digits. With the use of wild
cards(MMC 704, Assign Wild Character), more flexibility can be built into toll restriction.
Six toll levels, B to G, are programmable. Toll level A is set as ‘unrestricted’ by default, and
toll level H is set as ‘in-house only’ by default.

DEFAULT DATA
ALL ENTRIES ARE SET TO 0

PROGRAM BUTTONS
A
B
C

Used to enter wild card X
Used to enter wild card Y
Used to enter wild card Z

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 702.
Display shows:

ALOW(001):BCDEFG

2) Dial index number.(e.g., 005)
OR
Press Volume button to select index and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

ALOW(005):BCDEFG

3) Enter toll pattern via dial pad.(e.g., 202)

ALOW(005):BCDEFG

:000000

:000000

202

OR
Enter wild card(e.g., 20X) and press Right Soft
ton to move cursor to COS options.

Samsung Business Communications

but-

:000000

ALOW(005):BCDEFG
20X

:000000

2-197

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

4) Press Volume button to move cursor along line
until under toll class mark.(e.g., E).
Enter a 1 for ‘Yes’ or 0 for ‘No’.
Press Right Soft button to store and return to step 1.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.

ALOW(001):BCDEFG
202

:000100

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 702
MMC 704

2-198

TOLL DENY TABLE
ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[704] ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER
Provides flexibility to toll restriction(call barring) when a specific numbering plan is desired. There are only three entry tables but more than one digit can be assigned per table if
needed.

DEFAULT DATA
X ENTRIES SET TO 1
Y AND Z ENTRIES SET TO 0

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 704.
Display shows:
2) Press Volume button to select X, Y, or Z(e.g., Z)
and press Right Soft button to advance cursor to
option line.
3) Press Volume button to move cursor to option
digit desired(e.g., 5) and enter 1.(put under other
digits as required)
Press Left Soft button to return to step 2.
OR
Press Right Soft button to return to step 1.

:0123456789*#
X:111111111111

:0123456789*#
Z:000000000000

:0123456789*#
Z:000001000000

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 702
MMC 703

TOLL DENY TABLE
TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE

Samsung Business Communications

2-199

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[705] ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL
Enables the assignment of system speed dialling numbers. There are up to 450 entries
available for programming.(or 950 entries if set in MMC 861 SYSTEM OPTIONS) Each
speed dial number consists of a trunk or trunk group access code followed by a separator
and up to 24 digits to be dialled. These dialled digits may consist of 0-9, and #. If the system recognizes a valid trunk or trunk group access number, it will automatically insert the
separator.
NOTE: If 500 entries are allowed, the bin numbers are 500-945; if 950 entries are allowed,
the bin numbers are 050-999.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

PROGRAM BUTTONS
B
C
D
E
F
ANS/RLS

Used to insert a flash code ‘F’
Used to insert a pause code ‘P’
Used to insert a pulse/tone conversion code ‘C’.
Used to mask/unmask following digits-shows as ‘[’ or ‘]’
Used to enter name for speed dial bin(see MMC 706)
Used to save the speed dial number and name to the CID translation
table(MMC 728)

ACTION

2-200

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 705.
Display shows:

SYS SPEED DIAL

2) Dial speed index desired.(e.g., 505)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

SYS SPEED DIAL

3) Enter access code(e.g., 9) plus the phone
number up to 24 digits(digits will scroll under)
and press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

SYS SPEED DIAL

4) Press F key to toggle to MMC 706 step 3 to enter
name.

SYS SPEED NAME

500:

505:

505:9–121223456789

505:

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

5) If you want to save the speed dial number and name
to the CID translation table.(MMC 728)
Press the ANS/RLS button and dial 1 for YES.
(The speed dial name must exist)

SYS SPEED DIAL
ADD CLI XLT ?NO

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 606
MMC 706

ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK
SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME

[706] SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME
Allows a name up to 11 characters to be entered for each system speed dial location.
This name enables the speed dial number to be located when using the directory dial feature.

ENTERING CHARACTERS
Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

DEFAULT DATA
NO NAMES

PROGRAM BUTTONS
ANS/RLS

Used to save the speed dial number and name to the CID translation
table(MMC 728).

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 706.
Display shows:

SYS SPEED NAME

2) Dial system speed entry number.(e.g., 505)
OR
Press Volume button to select entry number and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

SYS SPEED NAME

Samsung Business Communications

500:

505:

2-201

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

3) Enter name using dial keypad and press Right Soft
button to return to step 2.
OR
Press the F key to return to MMC 705, step 3.

SYS SPEED NAME
505:TELECOMS

SYS SPEED DIAL
505:

4) If you want to save the speed dial number and name
data to the CLI translation table.(MMC 728)
Press ANS/RLS button and dial 1 for YES.
(The speed dial number must exist)

SYS SPEED NAME
ADD CLI XLT ?NO

5) Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 above.
OR
Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 606
MMC 705

2-202

ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK
ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[707] AUTHORIZATION CODE
Enables the authorization feature on a per-class of service selection. There are 500 available entries. Authorization codes must be 4-10 digits long.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 707.
Display shows:

AUTHOR.CODE(001)

2) Dial code index number.(e.g., 005)
OR
Press Volume button to selected index number and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

AUTHOR.CODE(005)

3) Enter authorization code(minimum of four digits and
a maximum of 10 digits) via dial keypad
(e.g., 1234567890) and press Right Soft button to
move cursor.

AUTHOR.CODE(005)

4) Enter class of service number 01-30.(e.g., 05)
OR
Press Volume button to select COS and press Right
Soft button to select and return to step 2.

AUTHOR.CODE(005)

C:01

C:01

1234567890

C:01

1234567890 C:05

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 305
MMC 701

ASSIGN FORCED CODE
ASSIGN COS CONTENTS

Samsung Business Communications

2-203

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[708] ACCOUNT CODE
Enables the account code entry feature. There are 999 available entries.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 708.
Display shows:

ACCOUNT CODE

2) Dial code index number.(e.g., 005)
OR
Press Volume button to selected index number
and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

ACCOUNT CODE

3) Enter account code(maximum 12 digits) via
dial keypad(e.g., 1234) and press Right Soft button
to move cursor back to step 2.

ACCOUNT CODE

001:

005:

005:1234

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 305

2-204

ASSIGN FORCED CODE

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[709] TOLL PASS CODE/SPECIAL CODE TABLE
This MMC provides a means to program trunk code tables as described below.
No
0

Special Code
PBX CODE

Description
This table contains up to five entries and is used to identify the
trunk access codes needed for toll restriction when the system
is used with either a PBX or a CENTREX-supplied dial tone. Toll
restriction will only be applied on trunks flagged as PBX in MMC
401 if a trunk access code entered in this table is dialled. Toll
restriction will be applied to the digits following the trunk access
code.

1

SPECIAL CODE

This table identifies the special feature codes used to activate
central office custom-calling features such as CID Block and
Call Waiting Disable. The special feature codes can be used on
a per-call basis without affecting LCR or toll restriction programming. There is a maximum of 10 entries available, each of
which may be up to four digits long.

2

TOLL OVERRIDE

This table of eight entries is used to identify the numbers that
will bypass all dialling restrictions. This bypass includes toll restriction, trunk access and forced authorization or account
codes. Each entry in the table can be up to 14 digits long.

3

OVRD USE TRK GRP

This entry designates the trunk group that toll override calls will
access.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 709.
Display shows:

PBX ACCESS CODE

2) Select PBX, SPECIAL CODE, TOLL OVERRIDE
or OVRD USE TRK GRP.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

TOLL OVERRIDE

3) Enter index number.(e.g., 3)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

TOLL OVERRIDE

Samsung Business Communications

1:

1:

3:_

2-205

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

4) Enter via dial keypad the desired access/feature
code.(e.g., 911)
Press Right Soft button to enter and return
to step 3 and enter more entries.

TOLL OVERRIDE
3:911

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 401
MMC 702
MMC 703
MMC 305

TRUNK LINE/PBX LINE
TOLL DENY TABLE
TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE
ASSIGN FORCED CODE

TOLL RESTRICTION
MMC 702
MMC 703
MMC 704

2-206

TOLL DENY TABLE
TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE
ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[710] LCR DIGIT TABLE
The LCR DIGIT TABLE contains all numerical digits for the completion of outgoing call
placement. This table works in conjunction with LCR ROUTE TABLE, LCR TIME TABLE and LCR MODIFY DIGITS TABLE. There is a maximum 2000 entries with a digit
string length of 10 numerical digits. This system automatically maintains entered digit
strings in numerical order. The characters * and # are also accepted for use with feature
codes.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 710.
Display shows:

LCR DIGIT (0001)

2) Dial LCR entry.(e.g., 0005)
OR
Press Volume button to select entry and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

LCR DIGIT (0005)

3) Enter LCR digit string via the dial keypad and
press Right Soft button.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 1.

LCR DIGIT (0005)

4) Enter digit length.(max. 31)
Cursor will move to RT.(route selection)

LCR DIGIT (0005)

5) Enter RT(01-32)
Valid entry will return you to step 1.

LCR DIGIT (0005)

DIGIT:

DIGIT:_

DIGIT:305426

LENGTH:10 RT:01

LENGTH:10 RT:01

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 712

LCR ROUTE TABLE

Samsung Business Communications

2-207

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[711] LCR TIME TABLE
This table, through the LCR ROUTES, allows calls placed at any given time of day to use
the least cost trunk route that is available. When LCR ROUTE ADVANCE is allowed, it is
possible for calls to be placed on more expensive trunks on any given time of day. There
are four possible time entries per day; the start time of the next time period is the end time
of the previous time period.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 711.
Display shows:

LCR TIME (SUN:A)

2) Dial day of week.(SUN-SAT, e.g., WED)
OR
Press Volume button to make day selection and
press Right Soft button.

LCR TIME (WED:A)

3) Dial time band.(A-D, e.g., B)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button.

LCR TIME (WED:B)

4) Dial time via keypad.(24-hour format, e.g., 0800)
Cursor moves to LCRT.(see MMC 712)

LCR TIME (WED:B)

5) Dial time table number.(1-4)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button.

LCR TIME (WED:B)

HHMM:

HHMM:

HHMM:

LCRT:-

LCRT:-

LCRT:-

HHMM:0800 LCRT:-

HHMM:0800 LCRT:1

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 710
MMC 712
MMC 713

2-208

LCR DIGIT TABLE
LCR ROUTE TABLE
LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[712] LCR ROUTE TABLE
The LCR ROUTE TABLE is responsible for selecting a specific trunk group in the completion of an outward bound call. This table works in conjunction with LCR DIGIT TABLE,
LCR TIME TABLE, LCR COS TABLE and LCR MODIFIED DIGITS TABLE. After you
dial a valid digit string, the system uses the LCR ROUTE TABLE to select a specific predetermined trunk group. There is a maximum of 99 routes available.
If more than one trunk group is available for call completion, the system uses the first designated trunk group and then the succeeding trunk groups. If all trunk groups are busy in a
selected route, call queue becomes active and allocates trunks as they become available.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 712.
Display shows:

LCR ROUTE (01:1)

2) Dial LCR ROUTE table number.(e.g., 05)
OR
Press Volume button to selected table and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

LCR ROUTE (05:1)

3) Dial TIME BAND index number 1-4.(e.g., 2)
OR
Press Volume button to selected index and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

LCR ROUTE (05:2)

4) Dial LCR COS number 1-8.(e.g., 4)
OR
Press Volume button to selected COS and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

LCR ROUTE (05:2)

5) Dial TRUNK GROUP access code.(e.g., 801)
OR
Press Volume button to selected access code and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

LCR ROUTE (05:2)

Samsung Business Communications

C:1 G:NONE M:---

C:1 G:NONE M:---

C:1 G:NONE M:---

C:4 G:NONE M:---

C:4 G:801 M:---

2-209

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

6) Dial MODIFY DIGITS index number.(e.g., 050)
OR
Press Volume button to selected index number and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Press Right Soft button to skip step and move
cursor to step 2.

LCR ROUTE (05:2)
C:4 G:801 M:050

LCR ROUTE (05:2)
C:4 G:801 M:---

7) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 310
MMC 710
MMC 711
MMC 713

2-210

LCR CLASS OF SERVICE
LCR DIGIT TABLE
LCR TIME TABLE
LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[713] LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE
This program is sometimes referred to as Outgoing Dial Rules. It enables the system to add
or delete a digit string or singular digit if needed to complete a call. With these digits inserted, a long distance call will be placed over a local line using the common carrier network. The characters * and # can also be entered. There are 200 modify digit entries available.
Option

Description

Max. No. of Digit Entries

NOF DEL DGT

Number of digits to delete

15

I

Insert(before dialling string)

14

A

Append(after dialling string)

14

DIGIT STRING KEY
Insert String + Digit String(delete) + Append String

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 713.
Display shows:

LCR MODIFY (001)

2) Enter index number.(e.g., 005)
OR
Press Volume buttons to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

LCR MODIFY (005)

3) Enter number of digits to delete.
OR
Press Right Soft button to skip step and move
cursor to next step.

LCR MODIFY (005)

4) Enter digits to be inserted.(e.g., 10288)
OR
Press Right Soft button to skip step or to store
information and advance to next step.

LCR MODIFY (005)

Samsung Business Communications

NOF DEL DGT:00

NOF DEL DGT:00

NOF DEL DGT:01

I:10288_

2-211

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

5) Enter digits to be appended.(e.g., 45678)
OR
Press Right Soft button to skip step or to store information and return to step 2.

LCR MODIFY (005)
A:_

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 310
MMC 710
MMC 711
MMC 712

2-212

LCR CLASS OF SERVICE
LCR DIGIT TABLE
LCR TIME TABLE
LCR ROUTE TABLE

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[714] DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION
Assigns an incoming DID call to a specific ring plan destination. It also provides a call
waiting option, if needed, so that a second incoming DID call can be received. The table is
also used to define which MOH source a caller to that DID number will hear when placed
on hold. A name up to 11 characters can be added to the number. There is a maximum of
999 entries. If there is no matching number on DID service, the call is routed to the operator group.
Option

Description

DGT

Digits to be received from Trunk line.(up to 16 digits may be entered)

MOH SOURCE

Allows the technician to select what the calling party will hear if the call is
placed on hold. There are four possible music selections.

PRI

DID priority option. There are nine priority levels: priority 1 is the highest
and priority 9 is the lowest. When calls come into a station group and all
group members are busy, the system will assign a priority to the DDI
numbers so that calls from a high-priority DDI number will be placed at the
front of the group queue. If this option is set to NO, the call held longest in
the group queue has the highest priority.

RING PLAN

Ring plan and destination during each ring plan. The destination can be a

1: XXX, 2: XXX,

station, station group, trunk or trunk group. If a trunk or trunk group is se-

3: XXX, 4: XXX,

lected the trunks must be programmed as E & M trunks to allow the re-

5: XXX, 6: XXX

ceived digits to be re-sent. This is referred to as DID Repeat digits over tie
line. Entering the character ‘B’ means to repeat the received digits.

CW

Call Waiting Yes/No.(Allows a second DID call to be received.)

MC

The maximum call count. When this is set to 99, the feature will not work. When
set to 0, if a call comes in that matches DID digits and DGT field then the system will reject the call. When set between 1 and 98, if a call comes in that
matches DID digits and DGT field then the system counts the same DID digits,
and if the count is the same or higher than this value, the system sends busy
signal to caller.

DC

The number of digits to delete. This is useful with Tandem switching,
mixed numbering plans and DID Repeat digits over tie line. Maximum
number of digits that can be deleted is 16.

NAME

Enter up to 11 characters to identify call. Refer to MMC 104, STATION
NAME, for how to enter the name.

TONE

Assigns ring tone to DLI port.

CADENCE

Assigns ring cadence to SLT port.

Samsung Business Communications

2-213

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

DEFAULT DATA
INDEX

DIGIT

MOH

PRI

1-6

CW

MC

DC

NAME

001

2***

NONE

NO

B

N

99

0

NONE

002

3***

NONE

NO

B

N

99

0

NONE

003

5***

NONE

NO

B

N

99

0

NONE

004

8***

NONE

NO

B

N

99

0

NONE

ACTION

2-214

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 714.
Display shows:

DID DIGIT (001)

2) Enter valid index number(e.g., 005) via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

DID DIGIT (005)

3) Enter digits to be translated(e.g., 5065) via dial keypad and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

DID DIGIT (005)

4) Enter the MOH source for this entry.
OR
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button to return to step 3 above.

DID DIGIT (005)

5) Enter priority level via dial keypad.
(1-9 or NO)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft buttons to advance to next step.

DID DIGIT (005)

6) Enter station or group number for each Ring Plan
destination via dial keypad.(e.g., 530)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance to next step.

DID DIGIT (005)

DGT:

DGT:

DGT:5065

MOH:NONE PRI:NO

MOH:NONE PRI:NO

1:530

2:

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

7) Enter call wait option via dial keypad.
(1 for YES, 0 for NO)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance to next step.

DID DIGIT (005)

8) Enter maximum call count via dial keypad.(00-99)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance to next step.

DID DIGIT (005)

9) Enter number or delete digit via dial keypad.(0-16)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance to next step.

DID DIGIT (005)

10) Enter the name via dial keypad and press Right
Soft button to return to Step 1.

CW:N MC:99 DC:0

CW:N MC:99 DC:0

CW:N MC:99 DC:0

DID DIGIT (005)
NAME:

11) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

Samsung Business Communications

2-215

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[715] PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE
Allows custom messages to be programmed or default messages to be changed.

ENTERING CHARACTERS
Refer to ENTERING CHARACTERS in MMC 104, STATION NAME.
There are 15 messages in the system:
MESSAGES 01-10 are 16-character pre-programmed default messages. Any of them can
be changed. MESSAGES 11-15 are 16-character blank messages that can be created.

DEFAULT DATA
TEN PROGRAMMED MESSAGES:
01.
02.
03.
04.
05.

IN A MEETING
OUT ON A CALL
OUT TO LUNCH
LEAVE A MESSAGE
PAGE ME

06.
07.
08.
09.
10.

OUT OF TOWN
IN TOMORROW
RETURN AFTERNOON
ON VACATION
GONE HOME

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 715.
Display shows:

PGM.MESSAGE (01)

2) Enter message number.(e.g., 11)
OR
Press Volume button arrow to make selection.
Press Right Soft button to move cursor.

PGM.MESSAGE (11)

3) Enter message via dial keypad.(maximum 16
characters)
Use ‘A’ button to toggle upper case/lower case.
Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

PGM.MESSAGE (11)

IN A MEETING

Blank Message

IN MEETING ROOM

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 115

2-216

SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[716] UK LCR OPTION
This MMC provides UK LCR options.
No

Option

0

NETWORK CODE

Description
This table is used to network access code when the call is routed to
the secondary network. This table contains up to 16 entries. Each
code has 4 digits maximum in length and use option for None, CCC, PIN
or Both.(Default: all codes are empty and all use options are none)
0 NONE: This code doesn’t use.
1 CCC: This code uses with Call Cast Code(CCC).
2 PIN: This code uses with PIN Code.
3 BOTH: This code uses with PIN code and Call Cast Code.

1

PIN CODE

This table is used to PIN code when the call is routed to the secondary
network. This table contains up to 4 entries and each code has 10
digits maximum in length.(Default: all tables are empty)

2

CCC OPTION

This is used to which number used for Call Cost Code.
(Default: Station Number)
0 STATION NUMBER: Station number uses for Call Cost Code.
1 NONE: Doesn’t use Call Cost Code.

3

STATION PIN NO.

This is assigned to PIN code table number for each station number.(Default: all stations are 1)

DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 716.
Display shows:

NETWORK CODE

2) Enter option number 0-3.
OR
Press Volume buttons to select number
and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

NETWORK CODE

3) Enter number 0-16.
OR
Press Volume buttons to select number
and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

NETWORK CODE

4) Enter network access code via dial keypad.

NETWORK CODE

01:

01:

02:_

USE:NONE

USE:NONE

USE:NONE

02:1234 USE:NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-217

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

5) Enter use option number.(0-3)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to save and return to step 3.

NETWORK CODE
02:1234 USE:CCC

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 400
MMC 310
MMC 710
MMC 711
MMC 712
MMC 713

2-218

CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK
LCR CLASS OF SERVICE
LCR DIGIT TABLE
LCR TIME TABLE
LCR ROUTE TABLE
LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[717] UCD AGENT ID
This MMC defines UCD agent ID numbers or PIN numbers. These numbers are used to log
UCD agents into the UCD groups. There are 100 available entries and each entry is tied to
a specific UCD group. Agent ID codes can be up to 4 digits long.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 717.
Display shows:

AGENT PIN (001)

2) Dial code entry number.(e.g., 005)
OR
Press Volume buttons to select number
and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

AGENT PIN (005)

3) Enter ID code via dial keypad(e.g., 1234) and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

AGENT PIN (005)

4) Enter group number.(e.g., 505)
OR
Press Volume button to select group and
press Right Soft button to select and return to step 2.
OR
Select all groups.

AGENT PIN (005)

ID:

ID:_

GRP:NONE

GRP:NONE

ID:1234 GRP:NONE

ID:1234 GRP:505

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 607

UCD OPTIONS

Samsung Business Communications

2-219

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[718] MY AREA CODE
This MMC defines the home area code and country code. This information is used for
caller ID and ISDN calls in defining the area code on incoming calls. This MMC removes
the local area code to allow callback without digit modifications in LCR.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 718.
Display shows:

MY AREA CODE

2) Enter 0 for COUNTRY or 1 for AREA.
OR
Press Volume buttons to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

MY AREA CODE

3) Enter area code(maximum 4 digits) via dial keypad
(e.g., 2) and press Right Soft button to move
cursor back to step 2.

MY AREA CODE

AREA

AREA

AREA

:

:

:2

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS

2-220

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[719] IDLE DISPLAY
This program allows you to enter guidance data to be displayed on large LCD phones.

ENTERING CHARACTERS
Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 719.
Display shows:

IDLE DISPLAY (01)

2) Enter the number of the line on a large LCD phone
(01~12) on which guidance data is to be displayed.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

IDLE DISPLAY (02)

3) Enter guidance data via dial keypad and press
Right Soft button to save and move to step 2.

IDLE DISPLAY (02)
WELCOME TO ABC

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 120

LARGE LCD OPTIONS

Samsung Business Communications

2-221

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[720] COPY KEY PROGRAMMING
Provides a tool for duplicating key assignments from one phone to another. This can be
done on a per-station basis or on all stations, but not on a group of stations. A limitation is
that the original and target phones must be of the same type.(the same number of buttons)

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 720.
Display shows:

[201] COPY KEY

2) Enter the station number to copy to.(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume buttons to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all stations.

[205] COPY KEY

3) Enter station number to copy from.(e.g., 203)
and cursor returns to step 2.
OR
Press Volume buttons to make selection and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

[205] COPY KEY

FROM:NONE

FROM:NONE

FROM:203

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 107
MMC 721
MMC 722
MMC 723

2-222

KEY EXTENDER
SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[721] SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
Provides a service tool which minimizes the accidental loss of programmable buttons on
phones. First the data is saved and then the station can be replaced with another station type
or the keys can be reprogrammed to other features. Once testing or replacement is completed, the data can be restored to the individual station, providing the same type is in place.

CONDITIONS
This program must be used carefully because key programming data is saved to a common
programming database. When a new phone is connected, the system copies data from this
database to the new phone.

DEFAULT DATA
RESTORE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 721.
Display shows:

[201] SAVE KEY

2) Enter desired station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.

[205] SAVE KEY

3) Press Volume button to make function selection
and press Right Soft button to enter and return to
step 2.

[205] SAVE KEY

RESTORE

RESTORE

SAVE

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 107
MMC 722
MMC 723

KEY EXTENDER
STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING

Samsung Business Communications

2-223

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[722] STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
Allows the customizing of programmable buttons on specific phones and add-on modules
(AOMs). For phones, buttons 1 and 2 are set as CALL buttons by default. For AOMs, all
buttons are set as DS keys by default. Features are selected by pressing the dial keypad buttons the required number of times. For example, for OHVA, the number 6 is pressed three
times. If the BOSS key is required, 2 is pressed for the first letter B and then the Volume
button used to change the selection from BARGE to BOSS.
DIAL KEYPAD
COUNT

1

2

3

DIAL 2

AB

BARGE

CAD

DIAL 3

DGPALM

EP

FAUTO

DIAL 4

GPIK

HDSET

ICONF

DIAL 5

LANREQ

LANREQ

LANREQ

DIAL 6

MMPA

NEW

OHVA

DIAL 7

PAGE

PAGE

RB

DIAL 8

TG

UA

VG

DIAL 9

WAKEUP

XCHIN

WAKEUP

4

SETDND

WAKEUP

Programmable Button Assignments
Feature

Description

Feature

Description

AB

ABSENCE

MMPG

MEET ME PAGE

ABAND

ABANDONED CALL

MS

MANUAL
SIGNALLING

ABW

AGENT BUSY/WRAP UP

MSG

MESSAGE

ACC

ACCOUNT

MUTE

MUTE

MW

MESSAGE WAIT

AN/RLS

ANSWER/RELEASE

NEW

NEW CALL

BARGE

BARGE-IN

NND

NAME NUMBER
DATE

BILL

BILL(Hotel Feature)

NOCLIP

NO CID SEND

BLOCK

OHVA BLOCK

NPG

NETWORK
PAGE

BOOTH

BOOTH(Hotel Feature)

NS

NETWORK
STATION

BOSS

2-224

BOSS/SECRETARY

NXT

CID NEXT

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

(continued)
Feature

Description

Feature

Description

CAD

CALL ACTIVITY DISPLAY

OHVA

OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE

CALL

CALL BUTTON

OPER

OPERATOR

CAMP

STATION CAMP-ON

PAGE

PAGE

CANMG

MESSAGE CANCEL

PAGPK

PICKUP PAGE HOLD

CBK

CALLBACK

PARK

CALL PARK ORBIT

CC

CALL COVERAGE

PAUSE

PAUSE

CCBS

ISDN CALL BACK

CHIN

CHECK IN(Hotel Feature)

PMSG

PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE

CHOUT

CHECK OUT(Hotel Feature)

PRB

PRIVACY RELEASE AND BRIDGE

CHOICE

CHOICE

PROG

SET PROGRAM

(Related to News Server)
CLIP

CALLER ID

PTHR

PATH REPLACEMENT

CONF

CONFERENCE

RB

ROOM BILL(Hotel Feature)

CONP

CONNECTED NAME

REJECT

OHVA REJECT

RETRY

AUTO REDIAL ON BUSY

DISPLAY
CR

CALL RECORD
(Requires SVMi card)

CREDIT

CREDIT(Hotel Feature)

REVW

REVIEW

CS

CALL STATUS

RP

RING PLAN

CSNR

CALLER ID SAVE NUMBER

RSV

ROOM STATUS VIEW

REDIAL
DGPALM

EASY ALARM SET TO

(Hotel Feature)
RTO

RING PLAN TIME OVERRIDE

REMOTE STATION
DICT

DICTATION

SETDND

SET DO NOT DISTURB

DIR

DIRECTORY

SETMG

SET MESSAGE W/O RING

DIVERT

EXECUTIVE CALL DIVERT

SG

STATION GROUP

SLOCAT

STAFF LOCATOR(Hotel Feature)

SMDR

SMDR KEY

TO SECRETARY
DLOCK

DOOR LOCK

DND

DO NOT DISTURB

SNR

SAVED NUMBER REDIAL

DNDO

DO NOT DISTURB

SP

UCD SUPERVISOR

OVERRIDE
DP

DIRECT PICKUP

SPD

SPEED DIAL

DROP

CALL DROP

SPKR

SPEAKER

DS

DSS KEY

SSET

ISDN SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE
SET

Samsung Business Communications

2-225

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

(continued)
Feature

Description

DT

DTS KEY

ECT

EXPLICIT CALL TRANSFER

EP

ESTABLISHED CALL

Feature

Description

STATE

SET EXECUTIVE STATE

STORE

STORE DISPLAYED NUMBER

SYSALM

SYSTEM ALARMS

TCLIP

TEMP CLIP

PICKUP
EXTMIC

EXTERNAL MIC

FAUTO

FORCED AUTO ANSWER

TG

TRUNK GROUP

FLASH

FLASH

TIMER

TIMER

FWRD

CALL FORWARD

TP

TERMINAL PORTABILITY

TRARPT

TRAFFIC REPORT

GPIK

GROUP PICKUP

TRSF

TRANSFER

HDSET

HEADSET MODE

UA

UNIVERSAL ANSWER

HLDPK

HOLD PICKUP

HOLD

HOLD

VM

VOICE MAIL MEMO
(Requires SVMi card)

HOTEL

HOTEL(Hotel Feature)

VMADM

VOICE MAIL ADMINISTRATION
(Requires SVMi card)

ICONF

ISDN 3 PTY CONFERENCE

VMAME

ANSWER MACHINE EMULATION
(Requires SVMi card)

IDISC

ISDN 3 PTY

VMMSG

DISCONNECTION
IG

IN/OUT GROUP

IHOLD

ISDN 3-PARTY HOLD

INFDSP

INFORMATION DISPLAY

VOICE MAIL MESSAGE KEY
(Requires SVMi card)

(Requires News/Call Plus)
INQIRE

INQUIRE

IRET

ISDN 3 PTY RETRIEVE

ISPY

CID SPY

LCR

LEAST COST ROUTING

VT

VOICEMAIL TRANSFER

WAKEUP

WAKE UP(Hotel Feature)

XCHIN

EXPRESS CHECK IN
(Hotel Feature)

2-226

LISTN

GROUP LISTENING

LNR

LAST NUMBER REDIAL

LOG

CALL LOGGING

MMPA

MEET ME PAGE ANSWER

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

DEFAULT DATA
For phones, buttons 1 and 2 are set as CALL buttons by default.(Other settings depend on
the keyset type.) For AOMs, all buttons are set as DSS buttons by default.

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 722.
Display shows:

[201] KEY (MAST)

2) Enter selected station number.(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

[205] KEY (MAST)

3) Enter selected key number.(e.g., 18)
OR
Press Volume button to select key number and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

[201] KEY (MAST)

4) Using table above, press dial keypad to select number.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance cursor to step 5 to
enter extender, if required, or to return to step 2.

[201] KEY PROG.

5) Enter extender if required.(e.g., 03)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to return to step 2.

[201] KEY PROG.

01:CALL1Æ

01:CALL1Æ

18:NONEÆ_

18:NONEÆGPIK_

18:NONEÆGPIK03

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 107
MMC 720
MMC 721

KEY EXTENDER
COPY KEY PROGRAMMING
SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

Samsung Business Communications

2-227

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[723] SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
This MMC is similar to MMC 722, Station Key Programming, except that changes are
made system-wide rather than on a per-station basis. Features are entered via the dial keypad by pressing numbers as shown in the table.
TYPE OF PHONE
No

Type of Phone

Description

00

24 BTN SETS

Phone with 24 program buttons

01

12 BTN SETS

Phone with 12 program buttons

03

EU 6B SETS

EU phone with 6 program buttons

05

48/64 BTN AOMS

AOM with 48/64 program buttons

06

20 BTN SETS

Phone with 20 program buttons

07

28 BTN SETS

Phone with 28 program buttons

08

18 BTN SETS

Phone with 18 program buttons

09

8 BTN SETS

Phone with 8 program buttons

10

99 BTN SETS

Phone with 99 program buttons

11

38 BTN SETS

Phone with 38 program buttons

12

21 BTN SETS

Phone with 21 program buttons

13

14 BTN SETS

Phone with 14 program buttons

14

DS-07S SETS

7000 Range phone

DIAL KEYPAD
COUNT

1

2

3

DIAL 2

AB

BARGE

CAD

DIAL 3

DGPALM

EP

FAUTO

DIAL 4

GPIK

HDSET

ICONF

DIAL 5

LANREQ

LANREQ

LANREQ

DIAL 6

MMPA

NEW

OHVA

DIAL 7

PAGE

PAGE

RB

DIAL 8

TG

UA

VG

DIAL 9

WAKEUP

XCHIN

WAKEUP

4

SETDND

WAKEUP

See Programmable Button Assignments in MMC 722.

2-228

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

DEFAULT DATA
SEE DEFAULT DATA IN MMC 722

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 723.
Display shows:

TYPE:24 BTN SETS

2) Enter type of set via dial keypad.(e.g.,1)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.

TYPE:12 BTN SETS

3) Enter key number.(e.g., 03)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.

TYPE:12 BTN SETS

4) Using table above, press dial keypad to select number.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance cursor to step
5 to enter extender, if required.
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 3.

TYPE:12 BTN SETS

5) Enter extender if required.(e.g., 03)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

TYPE:12 BTN SETS

01:CALL1Æ

01:CALL1Æ

03:NONEÆ

03:NONEÆGPIK

03:GPIKÆGPIK03

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 107
MMC 720
MMC 721

KEY EXTENDER
COPY KEY PROGRAMMING
SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING

Samsung Business Communications

2-229

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[724] DIAL NUMBERING PLAN
This MMC allows the technician to change directory numbers for stations, trunks, station
groups, trunk groups and feature access codes. The system can be pre-programmed with
default 3- or 4-digit numbering for stations, station groups and trunk numbers depending
on the position of the DIP switches on the MCP card. There is an error message provided to
prevent the accidental duplication of a directory number or feature access code.
No
00

Type of Dial No
STN DIAL NO.

Description
This is where station directory numbers are changed or assigned.
Default: 201-2xx, 3xx(last 319) or 2001-2xxx

01

TRK DIAL NO.

This is where trunk directory numbers are changed or assigned.
Default: 701-7xx or 7001-7xxx

02

AA/VD DIAL NO

Not used

03

MISC DIAL NO.

This is where directory numbers for relays, MOH ports and the
alarm sensor are changed or assigned.
Default: MISC01:371
MISC02: 361
MISC03:362
MISC04:3999

04
05
06

STNG DIAL

This is where station group numbers are changed or assigned.

NUMBER

Default: 500-5xx or 5001-5xxx

TRKG DIAL

This is where trunk group numbers are changed or assigned.

NUMBER

Default: The first is 9 or 0, 800-809

FEAT DIAL NUMBER

This is where feature access codes are changed or assigned. Dialling codes are entered via the dial keypad by pressing a number
the required number of times to select the feature. For example, for
OHVA, the number 6 would be pressed three times.
Please remember that this program is system-wide.

07

S0 STN DIAL NO.

This is where directory numbers for BRI station ports are changed
or assigned.
Default: 8701-8708

09

NTWK LCR DIAL NO

This is where additional LCR access codes are entered if two or
more OfficeServ 7100 systems are networked together.
Default: NONE

2-230

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

(continued)
No
10

Type of Dial No
VIRT EXT DIAL NO

Description
This is where virtual station directory numbers are
changed or assigned.
Default: SLT: 3501-3508, DGP: 3401-3416

11

MGI DIAL NO.

This is where MGI port directory numbers are changed or
assigned.
Default: 3801-38xx

12

IP STN DIAL NO.

This is where IP-based station directory numbers are
changed or assigned.
Default: 3201-3208

13

WLAN DIAL NO,

This is where IP-based station directory numbers are
changed or assigned.
Default: 3301-3308

14

SPNET DIAL NO

This is where Samsung proprietary switch-to-switch VoIP
networking trunk signalling port directory numbers are
changed or assigned.
Default: 8301-8308

15

H323 TRK DIAL NO

This is where VoIP H.323 trunk signalling port directory
numbers are changed or assigned.
Default: 8401-8408

16

SIP TRK DIAL NO

This is where VoIP SIP trunk signalling port directory
numbers are changed or assigned.
Default: 8501-8508

FEATURE NUMBERING DIAL KEYPAD
COUNT

1

2

3

DIAL 2

AB

BARGE

CAD

DIAL 3

DGPALM

EP

FAUTO

DIAL 4

GPIK

HDSET

ICONF

DIAL 5

LANREQ

LANREQ

LANREQ

DIAL 6

MMPA

NEW

OHVA

DIAL 7

PAGE

PAGE

RB

DIAL 8

TG

UA

VG

DIAL 9

WAKEUP

XCHIN

WAKEUP

Samsung Business Communications

4

SETDND

WAKEUP

2-231

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

Feature Code Assignments and Default
Feature

2-232

Default

Description

ABAND

64

ABANDONED CALL

ABS

NONE

ABSENCE

ABW

NONE

AGENT BUSY/WRAP UP

ACCT

47

ACCOUNT

ALLCLR

NONE

ALL CLEAR

AUTH

NONE

AUTHORIZATION CODE

BARGE

NONE

BARGE-IN

BILL

NONE

BILL(Hotel Feature)

BLOCK

NONE

OHVA BLOCK

BOSS

NONE

BOSS/SECRETARY

CAMP

45

STATION CAMP-ON

CANMG

42

MESSAGE CANCEL

CBK

44

CALLBACK

CHIN

NONE

CHECK IN(Hotel Feature)

CHOUT

NONE

CHECK OUT(Hotel Feature)

CHOICE

NONE

CHOICE(Related to News Server)

CONF

46

CONFERENCE

CONP

NONE

CONNECTED NAME DISPLAY

CR

NONE

CALL RECORD(Requires SVMi card)

CREDIT

NONE

CREDIT(Hotel Feature)

DGPALM

NONE

EASY ALARM SET TO REMOTE STATION

DICT

NONE

DICTATION

DIR

NONE

DIRECTORY

DIRPK

65

DIRECT PICKUP

DISALM

58

DISA ALARM CLEAR

DIVERT

NONE

EXECUTIVE CALL DIVERT TO SECRETARY

DLOCK

13

DOOR UNLOCK

DND

40

DO NOT DISTURB

DNDO

NONE

DO NOT DISTURB OVERRIDE

E-LCR1

NONE

SECOND LCR DIGIT TRANSLATION

E-LCR2

NONE

SECOND LCR DIGIT TRANSLATION

E-LCR3

NONE

SECOND LCR DIGIT TRANSLATION

E-LCR4

NONE

SECOND LCR DIGIT TRANSLATION

FAUTO

14

FORCED AUTO ANSWER

FLASH

49

FLASH

FWD

60

CALL FORWARD

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

(continued)
Feature

Default

Description

GRPK

66

GROUP PICKUP

HDSET

NONE

HEADSET MODE

HLDPK

12

HOLD PICKUP

HOLD

11

HOLD

HOTEL

NONE

HOTEL(Hotel Feature)

ICONF

NONE

ISDN 3-PARTY CONFERENCE

IDISC

NONE

ISDN 3-PARTY DISCONNECTION

IG

53

IN/OUT GROUP

IHOLD

NONE

ISDN 3-PARTY HOLD

INFDSP

NONE

INFORMATION DISPLAY(Requires News/Call Plus)

IRET

NONE

ISDN 3-PARTY RETRIEVE

LCR

#

LEAST COST ROUTING

LISTN

NONE

GROUP LISTENING

LNR

19

LAST NUMBER REDIAL

LOG

NONE

CALL LOGGING

MMPA

56

MEET ME PAGE ANSWER

MMPG

54

MEET ME PAGE

MSG

43

MESSAGE

MYGRPK

28

MY PICKUP GROUP CALL PICKUP

NEW

NONE

NEW CALL

NOCLIP

NONE

NO CID SEND

NPAGE

NONE

NETWORK PAGE

OHVA

NONE

OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE

OPER

0

OPERATOR

PAGE

55

PAGE

PAGPK

10

PICKUP PAGE HOLD

PARK

NONE

CALL PARK ORBIT

PMSG

48

PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE

PTHR

NONE

PATH REPLACEMENT

RB

NONE

ROOM BILL(Hotel Feature)

REJECT

NONE

OHVA REJECT

RP

NONE

RING PLAN

RSV

NONE

ROOM STATUS VIEW(Hotel Feature)

RTO

NONE

RING PLAN TIME OVERRIDE

SELFID

NONE

SELF SYSTEM ID

Samsung Business Communications

2-233

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

(continued)
Feature

Default

Description

SETMG

41

SET MESSAGE W/O RING

SLOCAT

NONE

STAFF LOCATOR(Hotel Feature)

SLTALM

NONE

EASY ALARM SET TO SELF STATION

SLTMMC

15

NORMAL PHONE PROGRAMMING

SNR

17

SAVED NUMBER REDIAL

SPEED

16

SPEED DIAL

SRELOC

NONE

SET RELOCATION

SSET

NONE

ISDN SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE SET

STATE

NONE

SET EXECUTIVE STATE

TCLIP

NONE

TEMP CLIP

TP

NONE

TERMINAL PORTABILIY

UA

67

UNIVERSAL ANSWER

VMADM

NONE

VOICE MAIL ADMINISTRATION(Requires SVMi card)

VMAME

NONE

ANSWER MACHINE EMULATION(Requires SVMi card)

VMMEMO

NONE

VOICE MAIL MEMO(Requires SVMi card)

VMMSG

NONE

VOICE MAIL MESSAGE KEY(Requires SVMi card)

VMSCMT

NONE

VMS COMMENT(Requires SVM -800)

VMSMSG

NONE

VMS MESSAGE(Requires SVM -800)

WAKEUP

18

WAKE UP(Hotel Feature)

WCOS

59

WORKING CLASS OF SERVICE

DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
FEATURE CODES DEPEND ON COUNTRY

2-234

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 724.
Display shows:

STN DIAL NUM:C1

2) Dial option number to make selection.(e.g., 06)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance cursor.

FEAT DIAL NUMBER

3) Dial first letter of feature name.(e.g., 7)
OR

FEAT NUMBER PLAN

Press Volume button to make selection then press
Right Soft button to advance cursor.
4) Enter digits(e.g., 63) via the dial keypad.

S2-P01:201Æ

ABAND :64Æ_

PAGE :55Æ

FEAT NUMBER PLAN
PARK :NONEÆ_

FEAT NUMBER PLAN
PARK :NONEÆ63

5) Press Right Soft button to enter change and
continue to make changes.
If an error message appears indicating duplication
of access code, enter 1 for YES for change or
enter 0 for NO for no change.

FEAT NUMBER PLAN
PARK :NONEÆ63

SAME DIAL EXIST
CHANGE? Y:1,N:0

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
ALL MMCs

Samsung Business Communications

2-235

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[725] SMDR OPTIONS
Allows the system administrator to select the information printed on the SMDR report.
The following options may be selected:
No
00

Option
PAGE HEADER

Default
YES

Description
This option determines whether a page header will print
at the top of each page. This would normally be turned
off if SMDR is being sent to a Call Accounting machine.

01

LINE PER PAGE

66

This option selects the length of each page to determine
when to print the SMDR header. The number of lines is
in the range 01-99.

02

INCOMING CALL

YES

This option determines whether incoming calls will print
on SMDR.

03

OUTGOING CALL

YES

This option determines whether outgoing calls will print
on SMDR.

04

AUTHORIZE

NO

CODE

This option determines whether authorization codes will
print on SMDR. If this option is set to NO, ‘****’ is
printed on SMDR.

05

SMDR START

YES

TIME
06

IN/OUT GROUP

This option determines whether valid calls will include
the minimum call time in total call duration.

NO

This option allows a message, IN GROUP or OUT
GROUP, to be printed in the ‘digits dialled’ column each
time a station enters or leaves a group.

07

DND CALL

NO

This option allows a message, IN DND or OUT DND, to
be printed in the ‘digits dialled’ column each time a station enters or leaves DND.

08

WAKE-UP CALL

YES

This option determines whether stations receiving an
alarm reminder call will print on SMDR.

09

DIRECTORY

NONE

NAME

This option allows the system administrator to enter a
name up to 16 characters which will appear on the
SMDR header.

10

CALLER ID DATA

NO

This option can be selected to print Caller ID data received from the Central Office on incoming calls.
This option requires the use of a 132-column wide carriage
printer or an 80-column printer set for condensed print.

11

ABANDON CALL

NO

If this option is set to YES, unanswered calls for which
CID information was received will print on SMDR.

13

NO. OF DIAL
MASK

0

If this option is set to a numeric value, the selected last
digits of the number dialled field will be masked as asterisks(*) on the SMDR print out. Maximum masked
digits is 18. First 4 digits will not mask.

2-236

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

(continued)
No
15

Option
INCOMING

Default
NO

ANSWER
16

INTERCOM CALL

Description
If this option is set to YES, the duration of calls ringing
before being answered will print on SMDR.

NO

This option determines whether intercom calls will print
on SMDR.

17

KEY MMC IN/OUT

NO

If set to YES the SMDR record will show programming
being opened and closed in MMC 200 and MMC 800.

20

HOTEL PAGE

END

FEED
21

HOTEL START

0

LINE
23

DID NUM/NAME

This option determines where the page feed is inserted
on HM REPT.(Hotel Application Only)
This option determines that the number of empty lines
per each page on HM REPT.(Hotel Application Only)

YES

If this option is set to YES, received DID information will
print on SMDR.

24

ITP

NO

REGISTRATION
25

SET
RELOCATION

If set to YES the SMDR record will show registration of
ITP phones.

NO

If set to YES the SMDR record will show Set Relocations.

ENTERING CHARACTERS
Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
SOME OPTIONS DEPEND ON COUNTRY

Samsung Business Communications

2-237

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 725.
Display shows:

PAGE HEADER

2) Dial the option number.(e.g., 01)
OR
Use the Volume buttons to scroll through
the options and press Right Soft button
to select an option.

LINE PER PAGE

3) Enter the option data.
OR
Use the Volume buttons to press Right
Soft button to save the data and return to step 2.

LINE PER PAGE

PRINT: YES

60 LINE/PAGE

50 LINE/PAGE

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 300

2-238

CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[727] SYSTEM VERSION DISPLAY
This MMC is used for system version display only.(READ ONLY) The displays depend on
which modules are included in the system

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 727.
Display shows:

MP10-MAIN VERS
07.02.26 V4.01.p

2) Press Volume button to show other modules, e.g.,:
SP Modules

MP10-SP VERS
07.02.26 V1.01.e

VMS Modules

MP10-VMS VERS
07.02.26 V4.01.p

DATA Modules

MP10-DATA VERS
NO VERSION DATA

3) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-239

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[728] CID TRANSLATION TABLE
Allows the system administrator or technician to associate a CID number received from the
central office with a name programmed in this translation table. If there is no match between a received number and a name in this table, ‘no CID name’ will be displayed.
The translation table consists of 1000 entries. Each entry comprises a telephone number up
to 14 digits and a name up to 16 digits.

ENTERING CHARACTERS
Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 728.
Display shows first entry

CLIP XLAT(0001)

2) Dial entry number.(e.g., 0005)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through entries
and press Right Soft button to select entry.

CLIP XLAT (0005)

3) Enter telephone number and press Right Soft
button to advance to name entry.
OR
Enter telephone number and press Left Soft
button to return to step 2.

CLIP XLAT (0005)

4) Enter associated name and press Right Soft button
to return to step 2.

CLIP XLAT (0005)

DGT:

DGT:_

DGT:3054264100

SAMSUNG TELECOM

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 312
MMC 608

2-240

ALLOW CALLER ID
ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCK

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[740] STATION PAIR
Assigns a secondary station to a phone. This secondary station can be a keyset or single
line phone. The secondary station assumes the Call Forwarding, Class of Service, LCR
Class, and DND attributes of the primary station. The secondary station will ring when the
primary station rings, and vice versa. Features can be set or cancelled at either station.

When changing the COS

If the COS is changed for either station in MMC 301, the change affects
both stations. Messages from the secondary extension will display the
secondary extension number.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 740.
Display shows

[201] PRIMARY

2) Enter the primary station number via dial

[201] PRIMARY

Keypad.(e.g., 201)

SECONDARY:NONE

SECONDARY:NONE

OR
Use Volume button to select and press Right Soft
button.
3) Enter the secondary station number via dial
Keypad.(e.g., 205)
OR
Use Volume button to select and press Right Soft
button.

[201] PRIMARY
SECONDARY:205

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 102
MMC 301
MMC 310

CALL FORWARD
ASSIGN STATION COS
LCR CLASS OF SERVICE

Samsung Business Communications

2-241

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[746] COSTING DIAL PLAN
The COSTING DIAL PLAN is used to analyze the leading dialled digits of a dialled number and determine what DIAL PLAN it is to follow. Data entry for this program is in three
fields: ENTRY, DIGITS and COST RATE table reference.
DIGITS
Up to 500 entries may be made. Each entry can be up to 10 digits. These are the entries that
will be searched to find a match with the digits dialled by the station making the call. This
is a leading digits table and the system will look for the exact leading digits in the table that
match the number dialled. For example, if a user dials 1305 and the COSTING DIAL
PLAN contains 1, 1308 and 1312, the dialled digits will be matched to 1 because 1308 and
1312 do not form a complete match. When this table is created by the technician or when
any new entries are added, the system automatically places all entries in numerical order.
Wild cards(∗) can be used to represent any digit. The Toll Restriction Wild Card Character
assignment(MMC 704) is common with Call Costing and Toll Restriction. When all entries
are used, [LAST ENTRY] is displayed.
DIAL PLAN
This shows in the programming display as DP and represents a pattern(1-7, 8). This pattern
is used by MMC 433, TRUNK COST RATE, to determine the correct billing according to
MMC 749, RATE CALCULATION TABLE
When the system finds a DIAL PLAN match for the digits dialled, the system checks
MMC 749 to see what RATE CALCULATION to use for costing the call.
EXAMPLES
When a station user dials a number, the system will search the COSTING DIAL PLAN to
find a match. If 13056 is dialled and this MMC contains entries 1, 13, 1305 and 1401, the
closest match is 1305 and this will be selected. If 1305 is dialled and this MMC contains
entries 1, 13, 13056 and 1401, no action will be taken until the station user dials another
digit. If the next digit is 6, the 13056 entry is the closest match and this entry will be selected, but if the next digit is anything other than 6, the 13 entry is the closest match.
Whenever a new entry is added, the system will sort all entries in numerical order because
this is the logical order in which the system analyzes digits. Wild cards are checked after
exact digits. If 1813 and 18∗∗ are entered, the system will check 1813 first. If no match is
found, it will check 18∗∗.

2-242

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 746.
Display shows:

COST DP

2) Dial CALL COST entry.(e.g., 005)
OR
Press Volume button to select entry and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

COST DP

3) Enter digit string via the dial keypad and
press Right Soft button.

COST DP

4) Enter DIAL PLAN 1-8.(e.g., 8)
OR
Press Volume button to select dial plan and
press Right Soft button to save and return to step 2.

COST DP

(001)

DIGIT:

(005)

DIGIT:_

(005)

DIGIT:1305

(005)

CALL RATE: 8

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 433
MMC 747

COST RATE
RATE CALCULATION TABLE

Samsung Business Communications

2-243

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[747] RATE CALCULATION TABLE
The RATE CALCULATION TABLE is used to define the billing charges for each COST
RATE. These rate tables correlate with the Trunk Cost Rate and the Costing Dial Plan.
There are eight call costing rates. Each rate has the following data fields.
No
0

1

Type

Description

1ST DUR

This is the amount of time at the beginning of each call to which a

(FIRST INTERVAL

fixed cost is applied.

DURATION)

The range is 0-999 seconds; e,g. 180 seconds(three minutes).

1ST COST

This is the cost for the first interval duration in £s sterling or Euros.

(FIRST INTERVAL

The range is 0 to 999; e.g., 345(£3.45 or €3.45).

COST)
2

3

4

2ND DUR

This is the duration of each billing increment after the first interval

(SECOND INTER-

has expired.

VAL DURATION)

The range is 0-999 seconds; e.g., 006 seconds(six seconds).

2ND COST

This is the cost for each billing increment, in £s sterling or Euros,

(SECOND INTER-

after the first interval has expired.

VAL COST )

The range is 0-999; e.g., 100(£1.00 or €1.00).

SURCHARGE

This is a one-time charge, in £s sterling or Euros, that is applied to
the call over and above the time charges.
The range is 0-999; e.g.,150(£1.50 or €1.50).

Currency values(£ or €)

Currency values(£ or €) depend on the setting for the USE EURO option
in MMC 210.

DEFAULT DATA
ALL COST RATES: NO DATA

ACTION

2-244

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 747.
Display shows:

COST RATE (1)

2) Dial COST RATE number 1-8.(e.g., 3)
OR
Press Volume button to select COST RATE and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

COST RATE (3)

1ST DUR :000 SEC

1ST DUR :000 SEC

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

3) Dial option number 0-4.(e.g., 1)
OR
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

COST RATE (3)

4) Enter data via dial keypad.(e.g., 125=1.25)
OR
Press Volume button to select data and press
Right Soft button to save and return to step 3.

COST RATE (3)

1ST COST:000

1ST COST:125

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 433
MMC 746

COST RATE
COSTING DIAL PLAN

Samsung Business Communications

2-245

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[750] VM CARD RESTART
This MMC is used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail card.
There are four options available in this MMC:
No
0

Option
MBX DOWNLOAD

Description
When the Built-In Voice Mail module starts, part of the power up
procedure will download data from the system to determine time,
date, what mailboxes to create, and system numbering plan. This
must be done at least once, but once done this download feature
can be turned NO to save boot up time.

2

VIRTUAL NUMBER

This option is determine which type virtual port include during

DOWNLOAD

mailbox and system numbering plan downloading procedure.
The virtual port type are followed:
No

Type

Description

0

VIRTUAL EXT

Virtual extension number

1

DESKTOP ITP

DESKTOP IP-based phone number

2

DECT PHONE

DECT terminal number

3

MOBILE ITP

Wireless IP-based mobile phone number

3

VM CONNECTION

4

BRI STATION

ISDN terminal number

5

VOIP NET TRK

VoIP networking trunk number

6

VOIP 323 TRK

VoIP H.323 trunk number

7

VOIP SIP TRK

VoIP SIP trunk number

8

REMOTE STN

Remote station number via networking

Select VMS Type. There are 3 types: SVMi CARD, DLI CONNECT, IP-UMS SERVER(impossible simultaneously use all type)

DEFAULT DATA
ALL OPTIONS ARE NO

2-246

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 750.
Display shows:

MBX DOWNLOAD

2) Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button.

VM RESTART

3) Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.

VM RESTART

NO

RESET NOW ? NO

RESET NOW ? YES

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-247

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[751] ASSIGN MAILBOX
This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail card. It assigns mailboxes to
each station or group as required. During Voice Mail card power up, mailboxes will be created for each directory number with a ‘YES’ entry. Once the Voice Mail database has been
created, new mailboxes can be added:
y

Through Voice Mail administration.

y

By adding a new mailbox in this MMC.

If a mailbox is to be removed, this must be done through Voice Mail administration.
If a station that does not have an associated mailbox calls the Voice Mail system, it will be
answered by the Voice Mail system main greeting.

CONDITIONS
Mailboxes that are needed for users who do not have an extension must be added through
Voice Mail programming.

DEFAULT DATA
ALL STATIONS: YES
ALL GROUPS: NO

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 751.
Display shows:.

ASSIGN MAIL BOX

2) Dial station number.
OR
Press Volume button to scroll the number and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

ASSIGN MAIL BOX

3) Dial 0 for NO or 1 for YES.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to save and return to step 2.

ASSIGN MAIL BOX

[201] YES

[202] YES

[202] NO

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-248

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[752] AUTO RECORD
This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail card. Specific stations in the
phone system can be assigned to automatically record conversations. When this option is
set, all incoming, all outgoing, or all calls(incoming and outgoing) can be recorded.
In this MMC you can assign:
y

Station number: Which station can use this feature.

y

Mailbox number: What mailbox the conversations are recorded in.

y

I, O or B: What type of calls are recorded.(in, out or both)

y

Voice mail port number: What port is dedicated to the station.

Before using the Auto Record feature
Before using the Auto Record feature, make sure that you are not violating any
laws. Samsung is not responsible for any illegal use of this feature.

CONDITIONS
A maximum of eight stations can use this feature at one time. The same port cannot be assigned to more than one station. Attempts to do this will result in an error message. When a
Voice Mail port is assigned here, it is automatically removed from the Voice Mail group defined in MMC 601.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 752.
Display shows:

AUTO RECORD

2) Dial station number via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

AUTO RECORD

3) Dial mailbox number via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

AUTO RECORD

Samsung Business Communications

STN:201 MB:NONE

STN:201 MB:NONE

STN:201 MB:201

2-249

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

4) Dial VM number via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

AUTO RECORD

5) Dial call type via dial keypad.(0: I, 1: O or 2: B)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

AUTO RECORD

PORT:209 CALL:I

PORT:209 CALL:B

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-250

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[753] WARNING DESTINATION
This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail card. It provides an emergency destination for calls destined for the card if the card is removed or is offline.
In addition, any calls that are forwarded to the card will not forward; they will remain ringing at the ‘fwd from’ station until answered. This destination can be a station number or a
group number.

DEFAULT DATA
5000

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 753.
Display shows:

WARNING DEST.

2) Dial station number or group number.
OR
Press Volume button to scroll through numbers
and select.

WARNING DEST.

DEST:500

DEST:501

3) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-251

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[754] VM HALT
This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail. It is used to halt the Voice
Mail Module. If the Voice Mail module is halted by using this MMC, system has to restart
to use the Voice Mail module again. At that time, ‘RESTART’ option can be used.

DEFAULT DATA
RESTART

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 754.
Display shows:

VM HALT

2) Enter 1 to HALT or 0 to PROC
OR
Press Volume button to select.

VM HALT

3) If you select 1 to halt, display shows:

VM HALT

Press 1 to confirm.

STATUS:RESTART

STATUS:RESTART

ARE YOU SURE? YES

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-252

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[755] VM ALARM
This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail. It will generate an alarm
message in the mailbox defined in MMC 751 whenever the Voice Mail disk drive reaches a
threshold.
The threshold is measured as a percentage of capacity. This means that if the MMC is set
for 80, the alarm will be generated when the disk exceeds 80% of the available drive space.

DEFAULT DATA
THRESHOLD: 80%

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 755.
Display shows:

VM ALARM

2) Enter new threshold level.(e.g., 70)

VM ALARM

THRESHOLD:80

THRESHOLD:70

3) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-253

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[756] ASSIGN VMMOH
This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail. It is used to assign each port
a Music-On-Hold source for the system from a sound file located on the Voice Mail card
hard disk drive. The 100 available sound files are defined as numbers 5000 to 5099.
To use the default music, select the number; otherwise, make sure you record the sound file
first. Then, assign the sound file to a Voice Mail port.
For example, if you record sound file 5025 you would associate 25 with a specific Voice
Mail port, e.g., 301. This will dedicate the port for use only as MOH and remove it from
group 529 or 549. Now 301will show up as a valid music source in MMCs 308, 309 and
408.
Each Music-On-Hold source assigned here requires one Voice Mail port.

When the first Built-In Voice Mail port is used for VMMOH
If the first Built-In Voice Mail port is used for VMMOH, it must be disabled before
boot up since Built-In Voice Mail and the system use port 1 during boot up to exchange critical information. For this reason we suggest you use the last port as
VMMOH ports.

DEFAULT DATA
NOT USED

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 756.
Display shows:

SET VMMOH

2) Dial VM number.(e.g., 301)
OR

SET VMMOH

301 : NOT USED

301: NOT USED

Press Volume button to make a selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter VM message number.(e.g., 25)

OR
Press Volume button to make a selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

SET VMMOH
301: 25

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE
2-254

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[757] VM IN/OUT
This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail. It is used to assign each
Voice Mail port as used for incoming, outgoing or both-way calls. This MMC must support
outgoing calls if off-premises notification(beeper, outbound follow me or outbound notification) is used.

DEFAULT DATA
IN/OUT

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 757.
Display shows:

VM IN/OUT

2) Dial VM number.(e.g., 301)
OR
Press Volume button to make a selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

VM IN/OUT

3) Enter option via dial keypad.(e.g., IN)
OR
Press Volume button to make a selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

VM IN/OUT

301: IN/OUT

301: IN/OUT

301: IN

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-255

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[758] VM DAY/NIGHT
This MMC is only used for the Samsung Built-In Voice Mail. The module can operate in
either a DAY or NIGHT operating mode. The mode determines what main menu greetings
and options are played to callers and can change automatically (if enabled in the card) according to the settings in this MMC.
This MMC contains either a DAY or NIGHT instruction for each Ring Plan.

DEFAULT DATA
ALL RING PLANS: DAY

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 758.
Display shows:

VM DAY/NIGHT

2) Enter ring plan number.
OR
Press Volume button to make a selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

VM DAY/NIGHT

3) Dial 0 for day or 1 for night.
OR
Press Volume button to make a selection and
press Right Soft button to save and move cursor.

VM DAY/NIGHT

RING 1 : DAY

RING 3 : DAY

RING 3 : DAY

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 507

2-256

ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[759] CLI RINGING
This MMC assigns a specific CID number received from the central office to a specific
ring plan destination. Also allows you to reject a specific CID number and assign priorities.
There are 9 priority levels: priority 1 is the highest and priority 9 is the lowest.
It also allows you to select the ring tone heard at a phone when called by a specific CID number.
There is also a cadence control option to perform a similar function for SLTs. There are eight ring
tones available along with a Follow Station(NO) option. There are five cadences and a Follow
Station option(NO) for SLTs. The CID Ringing table consists of 100 entries.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE
Option

Description

CLI

CID number to be received from the central office. Up to 16 digits may be
entered.

REJ

CID call reject option. When this sets YES, if a call comes that matched CID
number and CLI field then the system will be reject call.

PRI

CID priority option. There are 9 priority levels: priority 1 is the highest and
priority 9 is the lowest. When calls into station group come and group members are all busy, the system will assign a priority to the CID number so that
calls from a high priority CID number will be placed at the front of the group
queue.
If this option sets NO, the longest call that placed at the group queue has
the highest priority.

R1: XXX, R2: XXX,
R3: XXX, R4: XXX,
R5: XXX, R6: XXX

Ring plan and destination during each ring plan. The destination can be a
station, station group.

TONE

Ring Tone options for a specific CID Number.(NO, 1~8)
No
1~8

CAD

Calls from the programmed CID number will ring phones with this
ring frequency.

Ring Cadence options for a specific CID Number at SLT’s(NO, 1~5)
No

Samsung Business Communications

Calls will ring with the phone users choice of ring frequency.

Calls will ring with the normal SLT ring cadences.

1

Calls from the programmed CID number will ring SLT’s with the intercom
ring cadence.

2

Calls from the programmed CID number will ring SLT’s with the CO ring
cadence.

3

Calls from the programmed CID number will ring SLT’s with the DOOR
ring cadence.

4

Calls from the programmed CID number will ring SLT’s with the ALARM
ring cadence.

5

Calls from the programmed CID number will ring SLT’s with the CALLBACK ring cadence.

2-257

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 759.
Display shows:

CLI RINGING(001)

2) Dial entry number.(e.g., 005)
OR

CLI RINGING(005)

CLI:

CLI:_

Press Volume button to make a selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Enter CID number and press Right Soft button
to advance to next entry.

CLI RINGING(005)
CLI:1234567

OR
Enter CID number and press Left Soft button
to return to step 2.
4) Enter reject option via dial keypad.
(1 for YES, 0 for NO)

CLI RINGING(005)
REJ:NO PRI:NO

OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
5) Enter priority level via dial keypad.(1-9 or NO)
OR

CLI RINGING(005)
REJ:NO PRI:NO

Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
6) Enter station or group number for each Ring.
Plan destination via dial keypad.(e.g., 501)

CLI RINGING(005)
R1:501 R2:NONE

OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
7) Dial 1-8(or NO) to select ring tone.(e.g., 2)
OR

CLI RINGING(005)
TONE:2 CAD:NO

Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
8) Dial 1-5(or NO) to select ring cadence.
OR

CLI RINGING(005)
TONE:2 CAD:NO

Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
9) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 312
2-258

ALLOW CALLER ID
Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[760] ITEM COST TABLE
This MMC provides a means to assign a code to a billable item along with a 10-character
name for the item. There are a maximum of 100 entries(00 to 99) in the table with item 00
reserved as the code for room deposits, 01 reserved as the code for phone deposits and
items 89 to 99 reserved for other PMS stream items.
These item codes, with the exception of codes 93 to 99, will appear on the guests’ bills at
checkout and will serve to identify what each charge on the bill is for. The room bill, when
printed, will also show telephone calls with an item designation of TEL and the name field
will show the number dialled. In addition to the name, up to eight of the tax codes or rates
defined in MMC 761 can be applied to each item.
PRE DEFINED CODES
No

Code

Description

00

Room Deposit

This is the code used for pre-pay room deposits.

01

Phone Deposit

This is the code used for pre-pay phone deposits.

02-88

-

User-Assignable code

89

W/UP SET

A wake up call was set.

90

W/UP ANS

A wake up call was answered.

91

W/UP N/ANS

A wake up call was not answered.

92

W/UP CANCL

A wake up call was cancelled.

93

Check In

A guest has checked into a room.

94

Check out

A guest has checked out of a room.

95

Available

A room has been flagged as AVAILABLE.

96

Occupied

A room has been flagged as OCCUPIED.

97

Clean Room

A room has been flagged as NEEDS CLEANING.

98

Fix Room

A room has been flagged as NEED MAINTENANCE.

99

Hold

A room has been flagged as HOLD.

CONDITIONS
This function can be used only when the Hotel function is enabled in MMC 813, HOTEL
OPERATION.

ENTERING CHARACTERS
Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

DEFAULT DATA
NO ENTRIES

Samsung Business Communications

2-259

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 760.
Display shows:

ITEM CODE (00)

2) Enter valid code number(e.g., 02) via dial
keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

ITEM CODE (02)

3) Enter item name(e.g., ROOM COST) via
keypad.

ITEM CODE (02)

4) Press Right Soft button to move cursor to tax
entries.

ITEM CODE (02)

5) Enter the tax rates that apply to this item(‘1’ selects
each rate) and press Right Soft button to return to
step 2.

ITEM CODE (02)

NAME:RM Deposit

NAME:

NAME: ROOM COST

TAXES:00000000

TAXES:11000000

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 761

2-260

TAX RATE SETUP

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[761] TAX RATE SETUP
This MMC allows the technician to set up the eight tax rates used in MMC 760. Each tax
rate may be defined as a fixed value or as a percentage of the item cost. In addition, a 10character name may be used to define the reason for the tax. The options are detailed below.
Option
TAX RATE

Description
The number assigned to this tax rate. Tax rates are numbered 1 to 8 to match the
rate field in MMC 760, counting from left to right.

TYPE

The type of tax. Defines if the VALUE is applied as a percentage(%) of the cost of
an item(e.g., service charge) or is added as a fixed currency value(C) to an item
or is applied as a Inclusive VAT percentage(I) of the cost of an item.

VALUE

The actual tax rate that will be applied to the item cost.

NAME

A 10-character name that will be displayed on the room bill alongside the tax.

CONDITIONS
This function can be used only when the Hotel function is enabled in MMC 813, HOTEL
OPERATION.

ENTERING CHARACTERS
Refer to ‘ENTERING CHARACTERS’ in MMC 104, STATION NAME.

DEFAULT DATA
ALL RATES ARE %

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 761.
Display shows:

TAX RATE

2) Enter valid tax number, e.g., 2, via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

TAX RATE

3) Dial 0 for ‘%’, 1 for ‘C’ or 2 for ‘I’.
(Refer to table above)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

TAX RATE

Samsung Business Communications

(1)

TYPE:% VAL:00.00

(2)

TYPE:% VAL:00.00

(2)

TYPE:C VAL:00.00

2-261

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

4) Enter the tax rate or value via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection.
If valid entry, system advances cursor.

TAX RATE

5) Enter name and press Right Soft button to return to
step 2.

TAX RATE

(2)

TYPE:C VAL:01.25

(2)

NAME:MIA BED

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 760

2-262

ITEM COST TABLE

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[762] ROOM COST RATE
This MMC allows the technician to set up the cost rates for a week. Each room cost rate
can be assigned with a percentage of the actual room cost from Sunday to Saturday.
EXAMPLE: If you set SUN: 150%, 1. MON: 100%, 2.TUE: 090% .
Then, if you set £100 as the room cost when checking in a guest, the real room cost will be
£150 on Sunday, £100 on Monday and £90 on Tuesday.

CONDITIONS
This function can be used only when the Hotel function is enabled in ‘MMC 813, HOTEL
OPERATION’.

DEFAULT DATA
ALL RATES ARE 100%

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 762.
Display shows:

RM COST RAT(SUN)

2) Dial day number 0-6.(e.g., 2)
OR
Press Volume button to select day and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

RM COST RAT(TUE)

3) Enter room cost rate.(001-999, e.g., 090)

RM COST RAT(TUE)

100% :

100% :

100% :090

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 760

ITEM COST TABLE

Samsung Business Communications

2-263

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[763] SECOND LCR
This MMC allows the technician to input the Extended LCR information table.
Max table index is 200. This table have translation and route information for input digits.
The last table(index 200) has only ‘NEXT ROUTE’ option. This is used for the case there
are no matching table for user input digits. NEXT ROUTE option can be set by LCR or
trunk group as follows.
Option
IN DIGIT

Description

Default

Define user input digits after E-LCR code

-

(Max 16 digits)
OUT DIGIT

Outgoing digits(these digits will be sent instead of input digits) (Max

-

16 digits)
USE LCR NUM

Select which E-LCR code(E-LCR1, E-LCR2, E-LCR3, E-LCR4)

ALL

used for this table index.
NEXT ROUTE

LCR

Select ‘LCR’ or trunk group to seizure.
‘LCR’ means that MMC710 LCR DIGIT table will be used with outgoing digits(OUT DIGIT).

CONDITIONS
MMC724 FEATURE CODE: E-LCR1, E-LCR2, E-LCR3, E-LCR4 addition

DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION

ACTION
1) Press Transfer button and enter 763.
Display shows:

(001)IN DIGIT

2) Dial Table number 001-200.
OR
Press Volume button to select Table number and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

(001)IN DIGIT

3) Enter IN DIGIT maximum 16 digits, and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

(001)IN DIGIT

4) Enter OUT DIGIT option number([1]).
OR
Press Volume button to select OUT DIGIT and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

2-264

DISPLAY

1234

(001)OUT DIGIT

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

5) Enter OUT DIGIT maximum 16 digits, and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

(001)OUT DIGIT

6) Enter USE LCR NUM option number([2]).
OR
Press Volume button to select USE LCR NUM and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

(001)USE LCR NUM

7) Enter USE LCR NUM maximum 16 digits, and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

(001)USE LCR NUM

8) Enter NEXT ROUTE option number([3]).
OR
Press Volume button to select NEXT ROUTE and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

(001)NEXT ROUTE

9) Enter USE LCR NUM maximum 16 digits, and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

(001)NEXT ROUTE

7500

9

LCR

10) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 310
MMC 711
MMC 712
MMC 713
MMC 724

LCR CLASS
LCR TIME
LCR ROUTE
LCR MODF. DGT
NUMBER PLAN

Samsung Business Communications

2-265

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[800] ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM
Used to open and close technician-level programming. If programming is not opened and
an attempt is made to access a system MMC, an error message will be displayed.

CONDITIONS
A 4-digit passcode is required to access this MMC. Each character can be digits 0-9. When
opened, this MMC enables access to all MMCs.

DEFAULT DATA
DISABLE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 800.
Display shows:

ENABLE TECH.PROG

2) Enter passcode.

ENABLE TECH.PROG

PASSCODE:

PASSCODE:∗∗∗∗

Correct code shows:

ENABLE TECH.PROG
DISABLE TENANT:1

Incorrect code shows:

ENABLE TECH. PROG
PASSCODE ERROR

3) Enter 1 to enable or 0 to disable.
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move tenant number and
enter tenant number(1-2).

ENABLE TECH.PROG

4) Press Speaker button to advance to MMC entry level.

801:TEC.PASSCODE

ENABLE TENANT:1

SELECT PROG.ID

5) Enter the MMC required to begin programming.
6) To log out and return to MMC 800, press
Volume button to select DISABLE.
OR
Press Speaker button then Transfer to return to
normal display.
Programming option will time out.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 801

2-266

CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[801] CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE
Used to change the passcode which allows access to MMC 800, Enable Technician Program, from its current value.

CONDITIONS
The passcode is four characters long. Each character can be digits 0-9. The current or old
passcode is required for this MMC.

DEFAULT DATA
DEFAULT PASSCODE: 4321

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 801.

TECH. PASSCODE
NEW CODE:_

2) Enter new passcode.

TECH. PASSCODE
NEW CODE:∗∗∗∗

3) Enter new passcode again.

TECH. PASSCODE
VERIFY :∗∗∗∗

4) If passcode is correct, press Right Soft
key to continue and enter desired MMC.
If passcode is incorrect.

TECH. PASSCODE
VERIFY :SUCCESS

TECH. PASSCODE
VERIFY :FAILURE

System returns to step 2.

TECH. PASSCODE
NEW CODE:∗∗∗∗

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 800

ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM

Samsung Business Communications

2-267

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[802] CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER
Allows the System Administrator(customer) to have access to certain MMCs. For example,
it is required that the customer has access to MMC 102, Call Forward, for call forwarding
but it is not required that the customer has access to MMC 710, LCR Digit Table, for LCR
dial plans.
This MMC is for both tenants.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 802.
Display shows:

CUST.USE MMC :1

2) Enter desired tenant number(1-2) via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

CUST.USE MMC :1

3) Enter desired MMC number via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

CUST.USE MMC :1

4) Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Left Soft button to return to step 3 to
make additional entries.

CUST.USE MMC :1

100:STN LOCK:YES

100:STN LOCK:YES

102:CALL FWD:YES

102:CALL FWD:NO

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-268

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[805] TX LEVEL AND GAIN
Allows the system administrator to set the base level of TX volume on phones. There are
eight levels that can be controlled by the Volume buttons on phones, and 10 controllable
levels in the system. This MMC allows the system administrator to classify any desired
eight levels within 11.
No

Option

0

TX LEVEL CONTROL

Description
Adjusts the transmitting sensitivity(max.: 9) Default values are:
INDEX:

1

MISC TSW GAIN

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

LEVEL: 0

1

2

4

3

5

6

7

Adjusts the level of the internal music source of the MCP card or
the external music source of the MIS card(0~7, higher numbers
mean lower levels). Default value is 0.

2

TSW GAIN

Adjusts the tone sensitivity. There are eight types of matrix connec-

CONTROL

tions of the T-Switch that adjust the tone sensitivity(0-7, below).
Connection between Trunk lines are only applicable when set as 0
in MMC 421.
0 DGP

DLI phone

1 SLT

SLI phone

2

ATRK Analogue trunk

3 DTRK Digital trunk
4 DECT DECT terminal
5 VOIP MGI port or IP-based phone
6

SVMi SVMi port

7 WLAN WIP port

When changing the MMC [805]
‘MMC [805] TX LEVEL AND GAIN’ should not be changed from the default levels
without the assistance of the local SAMSUNG distributor.

DEFAULT DATA
RX

DGP

SLT

ATRK

DTRK

DECT

VOIP

SVMi

WLAN

DGP Æ

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

-6.0

0.0

-6.0

+1.9

SLT Æ

0.0

-2.5

0.0

-2.5

-6.0

0.0

-6.0

+1.9

ATRK Æ

0.0

0.0

+1.9

-6.0

-6.0

0.0

-6.0

+1.9

DTRK Æ

0.0

-2.5

+1.9

0.0

-6.0

0.0

-6.0

0.0

DECT Æ

0.0

0.0

0.0

+1.9

-6.0

0.0

-6.0

0.0

VOIP Æ

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

-6.0

0.0

-6.0

0.0

SVMi Æ

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

-6.0

0.0

-6.0

0.0

WLAN Æ

-6.0

-2.5

-6.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

+1.9

TX

Samsung Business Communications

2-269

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 805.
Display shows:

TX LEVEL CONTROL

2) Press Volume button to make selection(0-3) and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

TX LEVEL CONTROL

3) (When the TX LEVEL CONTROL is selected)
a. Select the desired volume level via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to go to the next volume level
and press Right Soft button.
b. Enter desired volume data via dial keypad.
OR
4) (When the MISC TSW GAIN is selected)
a. Enter desired MISC/BGM TSW gain via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to select desired MISC/BGM
TSW gain and press Right Soft button.
5) (When the TSW GAIN CONTROL is selected)
a. Select the TX TWS connect type via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to go to the next TX TSW
connect type and press Right Soft button.

LEVEL 0Æ0

LEVEL 1Æ1

TX LEVEL CONTROL
LEVEL 1Æ1

TX LEVEL CONTROL
LEVEL 1Æ3

MISC TSW GAIN
BGM/MOH :0

TSW GAIN CONTROL
SLTÆDGP :+0.0

b. Select the RX TSW connect type via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to go to the next RX TSW
connect type and press Right Soft button.

TSW GAIN CONTROL

c. Enter desired TSW gain control data via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to scroll data and press
Right Soft button.

TSW GAIN CONTROL

SLTÆATRK:+0.0

SLTÆATRK:+1.9

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-270

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[806] CARD PRE-INSTALL
Allows the pre-programming of a card slot for a specific card type. A card inserted into a
system will not be recognized by the system until it is enabled using this MMC. Cards installed using this MMC will not be assigned in the system numbering plan—you should
use MMC 724 to assign the desired directory numbers to extensions, trunks, ports or miscellaneous functions.

When a card is removed and a different type card is inserted
If a card is removed and a different card is inserted, and this MMC is performed,
the memory associated with the previous card(e.g., key programming) will be
erased.

When a previous card is UNI Board and a current card is the same, but the
modules are changed
If a UNI card is removed and a UNI card which has different modules is inserted,
system will recognize automatically. So it does not need to preinstall.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 806.
Display shows:

C:1–S:1

2) Enter cabinet number via dial keypad.(e.g., 1)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.

C:1–S:1

3) Enter slot number via dial keypad.(e.g., 6)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.

C:1–S:6

4) Dial 1 for YES to reset card or dial 0 for NO.
OR

C:1–S:6

Samsung Business Communications

8 DLIÆ8 DLI

8 DLIÆ8 DLI

16 DLIÆ16 DLI

RESET CARD ? NO

2-271

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.
5) Dial 1 for YES to reset card or dial 0 for NO.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.

2-272

C:1–S:6
ARE YOU SURE?NO

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 724

DIAL NUMBERING PLAN

[807] PHONE VOLUME CONTROL
Allows the system administrator to set phone volume levels.
Phone Volume Level
No

Type

FX
No

Type

0

KEY TONE VOL

0

LINE VOLUME

1

SIDETONE VOL

1

SPEAKER VOLUME

2

HANDSET TX

2

NOR.LP ATTEN

3

MIC TX LEVEL

3

MIC LP ATTEN

4

NOISE GUARD

4

ACOU DECOUPL

5

NOISE THRES

5

ELEC DECOUPL

6

ALC THRES

6

T/R RATIO

7

TX/RX THRES.

7

R/T RATIO

8

TX/RX COMP

9

MIN RX VOL(28D, 12L, 21D, ITP)

When changing the MMC [807]
‘MMC [807] PHONE VOLUME CONTROL’ should not be changed from the default levels without the assistance of the local SAMSUNG distributor.

Samsung Business Communications

2-273

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

DEFAULT DATA
DEPENDS ON PHONE TYPE(SHOWN FOR 21D)
21D
Type

FX
Default

Type

Default

KEY TONE VOL

1

LINE VOLUME

3

SIDETONE VOL

1

SPEAKER VOLUME

14

HANDSET TX

4

NOR.LP ATTEN

4

MIC TX LEVEL

3

MIC LP ATTEN

5

NOISE GUARD

8

ACOU DECOUPL

8

NOISE THRES

1

ELEC DECOUPL

8

ALC THRES

7

T/R RATIO

2

TX/RX THRES.

3

R/T RATIO

2

TX/RX COMP

5

MIN RX VOL

6

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 807.
Display shows:

VOL.CONTROL:US24

2) Enter phone type via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

VOL.CONTROL:EU24

3) Enter volume item via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

VOL.CONTROL:EU24

4) Enter volume data via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to save and return to step 3.

VOL.CONTROL:EU24

KEY TONE VOL:1

KEY TONE VOL:1

SIDETONE VOL:1

HANDSET TX :6

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-274

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[810] HALT PROCESSING
Used only in the event that all data processing needs to be stopped either in a single cabinet
slot or in the entire system.

DEFAULT DATA
PROC

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 810.
Display shows:

HALT/PROCESSING

2) Enter cabinet selection via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance cursor.
OR
Select all cabinets and slots.(and go to step 4)

HALT/PROCESSING

C:ALL S:ALLÆPROC

C:1

S:ALLÆPROC

HALT/PROCESSING
C:ALL S:ALLÆPROC

3) Enter slot number via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance cursor.

HALT/PROCESSING
C:1

S:2ÆPROC

4) Enter 1 for HALT or 0 for PROC.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to enter and return to step 2.
5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-275

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[811] RESET SYSTEM
Provides a means of restarting the system. The system can simply be reset or it can be reset
and all memory cleared to default values. Extreme care should be taken when using this
MMC. If the system is restarted, all voice/data connections are dropped. If memory is
cleared, all customer data is deleted and the system returns to defaulted status.
No

Type

Description

0

RESET SYSTEM

System reset only with MC card read.

1

CLEAR MEMORY

System reset and make default system with MC card read.

2

FAST RESTART

System reset only without MC card read.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 811.
Display shows:

SYSTEM RESTART

2) Enter reset type(0-2) via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

SYSTEM RESTART

3) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button.

SYSTEM RESTART

4) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button.

SYSTEM RESTART

RESET SYSTEM?NO

CLEAR MEMORY?NO

CLEAR MEMORY?YES

ARE YOU SURE?YES

5) If clear memory, system will return with default time
and date and default extension number.
OR
If system just restarted, it will return to normal programmed status.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-276

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[812] SET COUNTRY CODE
Selects the country for correct system programming and operation.

When changing the MMC [812]
‘MMC [812] SET COUNTRY CODE’ should not be used from the default levels
without the assistance of the local SAMSUNG distributor.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 812.
Display shows:

SELECT COUNTRY

2) Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.

SELECT COUNTRY

3) Press Volume button to select YES or NO and
press Right Soft button.
4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

DEFAULTING SYSTM

Undefined

RUSSIA/CIS

ARE YOU SURE?NO

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 811

RESET SYSTEM

Samsung Business Communications

2-277

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[813] HOTEL OPERATION
Allows the installing technician to enable the HOTEL feature.

DEFAULT DATA
DISABLE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 813.
Display shows:

HOTEL OPERATION

2) Dial 1 for ENABLE or 0 for DISABLE.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.

HOTEL OPERATION

3) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.

HOTEL OPERATION

4) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button.

HOTEL OPERATION

DISABLE

ENABLE

CHANGE NOW ? NO

ARE YOU SURE?YES

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
Hotel Related MMCs
MMC 221
MMC 222
MMC 513
MMC 760
MMC 761
MMC 762

2-278

EXTENSION TYPE
FAX PAIR
HOTEL TIMER
ITEM COST TABLE
TAX RATE SETUP
ROOM COST RATE

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[815] CUSTOMER DATABASE COPY
This enables the on-board customer database(SRAM) to be copied to the MC Database(MCDB) and also allows the MCDB database to be copied to the SRAM. A daily save
can be programmed to automatically save the SRAM to the MCDB. This ensures that an
up-to-date database is always available in case of a catastrophic failure. A daily save time
of 00:00 means that no daily save is performed.
It is recommended that the MCDB is cleared before the SRAM is copied to it. When the
SRAM is copied to the MCDB there is no interruption in service. If the MCDB is copied to
the SRAM, the system will reset to accept the new data.
MCDB(Mc card database)
Option

Description

S:mm/dd/yy hh:mm

Indicates the time the database was saved to the MCDB.

CLEAR MCDB

Clear MCDB.

COPY TO SRAM

Copy MCDB to SRAM.

SRAM(MCP on-board database)
Option

Description

S:mm/dd/yy hh:mm

Indicates the time the SRAM was last saved.

COPY TO MCDB

Copy SRAM to MCDB.

DAILY SAVE hh:mm

The time the SRAM will be saved to the MCDB.

A MC Card of 256 MB
A MC Card of 256 MB must be installed in order to copy the on board database(SRAM) on to the MC card (MCDB).

DEFAULT DATA
DAILY SAVE 00:00(no daily save)

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 815.
Display shows:
If MC card is in use, the display shows:

CUST DBASE:MCDB
S:12/01/01 00:00
CUST DBASE:MCDB
MMC IS BUSY

Samsung Business Communications

2-279

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

2) Press Right Soft button to move cursor.

CUST DBASE:MCDB
S:12/01/01 00:00

3) Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

CUST DBASE:MCDB

4) Press Volume button to select YES or NO and
press Right Soft button.

CUST DBASE:MCDB

5) Press Volume button to select YES or NO and
press Right Soft button.

CUST DBASE:MCDB

If you select YES, the display shows.

CLEAR SMDB :NO

CLEAR SMDB :YES

ARE YOU SURE?NO
CUST DBASE:MCDB
Cleared....

6) Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

CUST DBASE:SYSDB

7) Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

CUST DBASE:SYSDB

8) Input save time.
OR
Press Right Soft button to move cursor.

CUST DBASE:SYSDB

9) Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

CUST DBASE:SYSDB

10) Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to make changes and return to
step 9.

DAILY SAVE:00:00

DAILY SAVE:00:00

DAILY SAVE:23:30

COPY TO SMDB:NO
CUST DBASE:SYSDB
ARE YOU SURE?:YES

11) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-280

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[818] PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
Change the system version by downloading the new version stored on the MC card to the
APP/SYS/DRV/WEB/RUT/MSP/CSP and TEPRI cards.
Option

Description

APP

To upgrade application (including MP and VM module)

SYS

Include all modules. (?)

DRV

To upgrade Driver, F/W (including SP, MGI, drivers)

WEB

To upgrade WEB UI

RUT

To upgrade Router module (limited in MP11)

MSP

To upgrade MSP driver

CSP

To upgrade CSP driver

PR2

To upgrade TEPRI2 Package

PRI

To upgrade TEPRI/ TEPRIa Package

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 818.
Display shows:

PGM DOWNLOAD

2) Press Volume button to select program type
and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

PGM DOWNLOAD

3) Press Volume button to select YES and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

SYSTEM PKG

APP:ap10v014.pkg

SYS:rd10v014.pkg

DOWNLOAD NOW?YES

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-281

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[819] MC FILE CONTROL
Displays the size(in bytes) of various system program files on the MC card.
Files included in MC card are described below:
File Name
Startup.ini

Description
If user designates an MCP program in MMC 818, related data are saved in this file.
This file is initially not included but is created when the above programs are selected at MMC 818.

Ms10v508.pkg

MSP driver program
This program must be included in MC card to start the system.

Cs10v101.pkg

MSP driver program
This program must be included in MC card to start the system.

Ap10v014.pkg

Appication program.
MP and VM module is included in this package.

Dr10v014.pkg

This package includes SP, MGI and other drivers.

Rd10v014.pkg

RAMDISK program

Ws10v014.pkg

WEB UI program

vm_l_use.tar/

VM prompt

vm_l_uk.tar

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

2-282

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 819.
Display shows:

Startup.ini

2) Press Volume button to confirm program type

Cs10v101.pkg

sz:512 bytes

sz:14418432 bytes

3) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-283

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[820] ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID
This MMC is used to assign the system link ID for PRI and VoIP networking. Up to 100
link IDs can be entered including SELF ID. In addition, each Link ID is associated with the
IP address and IP address type of the MCP card for that system.
Option

Description

LINK ID

System ID for networking feature.

SIGNAL G/W

System IP address for VoIP networking.

IP TYPE

System IP address type for VoIP networking. SELF system IP address type
determines ‘SYSTEM IP TYPE’ in MMC 830.

CONDITIONS
‘SELF’ represents self-node, and must be set to use the networking function. Items other
than ‘SELF’ are used for station numbers and can be omitted.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 820.
Display shows:

SELF :LINK ID

2) Enter SELF link ID via dial keypad and
press Right Soft button.

SELF :LINK ID

3) Press Volume button to select other link ID
and press Right Soft button to mover cursor.

SYS01:LINK ID

4) Enter other link ID via dial keypad and
press Right Soft button.

SYS01:LINK ID

11

22

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 821
MMC 823
MMC 824
MMC 830

2-284

ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK
ASSIGN NETWORK COS
NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION
ETHERNET PARAMETERS

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[821] ASSIGN NETWORK TRUNK
Assigns the Q-signalling PRI trunk for networking. It is assigned data on a per-TEPRI card
basis.

DEFAULT DATA
NORMAL

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 821.
Display shows:

[701] Q-SIG TRK

2) Enter first trunk number of PRI card.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

[701] Q-SIG TRK

3) Enter 0 for NORMAL, or 1 for Q-SIGNALLING.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to save and move cursor.

[701] Q-SIG TRK

NORMAL

NORMAL

Q-SIGNALLING

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-285

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[822] VIRTUAL EXTENSION TYPE
Assigns the virtual extension port type. The virtual extension port types are followed:
No

Type

Description

00

SLT

Emulates SLI port

01

24 BTN SET

24 buttons phone

02

12 BTN SET

12 buttons phone

03

7 BTN SET

7 buttons phone

04

6 BTN SET

6 buttons phone

05

28 BTN SET

28 buttons phone

06

18 BTN SET

18 buttons phone

07

8 BTN SET

8 buttons phone

08

38 BTN SET

38 buttons phone

09

21 BTN SET

21 buttons phone

10

14 BTN SET

14 buttons phone

11

LARGE SET

Large LCD phone

12

7 BTN LCD

7 buttons LCD phone

13

0 BTN LCD

0 button LCD phone

14

NONE

not used

DEFAULT DATA
3501-3522: SLT
3401-3440: 21 BTN SET

2-286

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 822.
Display shows:

[3501]PORT TYPE

2) Enter virtual extension number.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
OR
Select all ports.

[3501] PORT TYPE

3) Enter virtual extension type.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to save and move cursor.

[3501] PORT TYPE

SLT

SLT

[ALL] PORT TYPE
SLT

SLT

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-287

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[823] ASSIGN NETWORK COS
Assigns the class of service for networking.
No

Option

Default

Description

01

CALL OFFER

Y

Call Offer

04

CC SIG CONN

Y

CC Retention of Signal Connection

05

CC SVC RETN

Y

CC Service Retention

06

CCBS

N

Call Completion to Busy Subscriber

07

CCNR

N

Call Completion on No Reply

08

CFB

Y

Call Forward Busy

09

CFNR

Y

Call Forward No Reply

10

CFU

Y

Call Forward Unconditional

11

CI

N

Call Intrusion

12

CI CAPABIL

2

Intrusion Capability Level(1~3)

14

CI PROTECT

2

Intrusion Protection Level(0~3)

23

CONP LEVEL

3

CONP Level(0: none, 1: Alert, 2: Busy, 3: Both)

26

CT RE-ROUTE

N

Transfer By Rerouting

27

DND TONE

N

DND Announcement

28

DNDO

Y

Do Not Disturb Override

29

DNDO CAPABL

2

DNDO Capability Level(0~3)

30

DNDO PROTEC

2

DNDO Protection Level(1~3)

31

PAGE

Y

PAGE

32

PATH REPL.

Y

Path Replacement

33

PATH RETEN

N

Path Retention

CONDITIONS
NONE

DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION

2-288

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 823.
Display shows:

NETWORK COS (01)

2) Dial the class of service number.(01-30)
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

NETWORK COS (02)

3) Dial the feature number.
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

NETWORK COS (02)

4) Enter 0 for NO, or 1 for YES.
OR
Press Volume button to select YES or NO and
Press Right Soft button to store data.

NETWORK COS (01)

01:CALL OFFER :Y

01:CALL OFFER :Y

03:CC PATH RSV:Y

03:CC PATH RSV:N

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 301

ASSIGN STATION COS

Samsung Business Communications

2-289

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[824] NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION
Assigns the digit translation table used for networking. Generally, under networking conditions, you must dial the node ID and extension number to call the another node extension.
In this MMC, the system provides a simple digit translation so that the user need only dial
the extension number to call the station on the other node. The access digit needs to be programmed in MMC 724(‘NTWK LCR DIAL NO.’ option) first. The system allows 96 entries for network dial translation.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

2-290

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 824.
Display shows:

01:601Æ

2) Dial the entry number.
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

01:601Æ_

3) Enter digit string for access to node(max. 8 digits)
and press Right Soft button to move cursor.

01:601Æ60201

4) Enter number of digits user will dial.(e.g., 3 for 3digit extension)
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

01:601Æ60201

5) Enter max. number of digits system will dial.
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

01:601Æ60201

6) Enter YES/NO to display other node extension
in internal extension number format.
OR
Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft
button to move cursor.

01:601Æ60201

SIZE:0 MAX:00

SIZE:0 MAX:00

SIZE:0

MAX:00

SIZE:3 MAX:00

SIZE:3 MAX:08

DISP:N

MBX:N

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

7) Enter YES/NO to assign Mailbox to remote
extension automatically.
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

01:601Æ60201
DISP:Y MBX:N

8) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 710
MMC 724
MMC 820

LCR DIGIT TABLE
DIAL NUMBERING PLAN
ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID

Samsung Business Communications

2-291

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[825] ASSIGN NETWORKING OPTIONS
Assigns the options used for networking.
No
0

Option
ADD NUMBER TO NAME

Description
Assign to include the extension number in the name field of
Q-SIG standard message.

1

USE REMOTE VM

Assign to use SVMi on remote system.

2

REMOTE VM NUMBER

Assign to access number of remote SVMi when the Remote
VM is used.

3

REMOTE CID NUMB

Assign to use delete node number when CID number send to
SVMi.

4

USE REMOTE ATTN

Use Attendant on remote system.(RING 1-6, Y/N)

5

REMOTE ATTN NUMB

Access number of remote Attendant when the remote Attendant is used.(RING 1-6)

6

SPNET DIGIT SEND

Specify by which method dialled digits are sent across the
network.

DEFAULT DATA
ADD NUMB TO NAME: YES
USE REMOTE VM: NO
REMOTE VM NUMBER: NONE
REMOTE CID NUMB: YES
USE REMOTE ATTN: NO
REMOTE ATTN NUMB: NONE
SPNET DIGIT SEND: MGI SIGNALLING

2-292

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 825.
Display shows:

ADD NUMB TO NAME

2) Dial the option number.
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

USE REMOTE VM

3) Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.
OR
Press Volume button to select YES/NO and
press Right Soft button to mover cursor.

USE REMOTE VM

YES

NO

YES

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-293

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[826] ASSIGN SYSTEM REFERENCE CLOCK
The system clock may be synchronized with an external clock source from the TEPRI or
BRI card, or it can use the internal clock source.
This MMC can assign the system clock source priority when the external clock source is
used.

DEFAULT DATA
PRIORITY 1: C1-S0
PRIORITY 2: C1-S1
PRIORITY 3: SELF

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 826.
Display shows:

REFERENCE CLOCK

2) Dial the priority number
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

REFERENCE CLOCK

3) Dial the priority data.
OR
Press Volume button to select and Press
Right Soft button to store.

REFERENCE CLOCK

PRIORITY 1:C1-S0

PRIORITY 1:C1-S0

PRIORITY 1:C1-S0

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-294

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[829] LAN PRINTER PARAMETERS
This program sets the various parameters required for printing to a LAN-connected device.
The data listed below can be printed.
01.
02.
03.
04.
05.
06.
07.
08.

SMDR
UCD REPORT
TRAFFIC REPORT
ALARM REPORT
UCD VIEW
PERIODIC UCD
HOTEL REPORT
PMS

The items that are set in this program are:
No

Option

00

DATA TYPE

-

Type of data to be displayed

01

CURR STATUS

OFF

Current status of the LAN printer

02

EMPTY BUFF

NO

Prints all data left in the buffer

03

UPDATE LAN

NO

Applies modified values set in this MMC

04

DESTINATION

OFF

Data transmit destination(Off, Printer, PC, Both)

05

PRINTER IP

200.1.1.1

The IP address of the LAN printer

06

PRINTER TCP

10010

The TCP port of the printer

07

LAN TCP

10020

LAN TCP port

08

RETRY COUNT

03

Re-transmit attempt count(00~10)

09

RETRY WAIT

010 sec

Wait time for re-transmit(005~250 sec)

10

PJL ENABLE

FALSE

Sets PJL(0. FALSE, 1. TRUE)

11

LANGUAGE

RAW

Printer language(0. RAW, 1. PCL, 2. PS)

12

PAPER SIZE

A4

Paper size(0. A4, 1. LETTER)

13

FONT TYPE

COURIER

Font type(0.COURIER, 1.TIMES NEW ROMAN)

14

DUPLEX ENAB

FALSE

Sets duplex(0. FALSE, 1. TRUE)

15

ORIENTATION

PORTRAIT

Orientation(0. PORTRAIT, 1. LANDSCAPE)

16

PRINT TRAY

DEFAULT

Printer tray(0.Default, 1.Tray1, 2.Tray2, 3.Manual)

17

RESOLUTION

300

Resolution(0.300, 1.600)

18

LINE/PAGE

60

Lines per page

Samsung Business Communications

Default

Description

2-295

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 829.
Display shows:

[01] DATA TYPE

2) Enter type of data to be printed.
OR
Press Volume button to select the type and
press the Right Soft button to move the cursor.

[02] DATA TYPE

3) Enter the item number.
OR
Press Volume button to select the item and
press the Right Soft button to move the cursor.

[02] PRINTER IP

4) Select the data.
OR
Press Volume to select the data and press
Right Soft button to move the cursor.

[02] PRINTER IP

SMDR

UCD REPORT

200. 1. 1. 1

168.219. 83.101

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-296

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[830] ETHERNET PARAMETERS
This MMC provides a mean to configure the Internet Protocol(IP) addressing of the MCP
card.
No

Parameter

Description

00

SYSTEM IP ADDR

Specifies the IP address for the MCP card.

01

SYSTEM GATEWAY

Specifies the designated gateway IP address used for contacting
IP devices beyond the local network subnet.

02

SYSTEM NET MASK

Specifies the IP subnet mask.
This parameter is used by the system to calculate the range of IP
devices(subnet) that are within ‘direct reach’ of the MCP.(without
having to go through the designated network IP gateway)

03

SYSTEM RESET

Prompt to reset system MCP when system IP address is changed.
This reset is same as FAST RESTART in MMC 811.

04

SYSTEM IP TYPE

Specifies if the system will be routing data over a public or private
network.

05

SYSTEM PUBLIC IP

The MCP will originate communications to IP phones and VoIP
connections outside the local network using this IP address. Communications to/from this IP will require involvement of the MGI
card. The system identifies communications to/from this address
as ‘public’. This allows devices, on remote networks/subnets, to
establish communications with the system, without exposing the
LAN. See ‘SYSTEM IP TYPE’.

08

SYSTEM MAC ADDR

For reference, and cannot be changed. The unique hardware
(MAC) address of the MCP card.

12

PCMMC ADDRESS

When the system wants to connect to PCMMC, it will be sent to
this IP address for a connection message.(Reserved for future
use.)

13

SM MANAGER IP

Not used.

14

CTI SERVER ADDR

IP address of CTI Server

17

NEWS ADDRESS

IP address of News Server

18

MMS SERVER IP

IP address of MMS Server

19

MMS WEB SERV IP

IP address of MMS WEB Server

Samsung Business Communications

2-297

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

ETHERNET PARAMETERS
- The first three parameters: SYSTEM IP ADDR, SYSTEM GATEWAY, and SYSTEM NET MASK are stored separately from the main system database and thus
will not be defaulted when MMC811 ‘CLEAR MEMORY’ is performed. Furthermore, any changes to these parameters will not be applied until the MCP2 is reset.
- When changing any IP address/value, three digits must be entered for
each(octet) field. For example 192.168.1.10 should be entered as: 192 168 001
010.

CONDITIONS
y

This MMC must be used if there are ITP phones and/or MGI cards on the system.

y

After changing Ethernet parameters, restart the system to apply the new settings.

DEFAULT DATA
SYSTEM IP ADDR: 165.213.97.185
SYSTEM GATEWAY: 165.213.97.1
SYSTEM NET MASK: 255.255.255.0
SYSTEM RESET: NO
SYSTEM IP TYPE: PRIVATE IP ONLY
SYSTEM PUBLIC IP: 1.1.1.1
SYSTEM MAC ADDR: CARD DEPENDENT
PCMMC ADDRESS: 168.219.1.101
SM MANAGER IP: 0.0.0.0
CTI SERVER ADDR: 0.0.0.0
NEWS ADDR: 0.0.0.0
MMS SERVER IP: 0.0.0.0
MMS WEB SERV IP: 0.0.0.0

2-298

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 830.
Display shows the system IP address.

SYSTEM IP ADDR

2) Press Volume button to make selection and
Press Right Soft button to move cursor.

SYSTEM IP ADDR

3) Using the keypad, enter 3-digit IP numbers.
(e.g., 192 168 001 010 for 192.168.1.10)
Cursor will return to step 1 upon completion
of IP address entry.

SYSTEM IP ADDR

4) Press Volume button to make selection and
Press Right Soft button to move cursor.

SYSTEM GATEWAY

5) Using the keypad, enter 3-digit IP numbers.
(e.g., 192 168 001 001 for 192.168.1.1)
Cursor will return to this step on completion
of system gateway entry.

SYSTEM GATEWAY

6) Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

SYSTEM RESTART

7) Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to store and move cursor.

SYSTEM RESTART

165.213. 97.185

165.213. 97.185

192.168.001.010

165.213. 97. 1

192.168.001.001

ARE YOU SURE? NO

ARE YOU SURE? NO

8) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-299

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[831] MGI PARAMETERS
This MMC provides a mean to configure the Internet Protocol(IP) addressing of the MGI
card(s) in the system.
No

Parameter

Description

0

IP ADDRESS

Specifies the IP address for the MGI card.

1

GATEWAY

Specifies the designated IP gateway address used for contacting
IP devices beyond the local subnet.

2

SUB MASK

Specifies the IP subnet mask. This parameter is used by the system to
calculate the range of IP devices(subnet) that are within ‘direct reach’
of the MGI.(without having to go through the designated network IP
gateway)

3

IP TYPE

Specifies if the system will be routing data over a public or private
network.

4

PUBLIC IP

The MGI will originate communications, to IP phones and VoIP
connections outside the local network, using this IP address. If this
IP address sets 0.0.0.0, 255.255.255.255 or default value then this
MGI card uses private IP only. See System IP Type on MMC 830.

5

PUB PORT

Public Port

6

VERSION

No entry required. Used to indicate revision of MGI3 S/W.

8

CARD RESET

Reboots MGI card.

9

IP VERSION

Specidies MGI IP version is IPv4 / IPv6.

MGI PARAMETERS
- IP ADDRESS, GATEWAY, and SUB MASK—any changes to these parameters
will not be applied until the MGI card is reset.
- When changing any IP address/value, three digits must be entered for each
(octet) field. For example, 192.168.1.10 should be entered as 192 168 001 010.

2-300

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

CONDITIONS
This MMC cannot be accessed unless there is an MGI card installed in the system.

DEFAULT DATA
IP ADDRESS: 1.1.1.1
GATEWAY: 1.1.1.1
SUB MASK: 255.255.255.0
IP TYPE: PRIVATE IP ONLY
PUBLIC IP: 1.1.1.1
PUB PORT: 00000
VERSION: V4
CARD RESET: NO
IP VERSION: IPv4

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 831.
Display shows the first MGI card.

[3801] IP ADDRESS

2) Enter MGI number.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

[3801] IP ADDRESS

3) Enter MGI parameter number.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

[3801] IP ADDRESS

4) Enter MGI parameter.
OR
Press Right Soft button to move cursor.

[3801] IP ADDRESS

168.219. 76.101

168.219. 76.101

168.219. 76.101

165. 10. 1.100

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-301

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[832] VoIP ACCESS CODE
Provides a means to apply the Internet Protocol(IP) address to the VoIP gateway. This
MMC also assigns the number of channels that can be used for IP faxes.
TABLE(00~62): Outbound or Inbound table used for specific access codes. Usually when
the MCP2 card is used as a VoIP gateway, the Outbound table is used. The Inbound table is
used to determine the number of digits to receive before processing the call. Each table has
63 entries(00~62).
No
0

Option
ACCESS DGT

Description
This is the access code that is used once the VoIP gateway is accessed; this directs a call based on the routing tables used. An access
code table then references an access code and correlates an IP address to the access code for routing. A maximum of eight digits are
available.

1

DGT LENGTH

This field requests the number of digits that are expected to be received
to make up the whole access code.

2

DEL.LENGTH

This is the number of digits to delete after receiving the access code.
If no digits are deleted the access code will be sent as part of the call to
the destination to continue routing.

3

INSERT DGT

Digit(s) to insert for routing at the destination. This can be used when
different numbering plans exist or if a dial 9 access is to be inserted in
the dialled digits.

4

IP TABLE 1

This is the first table referenced for routing the access code to an IP
address. The system has 64 IP tables(00~63) with 16 entries(00~15) in
each table. See MMC 833.

6

IP START

This entry indicates where in a table to start looking for an IP code to
associate with the access code. This can be used to manage where to
start looking for an IP address in high traffic VoIP gateway applications.
For example: If IP address routing to the desired destination is known to
be in the last seven entries of a table, the IP START location would be 8.
IP address searching would start at entry 8.

7

SERVER USE

This parameter determines whether a H.323 Gatekeeper will be utilized
to establish this connection.

2-302

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

DEFAULT DATA
ACCESS DGT: 00~09(digits 0~9), 10~62 NONE
DGT LENGTH: 1
DEL.LENGTH: 1
INSERT DGT: NONE
IP TABLE 1: 00
IP START: NONE
SERVER USE: NO

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 832.
Display shows the outbound and first access
code.

(O:00)ACCESS DGT

2) Enter 0 for O(outbound) or 1 for I(inbound)
code table.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

(O:00)ACCESS DGT

3) Enter access code table number(00-62) via dial
keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

(O:01)ACCESS DGT

4) Enter access code item(0-6) via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

(O:01)ACCESS DGT

5) Enter access code data via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to save and move cursor.

(O:01)ACCESS DGT

0

0

1

1

840

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 833
MMC 834
MMC 836
MMC 837

VOIP IP TABLE
H.323 OPTIONS
H.323 GATEKEEPER OPTIONS
SIP OPTIONS

Samsung Business Communications

2-303

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[833] VoIP IP TABLE
This MMC provides the IP addresses in tables pointed to by the VoIP code entry(MMC
832). There are 63 tables with up to 16 entries each. The destination IP address is required
to route dialled digits based on the access code and digits dialled. The IP entry field is divided into 4 sections allowing modification of separate IP address fields.

When changing IP
When changing any IP address/value, listed below, three digits must be input for
each(octet) field. Example 192.168.1.10 input must be: 192 168 001 010

DEFAULT DATA
TB(00) ENTRY(00): MMC 830 SYSTEM IP ADDR
ALL OTHERS: EMPTY

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 833.
Display shows the first table number.

TB(00) ENTRY (00)

2) Enter table number(00-62) via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

TB(00) ENTRY (00)

3) Enter entry number(00-15) via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

TB(00) ENTRY (00)

4) Enter IP address via dial keypad.
Cursor will be return step 3.

TB(00) ENTRY (00)

0. 0. 0. 0

0. 0. 0. 0

0. 0. 0. 0

165.213. 87.110

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC entry.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 830
MMC 832
MMC 834
MMC 837
MMC 838

2-304

ETHERNET PARAMETERS
VOIP ACCESS CODE
H.323 OPTIONS
SIP OPTIONS
PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[834] H.323 OPTIONS
This MMC provides various VoIP support options. The options set in this MMC apply system wide.
No

Parameter

00

GATEWAY CALL ID

01

H.323 FAST SETUP

Description

Default

Numeric identifier for system(up to 12 digits)

1234

Enables or disables the H.323 Fast Start call setup

ENABLE

method.
02

CALLER ID TYPE

This option controls the calling party identification

ANI

type. There are 3 possible selections:
0

GWID: shows the gateway call ID.

1

ANI: shows the calling station number

2 IP: shows the calling H.323 gateway IP address.
06

TUNNELING

Enables or disables the need for additional chan-

ENABLE

nels using H.245 signalling. Tunneling allows use
of the H.245 signal channel with the Q.931 channel.
07

DEFAULT DIL NO

This allows programming of the default direct-in-

500

line number when digits are missing or incorrect on
an inbound call.
11

CODEC AUTO NEGO

Enables or disables Auto CODEC Negotiation

ON

when the MGI is used as an H.323 gateway.
14

SIGNAL PORT

Indicate the port number for H.323 signalling and

10000

sets a range of numbers allowed by firewall
equipment. The common and default IP path or
port used is 10000.
17

SEND CLIP TABLE

Refers to SEND CLI NUMBER(MMC 323), which

1

provides calling party identification when using the
MGI as a H.323 gateway. This provides station ID
of the calling station. A single-digit value corresponding with the desired table in MMC 323
should be entered here. This is only used when
MMC 405 value is null.
18

INCOMING MODE

This option selects how incoming calls are routed
when the MGI is used as a H.323 gateway.
0 FOLLOW TRUNK RING: Follows MMC 406
1 FOLLOW DID TRANS: Follows MMC 714
2 FOLLOW INCOM DGT: Follows MMC 724

FOLLOW
DID TRANS

19

ALLOW GW CHECK

When using a gatekeeper, this permits the H.323
gateway to check for gatekeeper presence.

DISABLE

20

CLIR WITH NUMBER

When this option is enabled, the CLIP number is
sent to the network even if the CLIP restriction flag
is set.

DISABLE

21

USE OVERLAP DIAL

Enables use of overlap dialing.

ENBLOC

Samsung Business Communications

2-305

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 834.
Display shows the first option.

GATEWAY CALL ID

2) Enter H.323 option number(00-20) via
dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

H.323 FAST SETUP

3) Enter H.323 option data via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

H.323 FAST SETUP

1234

DISABLE

ENABLE

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-306

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[835] MGI DSP OPTIONS
This MMC provides various MGI DSP options.
No
00

Parameter
CODEC-FRAME

Description

Default

Selects which audio CODEC compression will be used

G.729A –

and the transmission interval time of VoIP packets gen-

20 Ms

erated by the MGI card. MGI3 card supports
G.729A(8 K), G.729(8 K), G.711(64 K), and
G.723.1(5.3~6.4K).
01

ECHO CANCEL

Enables or disables echo cancellation. This function

ENABLE

removes the echo that is generated by voice reflection
and packet delay.
02

SILENCE SUP

This parameter determines whether silence suppression

DISABLE

is used. This prevents transmission during the silence
period of a call, and conserves bandwidth when enabled.
03

IN FILTER

This option selects input filtering of the DSP. This should

ENABLE

always be set to ENABLE.
04

OUT FILTER

This option selects output filtering of the DSP. This

ENABLE

should always be set to ENABLE.
05

INPUT GAIN

PCM input gain value of DSP. The range is-

32

31 dB~32 dB(0~63).
This set the quality of PCM voice from the VoIP DSP to
the site. Default is 32(0 dB).
06

VOICE VOL

This value selects the voice volume. The range is-

32(0 dB).

31 dB~31 dB(0~63).
08

JITTER OPT

This is a scale value that introduces a intentional

4

buffer(delay) of the transmission of VoIP packets generated by the MGI card. This value determines whether
the focus is on packet loss or packet delay.
The range is 00~12.
09

MIN JITTER

Decides the minimum time to consider delay for jitter

30 ms

adjustment.
The range is 010~300 ms
10

MAX JITTER

Decides the maximum time to consider delay for jitter

150 ms

adjustment.
The range is 010-300 ms.
11

FAX ECM

This option selects retry of Fax-over-IP if errors are de-

ENABLE

tected.
12

MAX FAX CNT

This is the maximum number of channels that can be

2

simultaneously used for Fax-over-IP. The range is
00~16.

Samsung Business Communications

2-307

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

(continued)
No
13

Parameter
DTMF TYPE

Description

Default

There are two types of DTMF transmission: INBAND,

OUTBAND

which is industry standard(H.245) type DTMF transport,
and OUTBAND which is a Samsung proprietary
method.
14

TOS FIELD

An 8-bit binary value that will be used by external

All bits 0

routers, switches, etc,(that optionally support TOS-bit
prioritization) to identify the transport-priority value of
data packets generated by the MGI card. This value can
be left at the default value(00000) if your network infrastructure does not support this method of bandwidth
management.
15

FAX RETRY

This option selects retry count of Fax-over-IP if errors

3

are detected. The range is 0~4(0 means no retry).
16

RTP CHK TM

This option selects the interval time for sending RTCP.

5 SEC

17

USE T38 711

If use T38 FAX, specifies 711 Codec use

Enable

18

802.1 VLAN

Set value (0000~4095)

0000

19

802.1 PRIOR

Set value (0~7)

0

20

802.1Q

Enable or disable for 802.1Q

DISABLE

(including 802.1 VLAN and 802.1 PRIOR)
21

EC GAIN

Set EC gain value (18~38)

32

22

NLP

Set NLP value (0~2)

0

23

EC TAIL LEN

Set EC TAIL LEN (8~128)

064 MS

24

JIT PEROID

Set JITTER PERIOD (1~10)

01

25

JIT DEL TM

Set JITTER DELETE TIME (0~500)

250

DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION

ACTION

2-308

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 835.
Display shows the first option.

MGI3:CODEC-FRAME

2) Enter MGI type(0-2) via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

MGI3:CODEC-FRAME

3) Enter MGI DSP parameter via dial keypad.
OR

MGI3:CODEC-FRAME

G.729A –40 MS

G.729A –40 MS

G.729A –40 MS

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
4) Enter MGI DSP parameter.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to save and return to step 3.

MGI3:CODEC-FRAME
G.729A –20 MS

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 831

MGI PARAMETERS

Samsung Business Communications

2-309

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[836] H.323 GK OPTIONS
Provides a means to set the H.323 gatekeeper parameters for an optional, external industrystandard H.323 network gatekeeper, using Registration, Admissions and Status signalling
(RAS). The settings apply system wide.

When changing IP
When changing any IP address/value, listed below, three digits must be input for
each(octet) field. Example 192.168.1.10 input must be: 192 168 001 010

No
00

Parameter
GK CONNECTION

Description

Default

This enables the H.323 call to connect to a gate-

DISABLE

keeper.
01

GK ROUTING

This enables routing of calls through a gatekeeper.

DISABLE

02

GK IP ADDRESS

This is the gatekeeper’s IP address.

0.0.0.0

03

GK NAME

This is the alphanumeric identifier of the gate-

‘Gatekeeper’

keeper.(Up to 16 characters.)
04

ALTER GK IP ADDR

05

H.323 GATEWAY ID

This provides an alternate gatekeeper address.

0.0.0.0

This is the H.323 identifier used by the MGI when

‘OfficeServ’

registering with the gatekeeper.(Up to 32 characters.)
06

E.164 GATEWAY

This is the E.164 identifier used by the H.323 trunk

NO

when registering with the gatekeeper.(Up to 16

1234

digits long.)
07

GK KEEP ALIVE

This is the timer that the MGI uses to acknowledge

0 SEC

the presence of the gatekeeper. The range is
000~999 seconds.
08

GK DOWN ROUTE

This provides an alternate route if the primary gate-

PSTN

keeper is down. Selections are PSTN or ALTER
GK.
09

GK RAS TYPE

Select if AUTO or MANUAL, depending on your

AUTO

gatekeeper’s capabilities.
10
12

URQ REASON

Select ON or OFF for use of Un-register Request

MODE

RAS(URQ) messages.

RRQ FAIL TIME

Programs the time frame to re-send Registration

ON
30 seconds

Request RAS(RRQ) messages to a gatekeeper.
The range is 1~99.

2-310

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

No
13

Parameter

Description

GRQ SEND

Default

Select ON or OFF for use of Gatekeeper RAS Re-

OFF

quest(GRQ) messages.
14

USE MULTI E.164

When this option is set to ENABLE, the E.164 identi-

DISABLE

fier can be assigned.
15

E.164 LISTS

This is the E.164 identifier used by the H.323 trunk

NONE

when registering with the gatekeeper. There is a
maximum 32 E.164 identifier lists with a digit string
length of 16 digits.
16

GK REGISTERED

Display the status of registration to the Gatekeeper.

NO

DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 836.
Display shows the first available option.

GK CONNECTION

2) Enter H.323 GK option via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

GK ROUTING

3) Enter H.323 GK option data.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to save and return step 3.

GK ROUTING

DISABLE

DISABLE

ENABLE

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 834

H.323 OPTIONS

Samsung Business Communications

2-311

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[837] SIP OPTIONS
This MMC permits the adjustments of optional Session Initiation Protocol(SIP) trunk parameters. The MCP supports SIP and H.323 on a per-call-per-port basis. The settings are
system wide.

When changing IP
When changing any IP address/value, listed below, three digits must be input for
each(octet) field. Example 192.168.1.10 input must be: 192 168 001 010

No
00

Parameter
GATEWAY

Description

Default

Numeric system identifier(up to 12 digits)

‘1234’

CALLER ID

This option controls the calling party identification type.

ANI

TYPE

There are 3 possible selections:

CALL ID
01

0

GWID: shows the gateway call ID.

1

ANI: shows the calling station number.(default)

2 IP: shows the calling H.323 gateway IP address.
05

DEFAULT DIL

This allows programming of the default direct-in-line

NO

number when digits are missing or incorrect on an in-

5000

bound call.
06

UDP PORT:

Sets the UDP port used on a SIP trunk call.

5060

Sets the UDP port used on a SIP phone call.

5070

RE-TRANS.

The initial re-transmission time if there is no answer,

500 ms

T1 TIME

based on the RFC2543 specification. The range is

TRUNK
07

UDP PORT:
PHONE

09

0~9900 ms.
10

RE-TRANS.

The maximum re-transmission time if there is no answer,

T2 TIME

based on the RFC2543 specification. The range is

4000 ms

0~9900 ms.
11

RE-TRANS.

The time the User Agent Server waits after receiving the

T4 TIME

ACK message. Based on the RFC2543 specification. The

5000 ms

range is 0~9900 ms.
12

GENERAL

The server retransmits the response for this length of

RING TM

time until the requested retransmission is received. For

5000 ms

example, the wait time after sending 200 OK for INFO.
The range is 0~99900 ms.
13

INVITE LING

After the client sends ACK for the INVITE Final Response, the

TM

client cannot confirm if the server received the ACK message.

5000 ms

The client waits for this length of time after sending ACK
for the Final Response. The range is 0~99900 ms.

2-312

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

(continued)
No

Parameter

Description

14

PROVISIONAL

After receiving the Provision Response, the User Agent

TIME

waits for this length of time until Timeout ends. The range

Default
180000 m

is 0~999900 ms.
15

INV.NO RESP

Before sending Cancel for the Invite Request, the User

TIME

Agent waits for this length of time. The range is

5000 ms

0~99900 ms.
16

GEN.NO

Before sending Cancel for General Request, the User

RESP TIME

Agent waits for this length of time. The range is

5000 ms

0~99900 ms.
17

REQ.RETRY

After sending General Request, the User Agent waits for

TIME

the Final Response for this length of time. The range is

5000 ms

0~99900 ms.
18
20

SIP SERVER

Sets ENABLE or DISABLE to use an optional, external

ENABLE

industry-standard SIP Server.

DISABLE

SIP SERVER

Sets SIP server IP address.

0.0.0.0.

Sets the port to use on the SIP Server.

5060

Indicates the port number for SIP signalling and sets a

10000

IP
28

SIP SERVER
PORT

29

SIGNAL PORT

range of numbers allowed by firewall equipment. The
common and default IP path or port used is 10000.
32

SEND CLIP

Refers to SEND CLI NUMBER(MMC 323), which pro-

TABLE

vides calling party identification when using the MGI as a

1

SIP gateway.
This provides station ID of the calling station. A singledigit value corresponding to the desired table in MMC
323 should be entered here. This is only used when
MMC 405 value is null.
33

INCOMING

This option selects how incoming calls are routed when

FOLLOW DID

MODE

the MGI is used as a SIP gateway.

TRANS

0

FOLLOW TRUNK RING: Follows MMC 406

1 FOLLOW DID TRANS: Follows MMC 714(default)
2 FOLLOW INCOM DGT: Follows MMC 724
34
35

ALLOW GW

When using a gatekeeper, this permits the SIP gateway

DISABLE

CHECK

to check for gatekeeper presence.

REGIST T-GW

System number when registering as a trunking gateway.

4100
4200

NUM
36
37

REGIST S-GW

System number when registering as a gateway for sta-

NUM

tions.

CLIR WITH

When this option is enabled, the CLIP number is sent to
the network even if the CLIP restriction flag is set.

NUMBER

Samsung Business Communications

DISABLE

2-313

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

(continued)
No
38

Parameter
SIP

Description

Default

Display the status of registration to the SIP Server.

NO

When using SIP Server, if this option is ENABLE, then

DISABLE

REGISTERED
39

GW SERVICE

register by user and if DISABLE then register by system
number.
40

GW DOMAIN

Domain name for authorization when using SIP Server

NAME
41
42

GW USER ID

User ID for authorization when using SIP Server

REGISTER

This password must be used to register SIP Server

-

This tims value is expire time.

000000 SEC

SESSION

Settion Timer Value can be set.

NONE

TIMER

(0:NONE, 1:UPDATE, 2:REINVITE)

SERVER

SIP server vender value can be set.

VENDOR

(0:IETF, 1:IMS, 2:BroadWorks, 3:Xener, 4:Telcoware,

PSWD
43

REG EXPIRE
TIME

44
45

0

5:SEC-IMS)
46

LINK TEST

This value is for Link test between Proxy Server and Of-

NONE

ficeServ system.
(0:NONE, 1:OPTIONS)

DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION

ACTION

2-314

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 834.
Display shows the first option.

GATEWAY CALL ID

2) Enter SIP option number 00-38(e.g., 01) via dial
keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

CALLER ID TYPE

3) Enter SIP option data via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

CALLER ID TYPE

1234

ANI

IP

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 323
MMC 405
MMC 306
MMC 714
MMC 724
MMC 832
MMC 834

CALLING PARTY NUMBER
TRUNK CO TEL NUMBER
TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT
DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION
DIAL NUMBERING PLAN
VOIP ACCESS CODE
H.323 OPTIONS

Samsung Business Communications

2-315

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[839] SIP USER
This MMC is used to register sip user and password.

DEFAULT DATA
ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 839.
Display shows the first table number.

REG-01 : USER NUM

2) press Right Soft button to move cursor.

REG-01 : USER NUM

3) Enter registration number(01-100) via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

REG-01 : USER NUM

4) Enter table number(0,1) via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

REG-01 : USER NUM

5) Enter user number or password via dial keypad.
OR
press Right Soft button to save

REG-01 : USER NUM
-

6) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC entry.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 837

2-316

SIP OPTIONS

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[838] PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES
This MMC is used to select which SYSTEM IP Address(PRIVATE or PUBLIC) is used to
connect other devices via an H.323 or SIP trunk. The device that use the PRIVATE IP Address assigned in this MMC, the PRIVATE SYSTEM IP Address will be used to connect
the device.

When changing IP
When changing any IP address/value, listed below, three digits must be input for
each(octet) field. Example 192.168.1.10 input must be: 192 168 001 010

DEFAULT DATA
TABLE(80): 165.213.255.255
ALL OTHERS: 0.0.0.0

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 838.
Display shows the first table number.

PRIVATE IP (01)

2) Enter table number(01-80) via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

PRIVATE IP (01)

3) Enter IP address via dial keypad.
Cursor will return to step 3.

PRIVATE IP (01)

0. 0. 0. 0

0. 0. 0. 0

165.213. 87.110

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC entry.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 830
MMC 832
MMC 834
MMC 837

ETHERNET PARAMETERS
VOIP ACCESS CODE
H.323 OPTIONS
SIP OPTIONS

Samsung Business Communications

2-317

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[840] IP PHONE INFORMATION
This MMC provides a means to register IP phones with the OfficeServ 7100 system. During registration, the IP and MAC addresses are also registered. The User ID and Password
must match the table entry in this MMC for the IP phone to be registered. The system default phone numbers are 3201~3299 and default User IDs match the default station numbers. The system default password is 1234. IP phones must be individually programmed
with a User ID and Password in order to register with the system.
No
00

Option
USER ID

Description

Default

This is the ID the IP phone must match to register

First 99 IP phones

with the OfficeServ 7100 system.(alphanumeric)

are 3201~3299,
others are EMPTY.

01

USER PSWD

This is the password the IP phone must have to reg-

‘1234’

ister with the OfficeServ 7100 system.
(alphanumeric)
02

IP ADDR

This is the IP address of the IP phone when regis-

0.0.0.0.

tered with the system.(Read only)
03

MAC ADDR

This is MAC address of the IP phone when regis-

FFFFFFFFFFFF

tered with the system.(Read only)
04

SIG PORT

This is the IP UDP port of the IP phone when regis-

6000

tered with the system.(Read only) This information
will be needed when traversing NAT routers, firewalls, etc.
05

VOICE PORT

This is the IP RTP port of the IP phone when regis-

9000

tered with the system.(Read only) This information
will be needed when traversing NAT routers, firewalls, etc.
06

IP TYPE

This is the type of IP network used: PRIVATE or

PRIVATE

PUBLIC.
07

DSP TYPE

This selects which CODEC this phone’s DSP will use.

G.729A

G.729A(low bandwidth) or G.711(high bandwidth).
This data uses IP phone to IP phone connection
only; others follow MGI CODEC type.
08

PHONE TYPE

This is the type of IP phone used, SAMSUNG or SIP

SAMSUNG

(future). Use SAMSUNG.
09

REGIST CLR

This is used to clear the registration of a particular

NO

IP phone. This is similar to unplugging and plugging
in the phone and is useful for maintenance.
10

FRAME

This value determines the transmission interval time

COUNT

of VoIP packets generated by the IP phone. This

20 ms

data uses MMC 841 ITP DSP PARA DOWN =
PHONE DATA only. The range is 10~40 ms.

2-318

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

(continued)
No
11

Option
JITTER BUF

Description
Decides the minimum time to consider delay for jitter

Default
20 m

adjustment. This data uses MMC 841 ITP DSP
PARA DOWN = PHONE DATA only. The range is
10~90 ms.
12

TOS FIELD

An 8-bit binary value that will be used by external

All bits 0

routers, switches, etc,(that optionally support TOSbit prioritization) to identify the transport-priority
value of data packets generated by the IP phone.
This value can be left at the default value(00000) if
your network infrastructure does not support this
method of bandwidth management. This data uses
MMC 841 ITP DSP PARA DOWN = PHONE DATA
only.
13

S/W VERSION

14

S/W UPGRADE

Display IP phone software version.(Read only)

-

This is used as IP phone software upgrade request

-

command. When YES is selected and Right Soft
button is pressed, the system requests IP phone
software upgrade with TFTP IP address.
15

TIME ZONE

Allows remote IP phones to display own time zone.

00.00

16

PUBLIC TO

When this option is set to USE MGI, the MGI can be

NOT USE MGI

PUBLIC

allocated between remote IPs in the same private
zone.

17

SIG TYPE

This option can change UDP/TCP signal type for

UDP

IPs.(ITP V3.xx only supports the TCP signal type. If
TCP is set and ITP V2.xx attempts to connect, the
TCP signal type will change from TCP to UDP
automatically.)
18

PRIVATE IP

Displays private IP address of remote IP phone allo-

-

cated by phone’s router.
19

VIDEO DSP

This option is codec value o f Video IP phone

H.263

(0 : MPEG4, 1 : H.263)
20

VIDEO SIZE

This option is for video size

CIF

(0 : CIF, 2 : QCIF)

DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION

Samsung Business Communications

2-319

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 840.
Display shows:

[3201]USER ID

2) Enter IP phone number via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

[3210]USER ID

3) Enter IP phone option number via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

[3210]DSP TYPE

4) Enter option data via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to save and return to step 3.

[3210]DSP TYPE

3201

3210

G.729A

G.711

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 615
MMC 616
MMC 830
MMC 831
MMC 835
MMC 841

2-320

MGI GROUP
MGI USER
ETHERNET PARAMETERS
MGI PARAMETERS
MGI DSP OPTIONS
SYSTEM IP OPTIONS

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[841] SYSTEM IP OPTIONS
This MMC provides various proprietary Samsung VoIP and IP integration options.
The options set in this MMC apply system wide.
No
00

Option
PHONE VERSION

Description
Sets running IP-based phone and new phone soft-

Default
0000

ware version with the system.
0 LARGE DGP: Large LCD phone
1 LARGE ITP: Large LCD IP-based phone
2 2LINE ITP2: 2-line LCD IP-based phone
3 WIPM APPL: Wireless IP-based mobile phone
software.
4 SOFT PC: IP phone emulation on PC (SoftPhone application)
5 SOFT PDA: IP phone emulation on PDA (SoftPhone application)
8 WIPM BOOT: Wireless IP-based mobile phone
boot program.
9 SOFT MENU: Soft menu version
01

PHONE TFTP IP

Sets phone software upgrade TFTP server IP ad-

0.0.0.0

dress.
02

ITP REGISTRATION

Defines the method that IP-based phones use to
register with the system.
0 TYPE:
a)

SYS PSWD

SYS PSWD: System will authenticate the
IP-based phones with the value in ITP
REGISTRATION: PSWD parameter(see 1,
below).

B)

PHONE PSWD: System will authenticate
the IP-based phones according to entries
made in MMC 840.

c)

DISABLE: System will not authenticate
IP-based phones.

1 PSWD: This is a system-wide password used

‘1234’

for registration of IP phones.
03

EASYSET OPTION

Sets EasySet link via LAN option with the system.
0 PSWD: This is a system-wide password used

‘1234’

for authentication of EasySet server.
1

ALIVE: This is an EasySet link via LAN alive

0 SEC

check timer.

Samsung Business Communications

2-321

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

(continued)
No
04

Option
CTI LINK OPTION

Description

Default

Sets CTI link via LAN option with the system.
0 SMDR REPORT: Sets YES or NO for SMDR data

NO

to CTI link via LAN.
1 UCD REPORT: Sets YES or NO for UCD data to

NO

CTI link via LAN.
2

ALIVE: This is a CTI link via LAN alive check

300 SEC

timer. If this is set to 0, the system will not
check link alive.
05

ITP DSP PARA

Sets IP phone DSP parameter system wide.
0 M-FRAME: This value determines the trans-

10 ms

mission interval time of VoIP packets generated
by the IP phone. This data uses DOWN = SYS
DATA only(see 3, below). The range is
10~40 ms.
1 JITTER: Decides the minimum time to consider

20 ms

delay for jitter adjustment. This data uses
DOWN = SYS DATA only(see 3, below). The
range is 10~90 ms.
2 TOS: An 8-bit binary value that will be used by

All bits 0

external routers, switches, etc,(that optionally
support TOS-bit prioritization) to identify the
transport-priority value of data packets generated by the IP phone. This value can be left at
the default value(00000) if your network infrastructure does not support this method of
bandwidth management. This data uses DOWN
= SYSTEM DATA only(see 3, below).
3 DOWN: Determines whether system-wide data

SYS DATA

or individual phone data is used for DSP control
of IP-based phones.
a) SYSTEM DATA: System-wide data will be
used.(MMC 841)
b) PHONE DATA: Individual phone data will
be used.(MMC 840)
06
07

2-322

ITP TX GAIN/HSET
ITP RX GAIN/HSET

Sets IP-based phone Handset TX gain value of

Depends on

each level.

country

Sets IP-based phone Handset RX gain value of

Depends on

each level.

country

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

(continued)
No
08

Option
ITP TX GAIN/MIC

Description
Sets IP-based phone MIC gain value of each level.

Default
Depends on
country

09
10

ITP RX GAIN/SPKR

Sets IP-based phone SPKR gain value of each

Depends on

level.

country

ITP VERS

Sets IP-based phone software upgrade option with

UPGRADE

the system.
0 TYPE:
a) MMC COMMAND: IP-based phone soft-

MMC
COMMAND

ware upgraded manually in MMC 840.
b) PHONE CON: IP-based phone software
upgraded automatically when phone connected.
c)

AUTO TIME: IP-based phone software upgraded automatically at set time.

1 START(HHMM): IP-based phone software

0000(Disable)

automatic upgrade start time.
2 INTERVAL: IP-based phone software automatic

10 seconds.

upgrade interval time.
11

MGI ALIVE PERIOD

Set the time interval of checking the link connec-

-

tion of MGI card and the system.
13

LICENSE KEY

Insert the license key to enable SoftPhone connec-

NONE

tion.
14

LICENSE STATUS

The status(Valid or Invalid) of the inserted license

-

key.
15

DATA CARD IPC

Set the value(YES or NO) to support IPC by DATA

YES

CARD
16

MP MGI/VM KEY

Insert the license key to enable MGI, VM ports

-

17

MP MGI/VM STATUS

The status of the inserted MP MGI/VM license key.

-

1. MGI ALLOW (0~8)
2. VMS ALLOW (0~4)

DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION

Samsung Business Communications

2-323

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 841.
Display shows the first available option.

PHONE VERSION

2) Enter option category number 0-13 via dial
Keypad.(e.g., 2)
OR
Press Volume button to make select and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

ITP REGISTRATION

3) Enter option number via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make select and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.

ITP REGISTRATION

4) Enter option data.
OR
Press Right Soft button to save and return to step 3.

ITP REGISTRATION

LARGE DGP: 0000

TYPE: SYS PSWD

PSWD: 1234

PSWD: 8228

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 199
MMC 840

2-324

SHOW LICENSE STATUS
IP PHONE INFORMATION

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[845] WLAN PARAMETERS
This MMC modifies the WLAN parameters.
The SYSTEM KEY is used internally to distinguish between systems when registering a
terminal. The default value is ‘00000’, but this must be changed to another value to enable
the use of WLAN terminals. In addition, the SYSTEM KEY serves as an identification ID
when a WLAN terminal connects to the WBS24.
The default value of the SYSTEM ID, ‘WBS24’, must also be changed to another value in
order to use multiple systems in one area. The DNS setting for WLAN is additionally described in this MMC.
Set the network configuration for WBS24 by setting the IP assignment, Netmask and
Gateway. These settings should be compatible with the Intranet since the network configuration setting is essential for data service. In addition, the RF frequency for WBS24 should be selected. Currently up to 14 frequencies may be selected.
Session Initiation Protocol(SIP) variables used for the WBS24(Basic) can be defined.
WLAN PARAMETER
No

Parameter

05

CODEC LIST

Description

Default

CODEC that can be used for VoIP calls between

CODEC 1: G.729

WBS24 and terminal. G.711u, G.711a, G.726, and

CODEC 2: NONE

G.729 can all be assigned.

CODEC 3: NONE
CODEC 4: NONE

06

RF CHANNEL

Set a RF CHANNEL value that can be used by

USE CH 1: 01

WBS.

USE CH 2: 06
USE CH 3: 11
USE CH 4: 00
USE CH 5: 00
USE CH 6: 00

Samsung Business Communications

2-325

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

(continued)
No

Parameter

Description

Default

07

VERSION

WLAN module version.

Version

20

MAX AP CH.

Set the maximum channel number of AP

00

21

WLAN SWTCH

Support WLAN switch function

DISABLE

SIP PARAMETER
No
0

Parameter
RE-TRANS T1

Description

Default(ms)

When using an unreliable transmission protocol such

500

as UDP, retransmission is required when no reply is
received. RE-TRANS.T1 TIME is the initial retransmission interval defined in RFC2543.
1

RE-TRANS T2

Maximum retransmission interval defined in RFC

4000

2543
2

RE-TRANS T4

RFC 2543 defines this parameter for various pur-

5000

poses. For example, this parameter can be used as
the time waited by User Agent Server after receiving
ACK message in an unreliable transmission protocol.
3

GEN RING TM

When using an unreliable transmission protocol, the

6000

server cannot be sure if the client has received the
last reply. Thus, the server must retransmit the reply
for this length of time until it receives the requested
retransmission. For example, this parameter can be
used as the waiting time after sending 200 OK for
INFO.
4

INV RING TM

When using an unreliable transmission protocol, the

1000

client cannot verify if the server has received the
ACK returned to the server for the INVITE Final Response. The client waits for this length of time after
sending the ACK for the Final Response.
5

GEN NO RESP

Waiting time before cancelling SIP related Request.

5000

6

INV NO RESP

Waiting time before cancelling SIP INVITE Request.

6000

7

REQ

Waiting time for receiving final response for SIP re-

5000

RETRY

lated Request.

PROVISIONAL

On receiving Provision Response, the User Agent

8

180000

must wait for this length of time until Timeout.

DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION

2-326

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 845.

WLAN: SYSTEM ID
WBS24

2) When the cursor is on WLAN, press Volume button
and select WLAN, WBS, or SIP.

WLAN: SYSTEM ID

3) Press Right Soft button to move to the SYSTEM ID.
When the cursor is below SYSTEM ID, press
Volume button to select the setting menu for WLAN.

WLAN: SYSTEM ID

WBS24

WBS24

4) Set the items below at the WLAN menu.
SYSTEM ID: Use the Soft button to move the
cursor and enter the new WLAN SYSTEM ID to
register.

WLAN: SYSTEM ID
WBS24

Press Soft button and proceed to next register status.
Register the SYSTEM KEY.

WLAN: SYSTEM KEY
00000

Register the 1st DNS server IP.

WLAN: 1ST DNS IP
0. 0. 0. 0

Register the 2nd DNS server IP.

WLAN: 2ND DNS IP
0. 0. 0. 0

Register the 2nd WBS IP.

WLAN: 2ND WBS IP
0. 0. 0. 0

Select the voice codec. Select from G711a, G711u,
and G729 CODEC.
Numbers are given from 1 to 4 based on priority.

WLAN: CODEC LIST

Select the usable RF channel. Maximum six channels
can be used for a system.
(Default RF channel: 1, 6, 11)

WLAN: RF CHANNEL

Used to change the TX POWER of all WBS.
(Default: LEVEL 1~4)

WLAN: WBS TX PWR

Used to clear registration information of all WBS.

WLAN: CLR WBSREG

CODEC 1: G.711a

USE CH 1: 01

DEFAULT

ARE YOU SURE?NO

Samsung Business Communications

2-327

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

5) Set the items below at the WBS24 menu. The selected WBS is as set in MMC 849(SELECT AP
TYPE option) i.e. CWBS=COMBO WBS,
BWBS=BASIC WBS.
Register the WBS24 IP ADDRESS.

CWBS1: IP ADDR
0. 0. 0. 0

Register the WBS24 NET MASK.

CWBS1: NET MASK
255.255.255. 0

Register the WBS24 GATEWAY.

CWBS1: GATEWAY
0. 0. 0. 0

Displays the WBS24 MAC ADDRESS.

CWBS1 : MAC ADDR
FFFF FFFF FFFF

Displays the WBS24 VERSION.

CWBS1 : VERSION

Displays the WBS24 STATUS.

CWBS1 : STATUS
OFF

Register the WBS24 RF CHANNEL.(The WBS RF
channel must be selected from the pre-assigned
RF channels in WLAN RF CHANNELS).

CWBS1 : RF CHAN

Register the WBS24 TX POWER.
(Default: LEVEL 1~4)

CWBS1 : TX POWER

Used to clear the WBS parameter.

CWBS1 : PARA CLR

USE CH 1:01

DEFAULT

ARE YOU SURE?NO

6) Set the items below at the menu.
Register the RE-TRANS T1.
The initial re-transmission time if no answer,
based on the RFC2543 specification.
The range is 0-9900 ms.(Default: 500 ms)
Register the RE-TRANS T2.
The maximum re-transmission time if no answer,
based on the RFC2543 specification.
The range is 0-9900 ms.(Default: 4000 ms)

2-328

SIP : RE-TRANS T1
000500MS

SIP : RE-TRANS T2
004000MS

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Register the RE-TRANS T4. The time the User Agent
Server waits after receiving the ACK message.
Based on the RFC2543 specification.
The range is 0-9900 ms.(Default: 5000 ms)

SIP : RE-TRANS T4

Register the GEN RING TM. The server retransmits
the response for this length of time until the
requested retransmission is received. For example,
the wait time after sending 200 OK for INFO.
The range is 0-99900 ms.(Default: 6000 ms)

SIP : GEN RING TM

Register the INV RING TM. After the client sends
ACK for the INVITE Final Response, the client
can not confirm if the server received the ACK message. The client waits this long after sending ACK for
the Final Response.
The range is 0-99900 ms.(Default: 1000 ms)

SIP : INV RING TM

Register the GEN NO RESP. Before sending Cancel
for General Request, the User Agent waits this long.
The range is 0-99900 ms.(Default: 5000 ms)

SIP : GEN NO RESP

Register the INV NO RESP. Before sending Cancel
for the Invite Request, the User Agent waits this
long.
The range is 0-99900 ms.(Default: 5000 ms)

SIP : INV NO RESP

Register the REQ RETRY. After sending General Request, he User Agent waits for the Final Response
for this length of time.
The range is 0-99900 ms Default is 5000 ms

SIP : REQ RETRY

Register the PROVISIONAL. After receiving the
Provision Response, the User Agent waits this long
until Timeout ends.
The range is 0-999900 ms.(Default: 180000 ms)

SIP : PROVISIONAL

005000MS

006000MS

001000MS

005000MS

006000MS

005000MS

180000MS

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 846 WIP INFORMATION
MMC 848 WLAN IP/MAC LIST
MMC 849 WLAN CONFIGURATION

Samsung Business Communications

2-329

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[846] WIP INFORMATION
This MMC sets up the WIP-5000M wireless terminal information.
No

Parameter

Description

Default

00

REGISTERED

Shows if the terminal is registered.

NO

01

LOCATED

Shows if the terminal is connected to the system.

DETACH

02

PHONE TYPE

Shows the type of the terminal.

NONE

03

WLI NUMBER

Number of WLI connected to the WBS24 servic-

-

ing the terminal
04

WBS NUMBE

Number of WBS24 servicing the terminal

-

05

IP OFFSET

Location of IP pool of the terminal IP

-

06

IP ADDRESS

Terminal IP address

0.0.0.0

07

MAC ADDR

Terminal MAC address

0000 0000 0000

08

USER ID

User ID per terminal

1212

09

PASSWORD

Password of terminal user

0000

10

INSERT DGT

If five or more numbers are entered into the WIP

-

terminal, this INSERT DGT is prefixed to the
numbers, provided the entered numbers do not
start with a C.O. number, C.O. group number,
LCR, network LCR, or function code.

DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION

ACTION
1) Press Transfer button and enter 846.

DISPLAY
[3301] REGISTERED
NO

2) Dial the WIP number.
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
3) Set the items below at the menu.
Confirm the status of terminal registration for each
phone number.

2-330

[3301] REGISTERED
NO

[3301] REGISTERED
NO

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

Displays the location of the registered terminal.

[3301] LOCATED
DETACH

Displays the PHONE TYPE of the registered terminal.

[3301] PHONE TYPE

Displays the WLI NUMBER of the registered terminal.(currently not used)

[3301] WLI NUMBER

Displays the WBS NUMBER of the registered terminal.

[3301] WBS NUMBER

Displays the IP OFFSET of the registered terminal.

[3301] IP OFFSET

Displays the IP ADDRESS of the registered terminal.

[3301] IP ADDRESS

Displays the MAC ADDRESS of the registered terminal.

[3301] MAC ADDR

Register the USER ID of the terminal.

[3301] USER ID
1212

Register the PASSWORD of the terminal.

[3301] PASSWORD
0000

Register the INSERT DGT for the terminal.
(These digits will be automatically inserted in
front of user dialling digits when there are more
than 4 digits and they do not start with the trunk access code or feature code.)

[3301] INSERT DGT
_

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 848
MMC 849

WLAN IP/MAC LIST
WLAN CONFIGURATION

Samsung Business Communications

2-331

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[848] WLAN IP/MAC LIST
This MMC is used when viewing the IP list assigned to WLAN, or when creating a new IP
list. This IP address is automatically assigned to WIP-5000M during a new registration
procedure. If the IP address is already assigned, the assigned terminal number will be
shown in the USED field.
Also, the MMC is used to set MAC addresses in the terminal in order to use the wireless
LAN.(not yet implemented)

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button, and enter 848.

IP:001 USED:
0. 0. 0. 0

2) Select the menu.(0: IP LIST, 1: MAC LIST)

IP:001 USED:
0. 0. 0. 0

3) Select the table number.

IP:001 USED:
_ 0. 0. 0. 0

4) Enter the IP ADDRESS.

IP:001 USED:
168. 0. 0. 0

5) A number next to USED indicates the terminal number to which the IP ADDRESS was assigned.

IP:001 USED:3301
168.219.149. 5

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 846
MMC 849

2-332

WIP INFORMATION
WLAN CONFIGURATION

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[849] WLAN CONFIGURATION
This MMC is used to set the WLAN configuration.
Parameter

Description

REGISTER VoWLAN

Enable or disable registration of new WIP-5000M mobile phone.

WIP REGIST CLEAR

Used to clear the registration of WIP. FORCED mode clearing is used
when the device is not connected normally(e.g., device broken), otherwise the NORMAL mode clearing can be used.

WBS WEP SERVICE

Enable or disable the WEP(Wired Equivalent Privacy) feature.

WEP KEY

Assign the WEP key.(13 characters only)

STATIC WBS IP

Select the use of Static WBS IP.

STATIC WIP IP

Select the use of Static WIP IP.

SELECT AP

Select if using DUAL AP or BASIC APs

DEFAULT DATA
REGISTER VoWLAN: DISABLE
WIP REGIST CLEAR: FORCED
WBS WEP SERVICE: DISABLE
WEP KEY: NONE
STATIC WBS IP: DISABLE
STATIC WIP IP: DISABLE
SELECT AP TYPE: BASIC AP(DEPENDS ON COUNTRY)

ACTION
1) Press Transfer button, and press 849.

DISPLAY
ENTER PASSWORD
_

2) Enter the PASSCODE.
(This PASSCODE is assigned in MMC 202
WLAN REGST)

ENTER PASSCODE

3) Select ENABLE to register a terminal.

REGISTER VoWLAN

****

ENABLE

4) Select WIP REGIST CLEAR to clear the registration
status for a terminal.

WIP REGIST CLEAR

5) Select the WEP KEY setting when ENCRYPTION
is selected.

WBS WEP SERVICE

Samsung Business Communications

3301:FORCED

DISABLE

2-333

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

6) Enter WEP KEY values when the WBS WEP SERVICE is enabled.(13 characters only)

WEP KEY

7) Select ENABLE to use the static WBS IP.

STATIC WBS IP
DISABLE

8) Select ENABLE to use the static WIP IP.

STATIC WIP IP
DISABLE

9) Select AP TYPE of the system. If you change the AP
type, the system must be restarted.

SELECT AP TYPE
COMBO AP
SELECT AP TYPE
RESET SYSTEM?NO

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 846
MMC 848

2-334

WIP INFORMATION
WLAN IP/MAC LIST

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[850] SYSTEM RESOURCE DISPLAY
This MMC is used for system resource display.(used and free resources) This is a READONLY MMC.
0.
1.
2.
3.

DTMFR DSP’S
CID DSP’S
R2MFC DSP’S
CONF GROUP’S

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 850.
Display shows:

DTMFR DSP’S

2) Enter the option number.(0-3)
OR
Press Volume button to select.

CID DSP’S

USE:000 FREE:008

USE:000 FREE:008

3) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-335

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[851] ALARM REPORTING
This MMC is used to view, store, print or clear system alarms. Two levels of faults are displayed via an alarm code: major alarms and minor alarms. Major alarms codes are usually
service affecting and require a certified technician to determine the fault. A minor alarm indicates a fault that may or may not be service affecting and usually does not seriously degrade the system’s operating capabilities.
The alarm buffer holds up to 100 alarms on a First In-First Out(FIFO) basis. Alarms provide a date and time stamp based on the system time. If applicable, the hardware cabinet,
port, and/or slot will be displayed. If an ALARM SIO port is programmed(MMC 804),
alarm information can be printed on demand and as it is provided.
ALARM REPORTING OPTIONS(Select one of the options)
No

Option

Description

0

VIEW ALARMS

View alarm buffer.

1

OVERFLOW

Determines buffer control when buffer is full.

CONTROL

0

OVERWRITTEN: When buffer is full, the oldest entry in
buffer is overwritten.(Default.)

1 STOP RECORDING: When buffer is full, stop recording
alarms.
2

CLEAR ALARM BUF

Clears alarm buffer.

3

PRINT ALARM BUF

Prints contents of alarm buffer to the assigned alarm IO port.

ALARM CODE DEFINITION
See Alarm Code Definitions in MMC 852.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

2-336

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 851.
Display shows:

SYS ALARM REPORT

2) Enter desired option.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

SYS ALARM REPORT

3) System displays the alarm count number, date and
time stamp.
Alarm type and cause code will display.

[00] 02/18 14:30

4) Press Volume button to scroll through other alarms.
OR
Press Right Soft button to return to step 2.

SYS ALARM REPORT

VIEW ALARMS

VIEW ALARMS

MNF02 C1-S02

VIEW ALARMS

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 852

SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS

Samsung Business Communications

2-337

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[852] SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS
This MMC allows the assignment of system alarms to ring and display on stations that
have an Alarm key assigned. The Alarm key is assigned in MMC 722(Station Key Programming). Alarm key programming is tenant wide(tenants 1 and 2). Alarms not programmed to report to the system Alarm key will still be retained in the maintenance alarm
buffer for Alarm Reporting(MMC 851). The alarm buffer holds up to 100 alarms on a First
In-First Out(FIFO) basis. Pressing the Alarm key will silence the audible alarm until another alarm is generated by the system. Alarm conditions that have multiple causes(e.g.,
PRI errors and synchronization loss) will print all associated alarm information if an SIO
port is programmed as an ALARM port. The specific fault alarm data can be displayed via
MMC 851, System Alarm Reporting.

Alarm Notification
Alarm Notification Off/On(0/1) determines if the alarm provides a visual and audible notification to the System Alarm key station(s). Pressing the System Alarm
key and the release key will silence the audible alarm only at the station that
pressed the System Alarm key and the release key. See alarm displays table for
assignments.

Alarm Code Definitions:
No

Code

Alarm Name

-

MJA--

MCP2 Error

01

MJA01

POR Restart

Definition
System Fault
MCP2 restart process has been executed via power on
restart.(POR)

02

MJA02

Soft Restart

MCP2 restart process has been executed via button reset.

03

MJA03

Mem Reset

The system RAM has been cleared via manual programming(PCMMC or KMMC) resulting in a system reset.

04

MJA04

MCP Reset

The MCP2 has software exception error.
Alarm data = Reason
- BUS ERR: Restart Bus Error
- ADDR.ERR: Restart Address Error
- ILLEGAL: Restart Illegal Opcode
- ZERO DIVID: Restart Zero Divide
- PRIVILEGE: Restart Privilege Violation
- ENDL LOOP: Restart Endless Loop

05

MJA05

LCP Reset

The SCP2 or LCP2 has reset
Alarm data = Cabinet(1, 2 or 3)

06

MJA06

PCM Switching

A fault has occurred in the Switching Control
Alarm data = MCP BASE, ESM: 1, ESM: 2 or ESM: 3

2-338

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

(continued)
No

Code

Alarm Name

Definition

-

MJB--

LCP/TASK Error

LCP or TASK Fault

08

MJB01

HDLC Com Error

Communications to LCP lost or faulty.

09

MJB02

Memory Alarm 1

A RAM diagnostic check error has occurred in the
MCP2.

10

MJB03

Memory Alarm 2

A RAM diagnostic check error has occurred in cabinet 1
SCP2.

11

MJB04

Memory Alarm 3

A RAM diagnostic check error has occurred in cabinet 2
LCP2.

12

MJB05

Memory Alarm 4

A RAM diagnostic check error has occurred in cabinet 3
LCP2.

13

MJB06

IPC MSGQ Over

IPC TX queue full error has occurred in the MCP2.
Alarm data = IPC Queue type
(MCP-LAN, MCP-SCP, MCP-LCP1, MCP-LCP2)

14

MJB07

Task MSGQ Over

Task MSG queue full error has occurred in the MCP2.
Alarm data = Error Task

16

MJC--

DSP Error

MJC01

DTMF Fault

System DSP Fault
An abnormal interrupt has occurred in the system
DTMF resources.
Alarm data = DTMF Receiver DSP position

17

MJC02

Tone Fault

An abnormal interrupt has occurred in the system
tone resources.
Alarm data = TONE Receiver DSP position.

25

MJC10

AA-DTMF Fault

An abnormal fault reported in one of the AA card
DTMF resources.
Alarm data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz)

26

MJC11

AA-MFR Rec

An abnormal fault reported in one of the AA card
DTMF resources has recovered.
Alarm data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz)

27

MJC12

E911 Restart

The E911 card has restarted.
Alarm data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

28

MJC13

E911 Block

The E911 card has blocked because the system
detects the card does not work correctly.
Alarm data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

31

MJC16

WLI Restart

The WLI card has restarted.
Alarm data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

32

MJC17

WLI Block

The WLI card has blocked because the system
detects the card does not work correctly.
Alarm data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

Samsung Business Communications

2-339

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

(continued)
No

Code

Alarm Name

Definition

-

MJD--

DTRK Error

ISDN or E1 card Fault

33

MJD01

Sync Failure

Clocking on TEPRI cards has become asynchronous.

34

MJD02

Sync Recovery

Clocking on TEPRI cards has become synchronous.

35

MJD03

Red Alarm

Locally detected loss of PCM carrier on TEPRI card for
more than 250 ms.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

36

MJD04

Red Alarm Rec

PCM carrier detected locally on TEPRI cards.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

37

MJD05

Yellow Alarm

Remotely detected failure transmitted in frame on
TEPRI card.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

38

MJD06

Yellow Alarm

Remotely detected failure restored transmitted on

Rec

TEPRI card.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

39

MJD07

Blue Alarm

All 1's being transmitted on facility on TEPRI card.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

40

MJD08

Blue Alarm Rec

A blue alarm condition has been cleared.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

41

MJD09

Bit Error Alarm

Alarm is activated when the error rate exceeds 1 x 10-6
-6
-3
errors. Note: 1x10 is threshold for minor alarm, 1 x 10 is

threshold for major alarm errors on E1, PRI or BRI.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)
42

MJD10

NTWRK Event

An Implausible event has occurred on the PRI or BRI
Network digital line. Protocols do not match or subscriber ID mismatch.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

43

MJD11

SPID Init Error

The BRI received an error from the network.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Channel(Cx-Syy-czz)

44

MJD12

SPID Init Rec

The BRI has recovered from an error on the network
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Channel(Cx-Syy-czz)

45

MJD13

LPBK Error

Internal on demand loopback failed.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Channel(Cx-Syy-czz)

46

MJD14

LPBK Recovery

Internal on demand loopback test passed.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Channel(Cx-Syy-czz)

47

MJD15

BRI DL Unavail

A BRI data link is out of service.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Channel(Cx-Syy-czz)

48

MJD16

BRI DL Recovery

A BRI data link is back in service.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Channel(Cx-Syy-czz)

49

MJD17

RAM Error

An error has occurred in the TEPRI or BRI card RAM.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

2-340

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

(continued)
No

Code

Alarm Name

-

MJD--

DTRK Error

50

MJD18

E1 Restart

Definition
ISDN or E1 card Fault
The E1 card has restarted.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

51

MJD19

PRI Restart

The PRI card has restarted.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

52

MJD20

BRI Restart

The BRI card has restarted.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

53

MJD21

PCM Loss

Loss of PCM coding on a digital facility.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

54

MJD22

PCM Recovery

Loss of PCM coding on a digital facility.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

-

MJE--

MGI Error

MGI card Fault

55

MJE01

MGI Restart

The MGI card has restarted.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

56

MJE02

MGI Stop

The MGI card has stoped.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

57

MJE03

MGI IP Duplicate

The MGI card IP address is duplicated.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

58

MJE04

MGI NTWK Error

The MGI card has blocked because the system detects
the card doesn’t respond via network link.
External ping test.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

59

MJE05

MGI NTWK Rec

The MGI card has restarted because the system detects
the card does respond via network link.
External ping test.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

60

MJE06

MGI DSP Error

The MGI card DSP has blocked because the system
detects the card DSP does not run correctly.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy-Pzz)

61

MJE07

MGI DSP Run

The MGI card DSP has restarted because the system
detects the card DSP runs correctly.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy-Pzz)

62

MJE08

WBS Disconnect

Indicates the WBS is disconnected.
Alarm Data = CWBS:xx or BWBS:xx

63

MJE09

WBS connect

Indicates the WBS is connected.
Alarm Data = CWBS:xx or BWBS:xx

Samsung Business Communications

2-341

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

(continued)
No

64

Code

Alarm Name

Definition

MNF--

Minor Error

Minor Fault with Alarm Buffer saving

MNF01

Card Out

A circuit card mounted in a universal slot has been removed from service or is not recognized by the system.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

65

MNF02

Card In

A circuit card mounted in a universal slot has been returned to service.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

66

MNF03

IPC Error

Inter-processor communication error has occurred.
Alarm Data = Cabinet-Slot(Cx-Syy)

67

MNF04

Trunk Fault

Out of service trunk detected via loop detect. Internal
CODEC test.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz)

68

MNF05

Trunk Recovery

Out of service trunk detected via loop detected as out of
service is now operational.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz)

69

MNF06

Trunk Discon-

Out of service trunk detected via seizure of trunk. Exter-

nect

nal seizure test.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz)

70

MNF07

Trunk Connect

Out of service trunk recovered via seizure of trunk. External seizure test.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz)

71

MNF08

SIO TxQ Over

SIO Tx Queue full error has occurred in the MCP2.
Alarm Data = SIO number(SIO: x)

72

MNF09

SIO TxQ Under

SIO Tx Queue under error has occurred in the MCP2.
Alarm Data = SIO number(SIO: x)

73

MNF10

E1 Out Of Srv

E1 Digital line status has been changed to out of service.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

74

MNF11

E1 In Service

E1 Digital line has been restored to normal service.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

75

MNF12

SIO Out

IO port has lost DTR.
Alarm Data = SIO number(SIO: x)

76

MNF13

SIO In

IO port has regained DTR.
Alarm Data = SIO 1 through 6

77

MNF14

TODC Error

Time of Day Clock in the MCP2 has erred.

78

MNF15

TSW Over Alarm

The TSW has been requested to exceed the capacity of
available time slots. Maximum 192 per cabinet.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

79

MNF16

PSU Alarm

There are more ports than can be supported in a
cabinet and more power is required.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

2-342

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

(continued)
No

Code

Alarm Name

80

MNF17

PSU Alarm Rec

Definition
Over-configuration of cabinet has been corrected.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

81

MNF18

SLI Fault

An SLI card has been detected as out of service via an
internal CODEC test.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz)

82

MNF19

SLI Recovery

An SLI card detected as out of service has been detected as recovered and is in service via internal CODEC test.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot, Port(Cx-Syy-Pzz)

83

MNF20

PSUB Alarm

Indicates there are over 120 ports in a cabinet with two
PSUs.
Alarm Data = Cabinet, Slot(Cx-Syy)

84

MNF21

DSS Alarm

System capacity of 64-button DSS modules has been
exceeded.

85

MNF26

SIO RxQ Over

SIO Tx Queue full error has occurred in the MCP2.
Alarm Data = SIO number(SIO: x)

86

MNF27

SIO RxQ Under

SIO Tx Queue under error has occurred in the MCP2.
Alarm Data = SIO number(SIO: x)

87

MNF28

LAN Printer Err

LAN printer error has occurred in the MCP2.
Alarm Data = Data Type(SMDR)

88

MNF29

LAN Printer Rec

LAN printer error has recovered in the MCP2.
Alarm Data = Data Type(SMDR)

89
90

MNG--

Minor Error

Minor Fault without Alarm Buffer saving

MNG01

Phone Discon-

Indicates the Phone is disconnected.

nect

Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz

Phone Connect

Indicates the Phone is connected.

MNG02

Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz
91

MNG03

Off Hook Alarm

Indicates Extension Off Hook Alarm timer has expired.
Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz

92

MNG04

On Hook

Indicates the Off Hook Alarm Extension is on hook.
Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz

93

MNG05

MGI Packet Loss

Indicates the MGI connection RTP packet loss is more
than 10 %.
Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz

94

MNG06

MGI Packet Delay

Indicates the MGI connection RTP packet delay is more
than 500 ms.
Alarm Data = Tel number or Cx-Syy-Pzz

Samsung Business Communications

2-343

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

DEFAULT DATA
ALL OFF

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 852.
Display shows:

01:MJA01 ACT:OFF

2) Enter desired Alarm Display number.(e.g., 64)
OR
Press Volume buttons to select desired option and
press Right Soft button to advance the cursor.

64:MNF01 ACT:OFF

3) To select if the alarm is active, press 1 for
YES and 0 for NO.
An entry will return the cursor to step 2.
OR
Press Volume buttons to make selection and press
Right Soft button to save and return to step 2.

64:MNF01 ACT:ON

POR Restart

Card Out

Card Out

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 501
MMC 722
MMC 723
MMC 851
MMC 853

2-344

SYSTEM TIMERS
STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
ALARM REPORTING
MAINTENANCE BUSY

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[853] MAINTENANCE BUSY
This MMC is used to place stations, trunks and common resources equipment in a maintenance busy condition. This can be used to isolate suspected intermittent problems. Stations
placed in maintenance busy will behave like a station in DND when called. The calling stations display will show ‘MADE BUSY’. Stations receiving DID or E&M type calls will receive a DND/ No more calls tone. The station display will still function with station and
date.
When the busy station is accessed, it will function like a ‘locked all’ station. Trunks made
busy cannot originate calls. Ring down type trunks will still ring the programmed destination. Common resource equipment such as DSPs, CID DSPs and miscellaneous equipment
such as page ports and voice mail card ports can also be placed in a maintenance busy state.
MAINTENANCE BUSY OPTIONS
No

Option

Description

0

TRK

Trunks

1

STN

Stations

2

PAGE

Page Ports

4

DTMFR

DTMF Receiver(4/DSP)

5

CID

CID Receiver(14/DSP)

6

R2MFC

R2MFC Receiver(8/DSP)

7

CONF

GRP #01-24

8

MGI

MGI Ports

DTMFR/CID/R2MFC DSP
If DTMFR, CID or R2MFC is selected when DSP is not mounted, display will
show NONE. If mounted, display will show IDLE by default.

DEFAULT DATA
ALL IDLE

Samsung Business Communications

2-345

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 853.
Display shows busy functions:

MAINTENANCE BUSY

2) Enter busy function type(0-8) via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

MAINTENANCE BUSY

3) Enter station number.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

MAINTENANCE BUSY

4) Press 1 to make busy or 0 to make idle.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to save and return step 3.

MAINTENANCE BUSY

TRK :NONEÆ

STN :NONEÆ

STN :201ÆIDLE

STN :201ÆBUSY

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 851
MMC 852

2-346

ALARM REPORTING
SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[854] DIAGNOSTIC TIME
Provides a means to set the Diagnostic Time. The system diagnostics tests include memory
audits, internal loopback tests on digital trunks, and DSP, AA DSP tests. Additional tests
include CODEC tests on analogue trunk and station cards and tone tests. If the diagnostics
cannot complete the tests because of system traffic, the system will abort the tests and retry
during the next programmed diagnostic time. It is recommended to assign the diagnostic
time during non-peak traffic periods.

DEFAULT DATA
NO DIAGNOSTIC TIME SET

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 854.
Display shows:

DIAGNOSTIC TIME

2) Enter weekday number.
(0: Sun, 1: Mon, …, 6: Sat)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

DIAGNOSTIC TIME

3) Enter hour(24-hour clock) via the dial keypad.
Cursor will advance to next entry.

DIAGNOSTIC TIME

4) Enter minutes(24-hour clock) via the dial keypad.
Cursor will return to step 2.

DIAGNOSTIC TIME

SUN: :

SUN:_ :

SUN:23:_

SUN:23:30

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 851
MMC 852
MMC 853

ALARM REPORTING
SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS
MAINTENANCE BUSY

Samsung Business Communications

2-347

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[856] TECH PROGRAMMING LOGS
This MMC lists the date, time and entry location of the last eight times that technicianlevel programming was accessed. This allows a technician to determine if there was unauthorized access to system programming and where this access occurred. The information
stored in this log is displayed, for each of the eight accesses, as follows: first line shows the
start date and time of access; second line shows the access type(see table) and end date and
time of access.
There are four access types:
Type

Description

NNNN

The extension number of a phone that accessed programming directly(e.g., 3203)

MODEM

Programming was accessed by PCMMC via the integrated V90 modem attached to
the IOM board of the main cabinet.

LAN

Programming was accessed by PCMMC via the LAN connection on the MCP2 card
of main cabinet.

SIOx

Programming was accessed by PCMMC via one of the SIO connections on the IOM
board of the main cabinet, where x is the number(2 or 3) of the SIO port that was
used.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 856.
Display shows:

(1) 11/22 11:03Æ

2) Enter number 1-8 for required access display.
(e.g., 3)
OR
Press Volume button to scroll.

(3) 11/22 12:30Æ

3203 :11/22 11:27

3203 :11/22 13:30

3) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 800

2-348

ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[857] VIRTUAL CABINET SET
This MMC is the program that specifies the type of virtual cabinet card. The type of virtual
cabinet card is as follows:

Range

Type

Type

Range

SLT

C2S01 ~ C2S03

BRI STN

C4S02 ~ C5S01

DGP

C2S01 ~ C2S03

GCONF

C4S02 ~ C5S01

STN
WIRED ITP

C3S01 ~ C4S01

SPNET TRK

C3S02 ~ C5S03

WLAN ITP

C3S01 ~ C4S01

SIP TRK

C5S01 ~ C5S03

SIP STN

C3S01 ~ C4S01

H323 TRK

C5S01 ~ C5S03

IP UMS

-

DEFAULT DATA
Cabinet

2

4

Slot

Card Type

1

SLI

2

Cabinet

3

Slot

Card Type

1

WIRED ITP

DLI

2

WIRED ITP

3

DLI

3

WIRED ITP

1

WLAN ITP

1

SPNET TRK

2

BRI STN

2

SIP TRK

3

GCONF STN

3

H323 TRK

5

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 857.
Display shows:

C4-S01:SLT

2) Enter number 1-3 for cabinet number and enter number 1-12 for slot number.
OR
Press Volume button to scroll.

C4-S01:SLT

Samsung Business Communications

SLT

SLT

2-349

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

3) Press Volume botton to scroll card type and Select
card type by pressing Right soft botton.

C4-S01:SLT
DGP

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 724 NUMBER PLAB
MMC 822 VIR.EXT TYPE

2-350

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[859] HARDWARE VERSION DISPLAY
This MMC is used for system hardware EPLD/PCB version display. This is a READONLY MMC.
No

Option

Description

1

MP CARD

Shows the EPLD/PCB version of MCP.

2

C1S1

Shows the EPLD/PCB version of card in cabinet1/slot1.

3

C1S2

Shows the EPLD/PCB version of card in cabinet1/slot2

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 859.
Display shows:

EPLD/PCB VERSION

2) Enter the option number.
OR
Press Volume button to scroll.

EPLD/PCB VERSION

MP

CARD

C1S1 : UNI

:V30

:V30

3) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-351

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[861] SYSTEM OPTIONS
Sets a number of system options.

DEFAULT DATA
AUTO UPDATE TIME: DISABLE
SYSTEM SPEED BIN: MAX 500
IDLE WHEN ENBLOC: DISABLE
2 LINE ENBLOCK: DISABLE
2 ZONE EXT PAGE: DISABLE
USE LB FOR PAGE: NONE
LP TRK TONE DISC: DISABLE
ISDN SS FEATURE: DISABLE
SPNET OVERLAP: DISABLE
SPNET CLI TABLE: NONE
E-LCR CLI TABLE: NONE
EXTERNAL BGM/MOH: INT.CHIME
No
1

Option
AUTO UPDATE TIME

Description
Sets enable(1) or disable(0) the system automatically time and
date update from ISDN call connection message. If sets enable,
when system receives ISDN call connection message, system
checks valid data of encapsulated time and date, and update
system time and date device.

2

SYSTEM SPPED BIN

Sets max 500(0) or max 950(1) for the maximum number of system speed dial bin.

3

IDLE WHEN ENBLOC

Decides the state of Large LCD Phone treated as idle or busy
when the user of Large LCD Phone is dialling in ENBLOCK
mode.

4

2 LINE ENBLOCK

Decides the usage of ENBLOCK mode for 2 line LCD Phone with
navigation buttons.

7

LP TRK TONE DISC

When this option is set to ON, loop trunk can be disconnected by
detecting busy tone.

8

ISDN SS FEATURE

9

SPNET OVERLAP

Decides whether ISDN SS(Supplement Service) is used or not.
To assign other dial tone, OVERLAP by spnet function can be
enable.

10

SPNET CLI TABLE

If network call and this option is set, CLI have to be applied by
CLI TABLE.

11

E-LCR CLI TABLE

If E-LCR call and this option is set, CLI have to be applied by CLI
TABLE.

12

EXTERNAL BGM/MOH

Backgroud music source can be use internal source or external
source, In case of external source, music source can be supported in MISC port.

2-352

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 861.
Display shows:

AUTO UPDATE TIME

2) Enter the option number.
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

AUTO UPDATE TIME

Samsung Business Communications

DISABLE

DISABLE

2-353

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

3) Enter 1 or 0 to enable or disable.
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to store.

AUTO UPDATE TIME
ENABLE

4) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
MMC 107
MMC 505
MMC 606
MMC 705
MMC 706
MMC 722
MMC 723

2-354

KEY EXTENDER
ASSIGN DATE AND TIME
ASSIGN SPEED DIAL BLOCK
SYSTEM SPEED DIAL
SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME
STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

[863] NODE INFO
This MMC allows 1000 systems to be connected by u spnet service.
No

Option

Description

1

ACCESS NUM

Sets the system node ID

2

IP ADDR

Sets the system IP address

3

TEL NUMBER

Sets the system CO tel number

4

MAX COUNT

Sets this value to support ENBLOCK DIAL MODE.

CONDITIONS
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 863.
Display shows:

(0001) ACCESS NUM

2) Select the entry number.(0001 ~ 2000)
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.

(0001) ACCESS NUM

3) Select the option number.(0~3)
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor.
(e.g ACCESS NUM)

(0001) ACCESS NUM

4) Enter the system node ID

(0001) ACCESS NUM

Right Soft button to save.
5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

Samsung Business Communications

2-355

CHAPTER 2. Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

[890] INITIALIZE PORT
This MMC clears a call process or initializes the database for specific station or trunks.
This will return the port to default condition.

DEFAULT DATA
NONE

ACTION

DISPLAY

1) Press Transfer button and enter 890.
Display shows:

[201] CALL CLEAR

2) Enter the station or Trunk line.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
the Right Soft button to move cursor.

[202] CALL CLEAR

3) Enter 0 to call clear only or 1 to initialize port.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
the Right Soft button to move cursor.

[202] DB INITIAL

4) Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
the Right Soft button to save and return to step 2.

[202] DB INITIAL

ARE YOU SURE?NO

ARE YOU SURE?NO

ARE YOU SURE?NO

ARE YOU SURE?YES

5) Press Transfer button to save and exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC.

RELATED ITEMS
NONE

2-356

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

ABBREVIATION

A
AAA

Authentication, Authorization and Accounting

AC

Alternating Current

ACD

Automatic Call Distribution

ALG

Application Level Gateway

AME

Answering Machine Emulation

AMI

Alternate Mark Inversion

AOM

Add On Module

AP

Access Point

BGM

Background Music

B
BRI

Basic Rate Interface

BWBS

Basic Wireless Base Station(Access Point)

CA

Call Agent

CCBS

Call Completion to Busy Subscriber

CCNR

Cell Completion on No Reply

CID

Caller Identification

CLI

Call Line Identification

COM

Communication

COS

Class Of Service

CPLD

Complex Programmable Logic Device

CRC

Cyclic Redundancy Code

CR Mode

Constant Resistance Mode

CSU

Communication Service Unit

C

CTI

Computer Telephony Integration

CWBS

Combo Wireless Base Station(Access Point)

Samsung Business Communications

I

Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

D
DASL

Digital Adapter Subscriber Loops

DID

Direct Inward Dialling

DECT

Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications

DGP

Digital Phone

DHCP

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

DLI

Digital Line Interface

DND

Do Not Disturb

DPIM

Door Phone Interface Module

DSP

Digital Signal Processor

DSU

Data Service Unit

DTMF

Dual Tone Multi Frequency

E&M

Ear&Mouth

E
EMI

Electro-Magnetic Interference

ESM

Expanded Switch Module

GARP

Generic Attribute Registration Protocol

GK

Gatekeeper

GVRP

GARP VLAN Registration Protocol

HDLC

High level Data Link Control

HLR

Home Location Register

HTML

Hypertext Markup Language

HTTP

Hypertext Transfer Protocol

ID

Identification

IDS

Intrusion Detection System

G

H

I

II

IGMP

Internet Group Management Protocol

IMAP

Internet Messaging Access Protocol

IN-SCP

Intelligent Network Service Control Point

IOM

Input/Output Module

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

IP

Internet Protocol

IPC

Inter-Processor Communication

IPDC

Internet Protocol Device Control

IPM

Inter-Processor Communications and Memory Module

IP-SCP

Internet Protocol Service Control Point

ISDN

Integrated Services Digital Network

ISUP

ISDN User Part

ITM

IP Telephony Module

ITP

IP Telephone

KDB

Keyset Daughterboard

K

L
LAN

Local Area Network

LCD

Liquid Crystal Display

LCP

Local Control Processor

LED

Light Emitting Diode

LIM

LAN Interface Module

MCP

Main Control Processor

MDF

Main Distribution Frame

MEGACO

Media Gateway Control

MFM

Multi Frequency Module

MG

Media Gateway

MGC

Media Gateway Controller

M

MGI

Media Gateway Interface

MGCP

Media Gateway Control Protocol

MISC

Miscellaneous Function Module

MMC

Man Machine Communication

MWSLI

Message Waiting Single Line Interface

NAT

Network Address Translation

NMS

Network Management System

N

Samsung Business Communications

III

Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

O
OPX

Off Premises Extension

PAT

Port Address Translation

PBA

Printed(circuit) Board Assembly

PCB

Printed Circuit Board

PCM

Pulse Code Modulation

PCMMC

PC-based Man Machine Communication

PLL

Phase Locking Loop

POP3

Post Office Protocol version 3

PPP

Point to Point Protocol

PPPoE

Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet

PRI

Primary Rate Interface

PRS

Polarity Reverse Detection

PSTN

Public Switched Telephone Network

PSU

Power Supply Unit

Q-SIG

Q-Signalling

QoS

Quality of Service

RCM

R2/CID Module

RIP

Routing Information Protocol

RTCP

Real-time Transmission Control Protocol

RTP

Real-time Transmission Protocol

SCM

Switch and Conference Module

P

Q

R

S

IV

SCP

Signal Control Processor

SDP

Session Description Protocol

SG

Signalling Gateway

SGCP

Simple Gateway Control Protocol

SIGTRAN

Signalling Transport

SIO

Serial Input/Output

SIP

Session Initiation Protocol

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server Programming Guide

SLI

Single Line Interface

SLT

Single Line Telephone

SMDR

Station Message Detail Recording

SMTP

Simple Mail Transfer Protocol

SoL

Server optimized Linux

STA

Spanning Tree Algorithm

STP

Signalling Transfer Point

SVMi

Samsung Voice Mail(integrated)

TAPI

Telephony Application Programming Interface

TCAP

Transmission Control Application Part

TCP

Transmission Control Protocol

TEPRI

T1E1PRI

TRK

Trunk

UA

User Agent

UAC

User Agent Client

UART

Universal Asynchronous Receiver and Transmitter

UAS

User Agent Server

UCD

Uniform Call Distribution

UDP

User Datagram Protocol

UPS

Uninterruptible Power System

USB

Universal Serial Bus

VDIAL

Voice Dial

T

U

V
VLAN

Virtual LAN

VoIP

Voice over Internet Protocol

VPM

Voice Processing Module

VPN

Virtual Private Network

Samsung Business Communications

V

Ошибка! Стиль не определен.

W
WAN

Wide Area Network

WBS

Wireless Base Station

WIM

WAN Interface Module

WLI

Wireless LAN Interface

xDSL

x-Digital Subscriber Line

X

VI

Samsung Business Communications

OfficeServ 7100 Call Server

Programming Guide
©2007 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
All rights reserved.

Information in this giude is proprietary to SAMSUNG Electronics
Co., Ltd.
No information contained here may be copied, translated, transcribed or duplicated by any form without the prior written consent of SAMSUNG.
Information in this guide is subject to change without notice.



Source Exif Data:
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : Yes
XMP Toolkit                     : 3.1-701
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 7.0 (Windows)
Create Date                     : 2007:08:21 11:53:22+04:00
Creator Tool                    : PScript5.dll Version 5.2
Modify Date                     : 2007:08:21 11:53:22+04:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : Microsoft Word - UK_OfficeServ 7100 call Server Programming Guide.doc
Creator                         : Butsev_L
Document ID                     : uuid:b44747f9-ff80-4f1c-ad85-f00fa901c03d
Instance ID                     : uuid:8692f01f-2b0a-4923-8dd9-17a3ac703124
Page Count                      : 407
Author                          : Butsev_L
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu